1  import {Request} from '../lib/request';
   2  import {Response} from '../lib/response';
   3  import {AWSError} from '../lib/error';
   4  import {S3Customizations} from '../lib/services/s3';
   5  import {WaiterConfiguration} from '../lib/service';
   6  import {ServiceConfigurationOptions} from '../lib/service';
   7  import {ConfigBase as Config} from '../lib/config-base';
   8  import {UseDualstackConfigOptions} from '../lib/config_use_dualstack';
   9  import {EventStream} from '../lib/event-stream/event-stream';
  10  import {ManagedUpload as managed_upload} from '../lib/s3/managed_upload';
  11  import {PresignedPost as presigned_post} from '../lib/s3/presigned_post';
  12  import {Readable} from 'stream';
  13  interface Blob {}
  14  declare class S3 extends S3Customizations {
  15    /**
  16     * Constructs a service object. This object has one method for each API operation.
  17     */
  18    constructor(options?: S3.Types.ClientConfiguration)
  19    config: Config & S3.Types.ClientConfiguration;
  20    /**
  21     * This action aborts a multipart upload. After a multipart upload is aborted, no additional parts can be uploaded using that upload ID. The storage consumed by any previously uploaded parts will be freed. However, if any part uploads are currently in progress, those part uploads might or might not succeed. As a result, it might be necessary to abort a given multipart upload multiple times in order to completely free all storage consumed by all parts.  To verify that all parts have been removed, so you don't get charged for the part storage, you should call the ListParts action and ensure that the parts list is empty. For information about permissions required to use the multipart upload, see Multipart Upload and Permissions. The following operations are related to AbortMultipartUpload:    CreateMultipartUpload     UploadPart     CompleteMultipartUpload     ListParts     ListMultipartUploads   
  22     */
  23    abortMultipartUpload(params: S3.Types.AbortMultipartUploadRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.AbortMultipartUploadOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.AbortMultipartUploadOutput, AWSError>;
  24    /**
  25     * This action aborts a multipart upload. After a multipart upload is aborted, no additional parts can be uploaded using that upload ID. The storage consumed by any previously uploaded parts will be freed. However, if any part uploads are currently in progress, those part uploads might or might not succeed. As a result, it might be necessary to abort a given multipart upload multiple times in order to completely free all storage consumed by all parts.  To verify that all parts have been removed, so you don't get charged for the part storage, you should call the ListParts action and ensure that the parts list is empty. For information about permissions required to use the multipart upload, see Multipart Upload and Permissions. The following operations are related to AbortMultipartUpload:    CreateMultipartUpload     UploadPart     CompleteMultipartUpload     ListParts     ListMultipartUploads   
  26     */
  27    abortMultipartUpload(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.AbortMultipartUploadOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.AbortMultipartUploadOutput, AWSError>;
  28    /**
  29     * Completes a multipart upload by assembling previously uploaded parts. You first initiate the multipart upload and then upload all parts using the UploadPart operation. After successfully uploading all relevant parts of an upload, you call this action to complete the upload. Upon receiving this request, Amazon S3 concatenates all the parts in ascending order by part number to create a new object. In the Complete Multipart Upload request, you must provide the parts list. You must ensure that the parts list is complete. This action concatenates the parts that you provide in the list. For each part in the list, you must provide the part number and the ETag value, returned after that part was uploaded. Processing of a Complete Multipart Upload request could take several minutes to complete. After Amazon S3 begins processing the request, it sends an HTTP response header that specifies a 200 OK response. While processing is in progress, Amazon S3 periodically sends white space characters to keep the connection from timing out. Because a request could fail after the initial 200 OK response has been sent, it is important that you check the response body to determine whether the request succeeded. Note that if CompleteMultipartUpload fails, applications should be prepared to retry the failed requests. For more information, see Amazon S3 Error Best Practices. For more information about multipart uploads, see Uploading Objects Using Multipart Upload. For information about permissions required to use the multipart upload API, see Multipart Upload and Permissions.  CompleteMultipartUpload has the following special errors:   Error code: EntityTooSmall    Description: Your proposed upload is smaller than the minimum allowed object size. Each part must be at least 5 MB in size, except the last part.   400 Bad Request     Error code: InvalidPart    Description: One or more of the specified parts could not be found. The part might not have been uploaded, or the specified entity tag might not have matched the part's entity tag.   400 Bad Request     Error code: InvalidPartOrder    Description: The list of parts was not in ascending order. The parts list must be specified in order by part number.   400 Bad Request     Error code: NoSuchUpload    Description: The specified multipart upload does not exist. The upload ID might be invalid, or the multipart upload might have been aborted or completed.   404 Not Found     The following operations are related to CompleteMultipartUpload:    CreateMultipartUpload     UploadPart     AbortMultipartUpload     ListParts     ListMultipartUploads   
  30     */
  31    completeMultipartUpload(params: S3.Types.CompleteMultipartUploadRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.CompleteMultipartUploadOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.CompleteMultipartUploadOutput, AWSError>;
  32    /**
  33     * Completes a multipart upload by assembling previously uploaded parts. You first initiate the multipart upload and then upload all parts using the UploadPart operation. After successfully uploading all relevant parts of an upload, you call this action to complete the upload. Upon receiving this request, Amazon S3 concatenates all the parts in ascending order by part number to create a new object. In the Complete Multipart Upload request, you must provide the parts list. You must ensure that the parts list is complete. This action concatenates the parts that you provide in the list. For each part in the list, you must provide the part number and the ETag value, returned after that part was uploaded. Processing of a Complete Multipart Upload request could take several minutes to complete. After Amazon S3 begins processing the request, it sends an HTTP response header that specifies a 200 OK response. While processing is in progress, Amazon S3 periodically sends white space characters to keep the connection from timing out. Because a request could fail after the initial 200 OK response has been sent, it is important that you check the response body to determine whether the request succeeded. Note that if CompleteMultipartUpload fails, applications should be prepared to retry the failed requests. For more information, see Amazon S3 Error Best Practices. For more information about multipart uploads, see Uploading Objects Using Multipart Upload. For information about permissions required to use the multipart upload API, see Multipart Upload and Permissions.  CompleteMultipartUpload has the following special errors:   Error code: EntityTooSmall    Description: Your proposed upload is smaller than the minimum allowed object size. Each part must be at least 5 MB in size, except the last part.   400 Bad Request     Error code: InvalidPart    Description: One or more of the specified parts could not be found. The part might not have been uploaded, or the specified entity tag might not have matched the part's entity tag.   400 Bad Request     Error code: InvalidPartOrder    Description: The list of parts was not in ascending order. The parts list must be specified in order by part number.   400 Bad Request     Error code: NoSuchUpload    Description: The specified multipart upload does not exist. The upload ID might be invalid, or the multipart upload might have been aborted or completed.   404 Not Found     The following operations are related to CompleteMultipartUpload:    CreateMultipartUpload     UploadPart     AbortMultipartUpload     ListParts     ListMultipartUploads   
  34     */
  35    completeMultipartUpload(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.CompleteMultipartUploadOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.CompleteMultipartUploadOutput, AWSError>;
  36    /**
  37     * Creates a copy of an object that is already stored in Amazon S3.  You can store individual objects of up to 5 TB in Amazon S3. You create a copy of your object up to 5 GB in size in a single atomic action using this API. However, to copy an object greater than 5 GB, you must use the multipart upload Upload Part - Copy API. For more information, see Copy Object Using the REST Multipart Upload API.  All copy requests must be authenticated. Additionally, you must have read access to the source object and write access to the destination bucket. For more information, see REST Authentication. Both the Region that you want to copy the object from and the Region that you want to copy the object to must be enabled for your account. A copy request might return an error when Amazon S3 receives the copy request or while Amazon S3 is copying the files. If the error occurs before the copy action starts, you receive a standard Amazon S3 error. If the error occurs during the copy operation, the error response is embedded in the 200 OK response. This means that a 200 OK response can contain either a success or an error. Design your application to parse the contents of the response and handle it appropriately. If the copy is successful, you receive a response with information about the copied object.  If the request is an HTTP 1.1 request, the response is chunk encoded. If it were not, it would not contain the content-length, and you would need to read the entire body.  The copy request charge is based on the storage class and Region that you specify for the destination object. For pricing information, see Amazon S3 pricing.  Amazon S3 transfer acceleration does not support cross-Region copies. If you request a cross-Region copy using a transfer acceleration endpoint, you get a 400 Bad Request error. For more information, see Transfer Acceleration.   Metadata  When copying an object, you can preserve all metadata (default) or specify new metadata. However, the ACL is not preserved and is set to private for the user making the request. To override the default ACL setting, specify a new ACL when generating a copy request. For more information, see Using ACLs.  To specify whether you want the object metadata copied from the source object or replaced with metadata provided in the request, you can optionally add the x-amz-metadata-directive header. When you grant permissions, you can use the s3:x-amz-metadata-directive condition key to enforce certain metadata behavior when objects are uploaded. For more information, see Specifying Conditions in a Policy in the Amazon S3 User Guide. For a complete list of Amazon S3-specific condition keys, see Actions, Resources, and Condition Keys for Amazon S3.   x-amz-copy-source-if Headers  To only copy an object under certain conditions, such as whether the Etag matches or whether the object was modified before or after a specified date, use the following request parameters:    x-amz-copy-source-if-match     x-amz-copy-source-if-none-match     x-amz-copy-source-if-unmodified-since     x-amz-copy-source-if-modified-since     If both the x-amz-copy-source-if-match and x-amz-copy-source-if-unmodified-since headers are present in the request and evaluate as follows, Amazon S3 returns 200 OK and copies the data:    x-amz-copy-source-if-match condition evaluates to true    x-amz-copy-source-if-unmodified-since condition evaluates to false   If both the x-amz-copy-source-if-none-match and x-amz-copy-source-if-modified-since headers are present in the request and evaluate as follows, Amazon S3 returns the 412 Precondition Failed response code:    x-amz-copy-source-if-none-match condition evaluates to false    x-amz-copy-source-if-modified-since condition evaluates to true    All headers with the x-amz- prefix, including x-amz-copy-source, must be signed.   Server-side encryption  When you perform a CopyObject operation, you can optionally use the appropriate encryption-related headers to encrypt the object using server-side encryption with Amazon Web Services managed encryption keys (SSE-S3 or SSE-KMS) or a customer-provided encryption key. With server-side encryption, Amazon S3 encrypts your data as it writes it to disks in its data centers and decrypts the data when you access it. For more information about server-side encryption, see Using Server-Side Encryption. If a target object uses SSE-KMS, you can enable an S3 Bucket Key for the object. For more information, see Amazon S3 Bucket Keys in the Amazon S3 User Guide.  Access Control List (ACL)-Specific Request Headers  When copying an object, you can optionally use headers to grant ACL-based permissions. By default, all objects are private. Only the owner has full access control. When adding a new object, you can grant permissions to individual Amazon Web Services accounts or to predefined groups defined by Amazon S3. These permissions are then added to the ACL on the object. For more information, see Access Control List (ACL) Overview and Managing ACLs Using the REST API.   Storage Class Options  You can use the CopyObject action to change the storage class of an object that is already stored in Amazon S3 using the StorageClass parameter. For more information, see Storage Classes in the Amazon S3 User Guide.  Versioning  By default, x-amz-copy-source identifies the current version of an object to copy. If the current version is a delete marker, Amazon S3 behaves as if the object was deleted. To copy a different version, use the versionId subresource. If you enable versioning on the target bucket, Amazon S3 generates a unique version ID for the object being copied. This version ID is different from the version ID of the source object. Amazon S3 returns the version ID of the copied object in the x-amz-version-id response header in the response. If you do not enable versioning or suspend it on the target bucket, the version ID that Amazon S3 generates is always null. If the source object's storage class is GLACIER, you must restore a copy of this object before you can use it as a source object for the copy operation. For more information, see RestoreObject. The following operations are related to CopyObject:    PutObject     GetObject    For more information, see Copying Objects.
  38     */
  39    copyObject(params: S3.Types.CopyObjectRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.CopyObjectOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.CopyObjectOutput, AWSError>;
  40    /**
  41     * Creates a copy of an object that is already stored in Amazon S3.  You can store individual objects of up to 5 TB in Amazon S3. You create a copy of your object up to 5 GB in size in a single atomic action using this API. However, to copy an object greater than 5 GB, you must use the multipart upload Upload Part - Copy API. For more information, see Copy Object Using the REST Multipart Upload API.  All copy requests must be authenticated. Additionally, you must have read access to the source object and write access to the destination bucket. For more information, see REST Authentication. Both the Region that you want to copy the object from and the Region that you want to copy the object to must be enabled for your account. A copy request might return an error when Amazon S3 receives the copy request or while Amazon S3 is copying the files. If the error occurs before the copy action starts, you receive a standard Amazon S3 error. If the error occurs during the copy operation, the error response is embedded in the 200 OK response. This means that a 200 OK response can contain either a success or an error. Design your application to parse the contents of the response and handle it appropriately. If the copy is successful, you receive a response with information about the copied object.  If the request is an HTTP 1.1 request, the response is chunk encoded. If it were not, it would not contain the content-length, and you would need to read the entire body.  The copy request charge is based on the storage class and Region that you specify for the destination object. For pricing information, see Amazon S3 pricing.  Amazon S3 transfer acceleration does not support cross-Region copies. If you request a cross-Region copy using a transfer acceleration endpoint, you get a 400 Bad Request error. For more information, see Transfer Acceleration.   Metadata  When copying an object, you can preserve all metadata (default) or specify new metadata. However, the ACL is not preserved and is set to private for the user making the request. To override the default ACL setting, specify a new ACL when generating a copy request. For more information, see Using ACLs.  To specify whether you want the object metadata copied from the source object or replaced with metadata provided in the request, you can optionally add the x-amz-metadata-directive header. When you grant permissions, you can use the s3:x-amz-metadata-directive condition key to enforce certain metadata behavior when objects are uploaded. For more information, see Specifying Conditions in a Policy in the Amazon S3 User Guide. For a complete list of Amazon S3-specific condition keys, see Actions, Resources, and Condition Keys for Amazon S3.   x-amz-copy-source-if Headers  To only copy an object under certain conditions, such as whether the Etag matches or whether the object was modified before or after a specified date, use the following request parameters:    x-amz-copy-source-if-match     x-amz-copy-source-if-none-match     x-amz-copy-source-if-unmodified-since     x-amz-copy-source-if-modified-since     If both the x-amz-copy-source-if-match and x-amz-copy-source-if-unmodified-since headers are present in the request and evaluate as follows, Amazon S3 returns 200 OK and copies the data:    x-amz-copy-source-if-match condition evaluates to true    x-amz-copy-source-if-unmodified-since condition evaluates to false   If both the x-amz-copy-source-if-none-match and x-amz-copy-source-if-modified-since headers are present in the request and evaluate as follows, Amazon S3 returns the 412 Precondition Failed response code:    x-amz-copy-source-if-none-match condition evaluates to false    x-amz-copy-source-if-modified-since condition evaluates to true    All headers with the x-amz- prefix, including x-amz-copy-source, must be signed.   Server-side encryption  When you perform a CopyObject operation, you can optionally use the appropriate encryption-related headers to encrypt the object using server-side encryption with Amazon Web Services managed encryption keys (SSE-S3 or SSE-KMS) or a customer-provided encryption key. With server-side encryption, Amazon S3 encrypts your data as it writes it to disks in its data centers and decrypts the data when you access it. For more information about server-side encryption, see Using Server-Side Encryption. If a target object uses SSE-KMS, you can enable an S3 Bucket Key for the object. For more information, see Amazon S3 Bucket Keys in the Amazon S3 User Guide.  Access Control List (ACL)-Specific Request Headers  When copying an object, you can optionally use headers to grant ACL-based permissions. By default, all objects are private. Only the owner has full access control. When adding a new object, you can grant permissions to individual Amazon Web Services accounts or to predefined groups defined by Amazon S3. These permissions are then added to the ACL on the object. For more information, see Access Control List (ACL) Overview and Managing ACLs Using the REST API.   Storage Class Options  You can use the CopyObject action to change the storage class of an object that is already stored in Amazon S3 using the StorageClass parameter. For more information, see Storage Classes in the Amazon S3 User Guide.  Versioning  By default, x-amz-copy-source identifies the current version of an object to copy. If the current version is a delete marker, Amazon S3 behaves as if the object was deleted. To copy a different version, use the versionId subresource. If you enable versioning on the target bucket, Amazon S3 generates a unique version ID for the object being copied. This version ID is different from the version ID of the source object. Amazon S3 returns the version ID of the copied object in the x-amz-version-id response header in the response. If you do not enable versioning or suspend it on the target bucket, the version ID that Amazon S3 generates is always null. If the source object's storage class is GLACIER, you must restore a copy of this object before you can use it as a source object for the copy operation. For more information, see RestoreObject. The following operations are related to CopyObject:    PutObject     GetObject    For more information, see Copying Objects.
  42     */
  43    copyObject(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.CopyObjectOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.CopyObjectOutput, AWSError>;
  44    /**
  45     * Creates a new S3 bucket. To create a bucket, you must register with Amazon S3 and have a valid Amazon Web Services Access Key ID to authenticate requests. Anonymous requests are never allowed to create buckets. By creating the bucket, you become the bucket owner. Not every string is an acceptable bucket name. For information about bucket naming restrictions, see Bucket naming rules. If you want to create an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket, see Create Bucket.  By default, the bucket is created in the US East (N. Virginia) Region. You can optionally specify a Region in the request body. You might choose a Region to optimize latency, minimize costs, or address regulatory requirements. For example, if you reside in Europe, you will probably find it advantageous to create buckets in the Europe (Ireland) Region. For more information, see Accessing a bucket.  If you send your create bucket request to the s3.amazonaws.com endpoint, the request goes to the us-east-1 Region. Accordingly, the signature calculations in Signature Version 4 must use us-east-1 as the Region, even if the location constraint in the request specifies another Region where the bucket is to be created. If you create a bucket in a Region other than US East (N. Virginia), your application must be able to handle 307 redirect. For more information, see Virtual hosting of buckets.  When creating a bucket using this operation, you can optionally specify the accounts or groups that should be granted specific permissions on the bucket. There are two ways to grant the appropriate permissions using the request headers.   Specify a canned ACL using the x-amz-acl request header. Amazon S3 supports a set of predefined ACLs, known as canned ACLs. Each canned ACL has a predefined set of grantees and permissions. For more information, see Canned ACL.   Specify access permissions explicitly using the x-amz-grant-read, x-amz-grant-write, x-amz-grant-read-acp, x-amz-grant-write-acp, and x-amz-grant-full-control headers. These headers map to the set of permissions Amazon S3 supports in an ACL. For more information, see Access control list (ACL) overview. You specify each grantee as a type=value pair, where the type is one of the following:    id – if the value specified is the canonical user ID of an Amazon Web Services account    uri – if you are granting permissions to a predefined group    emailAddress – if the value specified is the email address of an Amazon Web Services account  Using email addresses to specify a grantee is only supported in the following Amazon Web Services Regions:    US East (N. Virginia)   US West (N. California)    US West (Oregon)    Asia Pacific (Singapore)   Asia Pacific (Sydney)   Asia Pacific (Tokyo)   Europe (Ireland)   South America (São Paulo)   For a list of all the Amazon S3 supported Regions and endpoints, see Regions and Endpoints in the Amazon Web Services General Reference.    For example, the following x-amz-grant-read header grants the Amazon Web Services accounts identified by account IDs permissions to read object data and its metadata:  x-amz-grant-read: id="11112222333", id="444455556666"      You can use either a canned ACL or specify access permissions explicitly. You cannot do both.   Permissions  If your CreateBucket request specifies ACL permissions and the ACL is public-read, public-read-write, authenticated-read, or if you specify access permissions explicitly through any other ACL, both s3:CreateBucket and s3:PutBucketAcl permissions are needed. If the ACL the CreateBucket request is private, only s3:CreateBucket permission is needed.  If ObjectLockEnabledForBucket is set to true in your CreateBucket request, s3:PutBucketObjectLockConfiguration and s3:PutBucketVersioning permissions are required. The following operations are related to CreateBucket:    PutObject     DeleteBucket   
  46     */
  47    createBucket(params: S3.Types.CreateBucketRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.CreateBucketOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.CreateBucketOutput, AWSError>;
  48    /**
  49     * Creates a new S3 bucket. To create a bucket, you must register with Amazon S3 and have a valid Amazon Web Services Access Key ID to authenticate requests. Anonymous requests are never allowed to create buckets. By creating the bucket, you become the bucket owner. Not every string is an acceptable bucket name. For information about bucket naming restrictions, see Bucket naming rules. If you want to create an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket, see Create Bucket.  By default, the bucket is created in the US East (N. Virginia) Region. You can optionally specify a Region in the request body. You might choose a Region to optimize latency, minimize costs, or address regulatory requirements. For example, if you reside in Europe, you will probably find it advantageous to create buckets in the Europe (Ireland) Region. For more information, see Accessing a bucket.  If you send your create bucket request to the s3.amazonaws.com endpoint, the request goes to the us-east-1 Region. Accordingly, the signature calculations in Signature Version 4 must use us-east-1 as the Region, even if the location constraint in the request specifies another Region where the bucket is to be created. If you create a bucket in a Region other than US East (N. Virginia), your application must be able to handle 307 redirect. For more information, see Virtual hosting of buckets.  When creating a bucket using this operation, you can optionally specify the accounts or groups that should be granted specific permissions on the bucket. There are two ways to grant the appropriate permissions using the request headers.   Specify a canned ACL using the x-amz-acl request header. Amazon S3 supports a set of predefined ACLs, known as canned ACLs. Each canned ACL has a predefined set of grantees and permissions. For more information, see Canned ACL.   Specify access permissions explicitly using the x-amz-grant-read, x-amz-grant-write, x-amz-grant-read-acp, x-amz-grant-write-acp, and x-amz-grant-full-control headers. These headers map to the set of permissions Amazon S3 supports in an ACL. For more information, see Access control list (ACL) overview. You specify each grantee as a type=value pair, where the type is one of the following:    id – if the value specified is the canonical user ID of an Amazon Web Services account    uri – if you are granting permissions to a predefined group    emailAddress – if the value specified is the email address of an Amazon Web Services account  Using email addresses to specify a grantee is only supported in the following Amazon Web Services Regions:    US East (N. Virginia)   US West (N. California)    US West (Oregon)    Asia Pacific (Singapore)   Asia Pacific (Sydney)   Asia Pacific (Tokyo)   Europe (Ireland)   South America (São Paulo)   For a list of all the Amazon S3 supported Regions and endpoints, see Regions and Endpoints in the Amazon Web Services General Reference.    For example, the following x-amz-grant-read header grants the Amazon Web Services accounts identified by account IDs permissions to read object data and its metadata:  x-amz-grant-read: id="11112222333", id="444455556666"      You can use either a canned ACL or specify access permissions explicitly. You cannot do both.   Permissions  If your CreateBucket request specifies ACL permissions and the ACL is public-read, public-read-write, authenticated-read, or if you specify access permissions explicitly through any other ACL, both s3:CreateBucket and s3:PutBucketAcl permissions are needed. If the ACL the CreateBucket request is private, only s3:CreateBucket permission is needed.  If ObjectLockEnabledForBucket is set to true in your CreateBucket request, s3:PutBucketObjectLockConfiguration and s3:PutBucketVersioning permissions are required. The following operations are related to CreateBucket:    PutObject     DeleteBucket   
  50     */
  51    createBucket(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.CreateBucketOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.CreateBucketOutput, AWSError>;
  52    /**
  53     * This action initiates a multipart upload and returns an upload ID. This upload ID is used to associate all of the parts in the specific multipart upload. You specify this upload ID in each of your subsequent upload part requests (see UploadPart). You also include this upload ID in the final request to either complete or abort the multipart upload request. For more information about multipart uploads, see Multipart Upload Overview. If you have configured a lifecycle rule to abort incomplete multipart uploads, the upload must complete within the number of days specified in the bucket lifecycle configuration. Otherwise, the incomplete multipart upload becomes eligible for an abort action and Amazon S3 aborts the multipart upload. For more information, see Aborting Incomplete Multipart Uploads Using a Bucket Lifecycle Policy. For information about the permissions required to use the multipart upload API, see Multipart Upload and Permissions. For request signing, multipart upload is just a series of regular requests. You initiate a multipart upload, send one or more requests to upload parts, and then complete the multipart upload process. You sign each request individually. There is nothing special about signing multipart upload requests. For more information about signing, see Authenticating Requests (Amazon Web Services Signature Version 4).   After you initiate a multipart upload and upload one or more parts, to stop being charged for storing the uploaded parts, you must either complete or abort the multipart upload. Amazon S3 frees up the space used to store the parts and stop charging you for storing them only after you either complete or abort a multipart upload.   You can optionally request server-side encryption. For server-side encryption, Amazon S3 encrypts your data as it writes it to disks in its data centers and decrypts it when you access it. You can provide your own encryption key, or use Amazon Web Services Key Management Service (Amazon Web Services KMS) customer master keys (CMKs) or Amazon S3-managed encryption keys. If you choose to provide your own encryption key, the request headers you provide in UploadPart and UploadPartCopy requests must match the headers you used in the request to initiate the upload by using CreateMultipartUpload.  To perform a multipart upload with encryption using an Amazon Web Services KMS CMK, the requester must have permission to the kms:Decrypt and kms:GenerateDataKey* actions on the key. These permissions are required because Amazon S3 must decrypt and read data from the encrypted file parts before it completes the multipart upload. For more information, see Multipart upload API and permissions in the Amazon S3 User Guide. If your Identity and Access Management (IAM) user or role is in the same Amazon Web Services account as the Amazon Web Services KMS CMK, then you must have these permissions on the key policy. If your IAM user or role belongs to a different account than the key, then you must have the permissions on both the key policy and your IAM user or role.  For more information, see Protecting Data Using Server-Side Encryption.  Access Permissions  When copying an object, you can optionally specify the accounts or groups that should be granted specific permissions on the new object. There are two ways to grant the permissions using the request headers:   Specify a canned ACL with the x-amz-acl request header. For more information, see Canned ACL.   Specify access permissions explicitly with the x-amz-grant-read, x-amz-grant-read-acp, x-amz-grant-write-acp, and x-amz-grant-full-control headers. These parameters map to the set of permissions that Amazon S3 supports in an ACL. For more information, see Access Control List (ACL) Overview.   You can use either a canned ACL or specify access permissions explicitly. You cannot do both.  Server-Side- Encryption-Specific Request Headers  You can optionally tell Amazon S3 to encrypt data at rest using server-side encryption. Server-side encryption is for data encryption at rest. Amazon S3 encrypts your data as it writes it to disks in its data centers and decrypts it when you access it. The option you use depends on whether you want to use Amazon Web Services managed encryption keys or provide your own encryption key.    Use encryption keys managed by Amazon S3 or customer master keys (CMKs) stored in Amazon Web Services Key Management Service (Amazon Web Services KMS) – If you want Amazon Web Services to manage the keys used to encrypt data, specify the following headers in the request.   x-amz-server-side-encryption   x-amz-server-side-encryption-aws-kms-key-id   x-amz-server-side-encryption-context    If you specify x-amz-server-side-encryption:aws:kms, but don't provide x-amz-server-side-encryption-aws-kms-key-id, Amazon S3 uses the Amazon Web Services managed CMK in Amazon Web Services KMS to protect the data.   All GET and PUT requests for an object protected by Amazon Web Services KMS fail if you don't make them with SSL or by using SigV4.  For more information about server-side encryption with CMKs stored in Amazon Web Services KMS (SSE-KMS), see Protecting Data Using Server-Side Encryption with CMKs stored in Amazon Web Services KMS.   Use customer-provided encryption keys – If you want to manage your own encryption keys, provide all the following headers in the request.   x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-algorithm   x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-key   x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-key-MD5   For more information about server-side encryption with CMKs stored in Amazon Web Services KMS (SSE-KMS), see Protecting Data Using Server-Side Encryption with CMKs stored in Amazon Web Services KMS.    Access-Control-List (ACL)-Specific Request Headers  You also can use the following access control–related headers with this operation. By default, all objects are private. Only the owner has full access control. When adding a new object, you can grant permissions to individual Amazon Web Services accounts or to predefined groups defined by Amazon S3. These permissions are then added to the access control list (ACL) on the object. For more information, see Using ACLs. With this operation, you can grant access permissions using one of the following two methods:   Specify a canned ACL (x-amz-acl) — Amazon S3 supports a set of predefined ACLs, known as canned ACLs. Each canned ACL has a predefined set of grantees and permissions. For more information, see Canned ACL.   Specify access permissions explicitly — To explicitly grant access permissions to specific Amazon Web Services accounts or groups, use the following headers. Each header maps to specific permissions that Amazon S3 supports in an ACL. For more information, see Access Control List (ACL) Overview. In the header, you specify a list of grantees who get the specific permission. To grant permissions explicitly, use:   x-amz-grant-read   x-amz-grant-write   x-amz-grant-read-acp   x-amz-grant-write-acp   x-amz-grant-full-control   You specify each grantee as a type=value pair, where the type is one of the following:    id – if the value specified is the canonical user ID of an Amazon Web Services account    uri – if you are granting permissions to a predefined group    emailAddress – if the value specified is the email address of an Amazon Web Services account  Using email addresses to specify a grantee is only supported in the following Amazon Web Services Regions:    US East (N. Virginia)   US West (N. California)    US West (Oregon)    Asia Pacific (Singapore)   Asia Pacific (Sydney)   Asia Pacific (Tokyo)   Europe (Ireland)   South America (São Paulo)   For a list of all the Amazon S3 supported Regions and endpoints, see Regions and Endpoints in the Amazon Web Services General Reference.    For example, the following x-amz-grant-read header grants the Amazon Web Services accounts identified by account IDs permissions to read object data and its metadata:  x-amz-grant-read: id="11112222333", id="444455556666"       The following operations are related to CreateMultipartUpload:    UploadPart     CompleteMultipartUpload     AbortMultipartUpload     ListParts     ListMultipartUploads   
  54     */
  55    createMultipartUpload(params: S3.Types.CreateMultipartUploadRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.CreateMultipartUploadOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.CreateMultipartUploadOutput, AWSError>;
  56    /**
  57     * This action initiates a multipart upload and returns an upload ID. This upload ID is used to associate all of the parts in the specific multipart upload. You specify this upload ID in each of your subsequent upload part requests (see UploadPart). You also include this upload ID in the final request to either complete or abort the multipart upload request. For more information about multipart uploads, see Multipart Upload Overview. If you have configured a lifecycle rule to abort incomplete multipart uploads, the upload must complete within the number of days specified in the bucket lifecycle configuration. Otherwise, the incomplete multipart upload becomes eligible for an abort action and Amazon S3 aborts the multipart upload. For more information, see Aborting Incomplete Multipart Uploads Using a Bucket Lifecycle Policy. For information about the permissions required to use the multipart upload API, see Multipart Upload and Permissions. For request signing, multipart upload is just a series of regular requests. You initiate a multipart upload, send one or more requests to upload parts, and then complete the multipart upload process. You sign each request individually. There is nothing special about signing multipart upload requests. For more information about signing, see Authenticating Requests (Amazon Web Services Signature Version 4).   After you initiate a multipart upload and upload one or more parts, to stop being charged for storing the uploaded parts, you must either complete or abort the multipart upload. Amazon S3 frees up the space used to store the parts and stop charging you for storing them only after you either complete or abort a multipart upload.   You can optionally request server-side encryption. For server-side encryption, Amazon S3 encrypts your data as it writes it to disks in its data centers and decrypts it when you access it. You can provide your own encryption key, or use Amazon Web Services Key Management Service (Amazon Web Services KMS) customer master keys (CMKs) or Amazon S3-managed encryption keys. If you choose to provide your own encryption key, the request headers you provide in UploadPart and UploadPartCopy requests must match the headers you used in the request to initiate the upload by using CreateMultipartUpload.  To perform a multipart upload with encryption using an Amazon Web Services KMS CMK, the requester must have permission to the kms:Decrypt and kms:GenerateDataKey* actions on the key. These permissions are required because Amazon S3 must decrypt and read data from the encrypted file parts before it completes the multipart upload. For more information, see Multipart upload API and permissions in the Amazon S3 User Guide. If your Identity and Access Management (IAM) user or role is in the same Amazon Web Services account as the Amazon Web Services KMS CMK, then you must have these permissions on the key policy. If your IAM user or role belongs to a different account than the key, then you must have the permissions on both the key policy and your IAM user or role.  For more information, see Protecting Data Using Server-Side Encryption.  Access Permissions  When copying an object, you can optionally specify the accounts or groups that should be granted specific permissions on the new object. There are two ways to grant the permissions using the request headers:   Specify a canned ACL with the x-amz-acl request header. For more information, see Canned ACL.   Specify access permissions explicitly with the x-amz-grant-read, x-amz-grant-read-acp, x-amz-grant-write-acp, and x-amz-grant-full-control headers. These parameters map to the set of permissions that Amazon S3 supports in an ACL. For more information, see Access Control List (ACL) Overview.   You can use either a canned ACL or specify access permissions explicitly. You cannot do both.  Server-Side- Encryption-Specific Request Headers  You can optionally tell Amazon S3 to encrypt data at rest using server-side encryption. Server-side encryption is for data encryption at rest. Amazon S3 encrypts your data as it writes it to disks in its data centers and decrypts it when you access it. The option you use depends on whether you want to use Amazon Web Services managed encryption keys or provide your own encryption key.    Use encryption keys managed by Amazon S3 or customer master keys (CMKs) stored in Amazon Web Services Key Management Service (Amazon Web Services KMS) – If you want Amazon Web Services to manage the keys used to encrypt data, specify the following headers in the request.   x-amz-server-side-encryption   x-amz-server-side-encryption-aws-kms-key-id   x-amz-server-side-encryption-context    If you specify x-amz-server-side-encryption:aws:kms, but don't provide x-amz-server-side-encryption-aws-kms-key-id, Amazon S3 uses the Amazon Web Services managed CMK in Amazon Web Services KMS to protect the data.   All GET and PUT requests for an object protected by Amazon Web Services KMS fail if you don't make them with SSL or by using SigV4.  For more information about server-side encryption with CMKs stored in Amazon Web Services KMS (SSE-KMS), see Protecting Data Using Server-Side Encryption with CMKs stored in Amazon Web Services KMS.   Use customer-provided encryption keys – If you want to manage your own encryption keys, provide all the following headers in the request.   x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-algorithm   x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-key   x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-key-MD5   For more information about server-side encryption with CMKs stored in Amazon Web Services KMS (SSE-KMS), see Protecting Data Using Server-Side Encryption with CMKs stored in Amazon Web Services KMS.    Access-Control-List (ACL)-Specific Request Headers  You also can use the following access control–related headers with this operation. By default, all objects are private. Only the owner has full access control. When adding a new object, you can grant permissions to individual Amazon Web Services accounts or to predefined groups defined by Amazon S3. These permissions are then added to the access control list (ACL) on the object. For more information, see Using ACLs. With this operation, you can grant access permissions using one of the following two methods:   Specify a canned ACL (x-amz-acl) — Amazon S3 supports a set of predefined ACLs, known as canned ACLs. Each canned ACL has a predefined set of grantees and permissions. For more information, see Canned ACL.   Specify access permissions explicitly — To explicitly grant access permissions to specific Amazon Web Services accounts or groups, use the following headers. Each header maps to specific permissions that Amazon S3 supports in an ACL. For more information, see Access Control List (ACL) Overview. In the header, you specify a list of grantees who get the specific permission. To grant permissions explicitly, use:   x-amz-grant-read   x-amz-grant-write   x-amz-grant-read-acp   x-amz-grant-write-acp   x-amz-grant-full-control   You specify each grantee as a type=value pair, where the type is one of the following:    id – if the value specified is the canonical user ID of an Amazon Web Services account    uri – if you are granting permissions to a predefined group    emailAddress – if the value specified is the email address of an Amazon Web Services account  Using email addresses to specify a grantee is only supported in the following Amazon Web Services Regions:    US East (N. Virginia)   US West (N. California)    US West (Oregon)    Asia Pacific (Singapore)   Asia Pacific (Sydney)   Asia Pacific (Tokyo)   Europe (Ireland)   South America (São Paulo)   For a list of all the Amazon S3 supported Regions and endpoints, see Regions and Endpoints in the Amazon Web Services General Reference.    For example, the following x-amz-grant-read header grants the Amazon Web Services accounts identified by account IDs permissions to read object data and its metadata:  x-amz-grant-read: id="11112222333", id="444455556666"       The following operations are related to CreateMultipartUpload:    UploadPart     CompleteMultipartUpload     AbortMultipartUpload     ListParts     ListMultipartUploads   
  58     */
  59    createMultipartUpload(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.CreateMultipartUploadOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.CreateMultipartUploadOutput, AWSError>;
  60    /**
  61     * Deletes the S3 bucket. All objects (including all object versions and delete markers) in the bucket must be deleted before the bucket itself can be deleted.  Related Resources     CreateBucket     DeleteObject   
  62     */
  63    deleteBucket(params: S3.Types.DeleteBucketRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
  64    /**
  65     * Deletes the S3 bucket. All objects (including all object versions and delete markers) in the bucket must be deleted before the bucket itself can be deleted.  Related Resources     CreateBucket     DeleteObject   
  66     */
  67    deleteBucket(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
  68    /**
  69     * Deletes an analytics configuration for the bucket (specified by the analytics configuration ID). To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:PutAnalyticsConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission by default. The bucket owner can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources. For information about the Amazon S3 analytics feature, see Amazon S3 Analytics – Storage Class Analysis.  The following operations are related to DeleteBucketAnalyticsConfiguration:    GetBucketAnalyticsConfiguration     ListBucketAnalyticsConfigurations     PutBucketAnalyticsConfiguration   
  70     */
  71    deleteBucketAnalyticsConfiguration(params: S3.Types.DeleteBucketAnalyticsConfigurationRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
  72    /**
  73     * Deletes an analytics configuration for the bucket (specified by the analytics configuration ID). To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:PutAnalyticsConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission by default. The bucket owner can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources. For information about the Amazon S3 analytics feature, see Amazon S3 Analytics – Storage Class Analysis.  The following operations are related to DeleteBucketAnalyticsConfiguration:    GetBucketAnalyticsConfiguration     ListBucketAnalyticsConfigurations     PutBucketAnalyticsConfiguration   
  74     */
  75    deleteBucketAnalyticsConfiguration(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
  76    /**
  77     * Deletes the cors configuration information set for the bucket. To use this operation, you must have permission to perform the s3:PutBucketCORS action. The bucket owner has this permission by default and can grant this permission to others.  For information about cors, see Enabling Cross-Origin Resource Sharing in the Amazon S3 User Guide.  Related Resources:     PutBucketCors     RESTOPTIONSobject   
  78     */
  79    deleteBucketCors(params: S3.Types.DeleteBucketCorsRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
  80    /**
  81     * Deletes the cors configuration information set for the bucket. To use this operation, you must have permission to perform the s3:PutBucketCORS action. The bucket owner has this permission by default and can grant this permission to others.  For information about cors, see Enabling Cross-Origin Resource Sharing in the Amazon S3 User Guide.  Related Resources:     PutBucketCors     RESTOPTIONSobject   
  82     */
  83    deleteBucketCors(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
  84    /**
  85     * This implementation of the DELETE action removes default encryption from the bucket. For information about the Amazon S3 default encryption feature, see Amazon S3 Default Bucket Encryption in the Amazon S3 User Guide. To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:PutEncryptionConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission by default. The bucket owner can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations and Managing Access Permissions to your Amazon S3 Resources in the Amazon S3 User Guide.  Related Resources     PutBucketEncryption     GetBucketEncryption   
  86     */
  87    deleteBucketEncryption(params: S3.Types.DeleteBucketEncryptionRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
  88    /**
  89     * This implementation of the DELETE action removes default encryption from the bucket. For information about the Amazon S3 default encryption feature, see Amazon S3 Default Bucket Encryption in the Amazon S3 User Guide. To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:PutEncryptionConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission by default. The bucket owner can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations and Managing Access Permissions to your Amazon S3 Resources in the Amazon S3 User Guide.  Related Resources     PutBucketEncryption     GetBucketEncryption   
  90     */
  91    deleteBucketEncryption(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
  92    /**
  93     * Deletes the S3 Intelligent-Tiering configuration from the specified bucket. The S3 Intelligent-Tiering storage class is designed to optimize storage costs by automatically moving data to the most cost-effective storage access tier, without additional operational overhead. S3 Intelligent-Tiering delivers automatic cost savings by moving data between access tiers, when access patterns change. The S3 Intelligent-Tiering storage class is suitable for objects larger than 128 KB that you plan to store for at least 30 days. If the size of an object is less than 128 KB, it is not eligible for auto-tiering. Smaller objects can be stored, but they are always charged at the frequent access tier rates in the S3 Intelligent-Tiering storage class.  If you delete an object before the end of the 30-day minimum storage duration period, you are charged for 30 days. For more information, see Storage class for automatically optimizing frequently and infrequently accessed objects. Operations related to DeleteBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration include:     GetBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration     PutBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration     ListBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurations   
  94     */
  95    deleteBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration(params: S3.Types.DeleteBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurationRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
  96    /**
  97     * Deletes the S3 Intelligent-Tiering configuration from the specified bucket. The S3 Intelligent-Tiering storage class is designed to optimize storage costs by automatically moving data to the most cost-effective storage access tier, without additional operational overhead. S3 Intelligent-Tiering delivers automatic cost savings by moving data between access tiers, when access patterns change. The S3 Intelligent-Tiering storage class is suitable for objects larger than 128 KB that you plan to store for at least 30 days. If the size of an object is less than 128 KB, it is not eligible for auto-tiering. Smaller objects can be stored, but they are always charged at the frequent access tier rates in the S3 Intelligent-Tiering storage class.  If you delete an object before the end of the 30-day minimum storage duration period, you are charged for 30 days. For more information, see Storage class for automatically optimizing frequently and infrequently accessed objects. Operations related to DeleteBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration include:     GetBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration     PutBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration     ListBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurations   
  98     */
  99    deleteBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 100    /**
 101     * Deletes an inventory configuration (identified by the inventory ID) from the bucket. To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:PutInventoryConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission by default. The bucket owner can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources. For information about the Amazon S3 inventory feature, see Amazon S3 Inventory. Operations related to DeleteBucketInventoryConfiguration include:     GetBucketInventoryConfiguration     PutBucketInventoryConfiguration     ListBucketInventoryConfigurations   
 102     */
 103    deleteBucketInventoryConfiguration(params: S3.Types.DeleteBucketInventoryConfigurationRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 104    /**
 105     * Deletes an inventory configuration (identified by the inventory ID) from the bucket. To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:PutInventoryConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission by default. The bucket owner can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources. For information about the Amazon S3 inventory feature, see Amazon S3 Inventory. Operations related to DeleteBucketInventoryConfiguration include:     GetBucketInventoryConfiguration     PutBucketInventoryConfiguration     ListBucketInventoryConfigurations   
 106     */
 107    deleteBucketInventoryConfiguration(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 108    /**
 109     * Deletes the lifecycle configuration from the specified bucket. Amazon S3 removes all the lifecycle configuration rules in the lifecycle subresource associated with the bucket. Your objects never expire, and Amazon S3 no longer automatically deletes any objects on the basis of rules contained in the deleted lifecycle configuration. To use this operation, you must have permission to perform the s3:PutLifecycleConfiguration action. By default, the bucket owner has this permission and the bucket owner can grant this permission to others. There is usually some time lag before lifecycle configuration deletion is fully propagated to all the Amazon S3 systems. For more information about the object expiration, see Elements to Describe Lifecycle Actions. Related actions include:    PutBucketLifecycleConfiguration     GetBucketLifecycleConfiguration   
 110     */
 111    deleteBucketLifecycle(params: S3.Types.DeleteBucketLifecycleRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 112    /**
 113     * Deletes the lifecycle configuration from the specified bucket. Amazon S3 removes all the lifecycle configuration rules in the lifecycle subresource associated with the bucket. Your objects never expire, and Amazon S3 no longer automatically deletes any objects on the basis of rules contained in the deleted lifecycle configuration. To use this operation, you must have permission to perform the s3:PutLifecycleConfiguration action. By default, the bucket owner has this permission and the bucket owner can grant this permission to others. There is usually some time lag before lifecycle configuration deletion is fully propagated to all the Amazon S3 systems. For more information about the object expiration, see Elements to Describe Lifecycle Actions. Related actions include:    PutBucketLifecycleConfiguration     GetBucketLifecycleConfiguration   
 114     */
 115    deleteBucketLifecycle(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 116    /**
 117     * Deletes a metrics configuration for the Amazon CloudWatch request metrics (specified by the metrics configuration ID) from the bucket. Note that this doesn't include the daily storage metrics.  To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:PutMetricsConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission by default. The bucket owner can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources. For information about CloudWatch request metrics for Amazon S3, see Monitoring Metrics with Amazon CloudWatch.  The following operations are related to DeleteBucketMetricsConfiguration:    GetBucketMetricsConfiguration     PutBucketMetricsConfiguration     ListBucketMetricsConfigurations     Monitoring Metrics with Amazon CloudWatch   
 118     */
 119    deleteBucketMetricsConfiguration(params: S3.Types.DeleteBucketMetricsConfigurationRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 120    /**
 121     * Deletes a metrics configuration for the Amazon CloudWatch request metrics (specified by the metrics configuration ID) from the bucket. Note that this doesn't include the daily storage metrics.  To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:PutMetricsConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission by default. The bucket owner can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources. For information about CloudWatch request metrics for Amazon S3, see Monitoring Metrics with Amazon CloudWatch.  The following operations are related to DeleteBucketMetricsConfiguration:    GetBucketMetricsConfiguration     PutBucketMetricsConfiguration     ListBucketMetricsConfigurations     Monitoring Metrics with Amazon CloudWatch   
 122     */
 123    deleteBucketMetricsConfiguration(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 124    /**
 125     * Removes OwnershipControls for an Amazon S3 bucket. To use this operation, you must have the s3:PutBucketOwnershipControls permission. For more information about Amazon S3 permissions, see Specifying Permissions in a Policy. For information about Amazon S3 Object Ownership, see Using Object Ownership.  The following operations are related to DeleteBucketOwnershipControls:    GetBucketOwnershipControls     PutBucketOwnershipControls   
 126     */
 127    deleteBucketOwnershipControls(params: S3.Types.DeleteBucketOwnershipControlsRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 128    /**
 129     * Removes OwnershipControls for an Amazon S3 bucket. To use this operation, you must have the s3:PutBucketOwnershipControls permission. For more information about Amazon S3 permissions, see Specifying Permissions in a Policy. For information about Amazon S3 Object Ownership, see Using Object Ownership.  The following operations are related to DeleteBucketOwnershipControls:    GetBucketOwnershipControls     PutBucketOwnershipControls   
 130     */
 131    deleteBucketOwnershipControls(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 132    /**
 133     * This implementation of the DELETE action uses the policy subresource to delete the policy of a specified bucket. If you are using an identity other than the root user of the Amazon Web Services account that owns the bucket, the calling identity must have the DeleteBucketPolicy permissions on the specified bucket and belong to the bucket owner's account to use this operation.  If you don't have DeleteBucketPolicy permissions, Amazon S3 returns a 403 Access Denied error. If you have the correct permissions, but you're not using an identity that belongs to the bucket owner's account, Amazon S3 returns a 405 Method Not Allowed error.   As a security precaution, the root user of the Amazon Web Services account that owns a bucket can always use this operation, even if the policy explicitly denies the root user the ability to perform this action.  For more information about bucket policies, see Using Bucket Policies and UserPolicies.  The following operations are related to DeleteBucketPolicy     CreateBucket     DeleteObject   
 134     */
 135    deleteBucketPolicy(params: S3.Types.DeleteBucketPolicyRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 136    /**
 137     * This implementation of the DELETE action uses the policy subresource to delete the policy of a specified bucket. If you are using an identity other than the root user of the Amazon Web Services account that owns the bucket, the calling identity must have the DeleteBucketPolicy permissions on the specified bucket and belong to the bucket owner's account to use this operation.  If you don't have DeleteBucketPolicy permissions, Amazon S3 returns a 403 Access Denied error. If you have the correct permissions, but you're not using an identity that belongs to the bucket owner's account, Amazon S3 returns a 405 Method Not Allowed error.   As a security precaution, the root user of the Amazon Web Services account that owns a bucket can always use this operation, even if the policy explicitly denies the root user the ability to perform this action.  For more information about bucket policies, see Using Bucket Policies and UserPolicies.  The following operations are related to DeleteBucketPolicy     CreateBucket     DeleteObject   
 138     */
 139    deleteBucketPolicy(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 140    /**
 141     *  Deletes the replication configuration from the bucket. To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:PutReplicationConfiguration action. The bucket owner has these permissions by default and can grant it to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources.   It can take a while for the deletion of a replication configuration to fully propagate.   For information about replication configuration, see Replication in the Amazon S3 User Guide. The following operations are related to DeleteBucketReplication:    PutBucketReplication     GetBucketReplication   
 142     */
 143    deleteBucketReplication(params: S3.Types.DeleteBucketReplicationRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 144    /**
 145     *  Deletes the replication configuration from the bucket. To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:PutReplicationConfiguration action. The bucket owner has these permissions by default and can grant it to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources.   It can take a while for the deletion of a replication configuration to fully propagate.   For information about replication configuration, see Replication in the Amazon S3 User Guide. The following operations are related to DeleteBucketReplication:    PutBucketReplication     GetBucketReplication   
 146     */
 147    deleteBucketReplication(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 148    /**
 149     * Deletes the tags from the bucket. To use this operation, you must have permission to perform the s3:PutBucketTagging action. By default, the bucket owner has this permission and can grant this permission to others.  The following operations are related to DeleteBucketTagging:    GetBucketTagging     PutBucketTagging   
 150     */
 151    deleteBucketTagging(params: S3.Types.DeleteBucketTaggingRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 152    /**
 153     * Deletes the tags from the bucket. To use this operation, you must have permission to perform the s3:PutBucketTagging action. By default, the bucket owner has this permission and can grant this permission to others.  The following operations are related to DeleteBucketTagging:    GetBucketTagging     PutBucketTagging   
 154     */
 155    deleteBucketTagging(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 156    /**
 157     * This action removes the website configuration for a bucket. Amazon S3 returns a 200 OK response upon successfully deleting a website configuration on the specified bucket. You will get a 200 OK response if the website configuration you are trying to delete does not exist on the bucket. Amazon S3 returns a 404 response if the bucket specified in the request does not exist. This DELETE action requires the S3:DeleteBucketWebsite permission. By default, only the bucket owner can delete the website configuration attached to a bucket. However, bucket owners can grant other users permission to delete the website configuration by writing a bucket policy granting them the S3:DeleteBucketWebsite permission.  For more information about hosting websites, see Hosting Websites on Amazon S3.  The following operations are related to DeleteBucketWebsite:    GetBucketWebsite     PutBucketWebsite   
 158     */
 159    deleteBucketWebsite(params: S3.Types.DeleteBucketWebsiteRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 160    /**
 161     * This action removes the website configuration for a bucket. Amazon S3 returns a 200 OK response upon successfully deleting a website configuration on the specified bucket. You will get a 200 OK response if the website configuration you are trying to delete does not exist on the bucket. Amazon S3 returns a 404 response if the bucket specified in the request does not exist. This DELETE action requires the S3:DeleteBucketWebsite permission. By default, only the bucket owner can delete the website configuration attached to a bucket. However, bucket owners can grant other users permission to delete the website configuration by writing a bucket policy granting them the S3:DeleteBucketWebsite permission.  For more information about hosting websites, see Hosting Websites on Amazon S3.  The following operations are related to DeleteBucketWebsite:    GetBucketWebsite     PutBucketWebsite   
 162     */
 163    deleteBucketWebsite(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 164    /**
 165     * Removes the null version (if there is one) of an object and inserts a delete marker, which becomes the latest version of the object. If there isn't a null version, Amazon S3 does not remove any objects but will still respond that the command was successful. To remove a specific version, you must be the bucket owner and you must use the version Id subresource. Using this subresource permanently deletes the version. If the object deleted is a delete marker, Amazon S3 sets the response header, x-amz-delete-marker, to true.  If the object you want to delete is in a bucket where the bucket versioning configuration is MFA Delete enabled, you must include the x-amz-mfa request header in the DELETE versionId request. Requests that include x-amz-mfa must use HTTPS.   For more information about MFA Delete, see Using MFA Delete. To see sample requests that use versioning, see Sample Request.  You can delete objects by explicitly calling DELETE Object or configure its lifecycle (PutBucketLifecycle) to enable Amazon S3 to remove them for you. If you want to block users or accounts from removing or deleting objects from your bucket, you must deny them the s3:DeleteObject, s3:DeleteObjectVersion, and s3:PutLifeCycleConfiguration actions.  The following action is related to DeleteObject:    PutObject   
 166     */
 167    deleteObject(params: S3.Types.DeleteObjectRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.DeleteObjectOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.DeleteObjectOutput, AWSError>;
 168    /**
 169     * Removes the null version (if there is one) of an object and inserts a delete marker, which becomes the latest version of the object. If there isn't a null version, Amazon S3 does not remove any objects but will still respond that the command was successful. To remove a specific version, you must be the bucket owner and you must use the version Id subresource. Using this subresource permanently deletes the version. If the object deleted is a delete marker, Amazon S3 sets the response header, x-amz-delete-marker, to true.  If the object you want to delete is in a bucket where the bucket versioning configuration is MFA Delete enabled, you must include the x-amz-mfa request header in the DELETE versionId request. Requests that include x-amz-mfa must use HTTPS.   For more information about MFA Delete, see Using MFA Delete. To see sample requests that use versioning, see Sample Request.  You can delete objects by explicitly calling DELETE Object or configure its lifecycle (PutBucketLifecycle) to enable Amazon S3 to remove them for you. If you want to block users or accounts from removing or deleting objects from your bucket, you must deny them the s3:DeleteObject, s3:DeleteObjectVersion, and s3:PutLifeCycleConfiguration actions.  The following action is related to DeleteObject:    PutObject   
 170     */
 171    deleteObject(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.DeleteObjectOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.DeleteObjectOutput, AWSError>;
 172    /**
 173     * Removes the entire tag set from the specified object. For more information about managing object tags, see  Object Tagging. To use this operation, you must have permission to perform the s3:DeleteObjectTagging action. To delete tags of a specific object version, add the versionId query parameter in the request. You will need permission for the s3:DeleteObjectVersionTagging action. The following operations are related to DeleteBucketMetricsConfiguration:    PutObjectTagging     GetObjectTagging   
 174     */
 175    deleteObjectTagging(params: S3.Types.DeleteObjectTaggingRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.DeleteObjectTaggingOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.DeleteObjectTaggingOutput, AWSError>;
 176    /**
 177     * Removes the entire tag set from the specified object. For more information about managing object tags, see  Object Tagging. To use this operation, you must have permission to perform the s3:DeleteObjectTagging action. To delete tags of a specific object version, add the versionId query parameter in the request. You will need permission for the s3:DeleteObjectVersionTagging action. The following operations are related to DeleteBucketMetricsConfiguration:    PutObjectTagging     GetObjectTagging   
 178     */
 179    deleteObjectTagging(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.DeleteObjectTaggingOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.DeleteObjectTaggingOutput, AWSError>;
 180    /**
 181     * This action enables you to delete multiple objects from a bucket using a single HTTP request. If you know the object keys that you want to delete, then this action provides a suitable alternative to sending individual delete requests, reducing per-request overhead. The request contains a list of up to 1000 keys that you want to delete. In the XML, you provide the object key names, and optionally, version IDs if you want to delete a specific version of the object from a versioning-enabled bucket. For each key, Amazon S3 performs a delete action and returns the result of that delete, success, or failure, in the response. Note that if the object specified in the request is not found, Amazon S3 returns the result as deleted.  The action supports two modes for the response: verbose and quiet. By default, the action uses verbose mode in which the response includes the result of deletion of each key in your request. In quiet mode the response includes only keys where the delete action encountered an error. For a successful deletion, the action does not return any information about the delete in the response body. When performing this action on an MFA Delete enabled bucket, that attempts to delete any versioned objects, you must include an MFA token. If you do not provide one, the entire request will fail, even if there are non-versioned objects you are trying to delete. If you provide an invalid token, whether there are versioned keys in the request or not, the entire Multi-Object Delete request will fail. For information about MFA Delete, see  MFA Delete. Finally, the Content-MD5 header is required for all Multi-Object Delete requests. Amazon S3 uses the header value to ensure that your request body has not been altered in transit. The following operations are related to DeleteObjects:    CreateMultipartUpload     UploadPart     CompleteMultipartUpload     ListParts     AbortMultipartUpload   
 182     */
 183    deleteObjects(params: S3.Types.DeleteObjectsRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.DeleteObjectsOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.DeleteObjectsOutput, AWSError>;
 184    /**
 185     * This action enables you to delete multiple objects from a bucket using a single HTTP request. If you know the object keys that you want to delete, then this action provides a suitable alternative to sending individual delete requests, reducing per-request overhead. The request contains a list of up to 1000 keys that you want to delete. In the XML, you provide the object key names, and optionally, version IDs if you want to delete a specific version of the object from a versioning-enabled bucket. For each key, Amazon S3 performs a delete action and returns the result of that delete, success, or failure, in the response. Note that if the object specified in the request is not found, Amazon S3 returns the result as deleted.  The action supports two modes for the response: verbose and quiet. By default, the action uses verbose mode in which the response includes the result of deletion of each key in your request. In quiet mode the response includes only keys where the delete action encountered an error. For a successful deletion, the action does not return any information about the delete in the response body. When performing this action on an MFA Delete enabled bucket, that attempts to delete any versioned objects, you must include an MFA token. If you do not provide one, the entire request will fail, even if there are non-versioned objects you are trying to delete. If you provide an invalid token, whether there are versioned keys in the request or not, the entire Multi-Object Delete request will fail. For information about MFA Delete, see  MFA Delete. Finally, the Content-MD5 header is required for all Multi-Object Delete requests. Amazon S3 uses the header value to ensure that your request body has not been altered in transit. The following operations are related to DeleteObjects:    CreateMultipartUpload     UploadPart     CompleteMultipartUpload     ListParts     AbortMultipartUpload   
 186     */
 187    deleteObjects(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.DeleteObjectsOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.DeleteObjectsOutput, AWSError>;
 188    /**
 189     * Removes the PublicAccessBlock configuration for an Amazon S3 bucket. To use this operation, you must have the s3:PutBucketPublicAccessBlock permission. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources. The following operations are related to DeletePublicAccessBlock:    Using Amazon S3 Block Public Access     GetPublicAccessBlock     PutPublicAccessBlock     GetBucketPolicyStatus   
 190     */
 191    deletePublicAccessBlock(params: S3.Types.DeletePublicAccessBlockRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 192    /**
 193     * Removes the PublicAccessBlock configuration for an Amazon S3 bucket. To use this operation, you must have the s3:PutBucketPublicAccessBlock permission. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources. The following operations are related to DeletePublicAccessBlock:    Using Amazon S3 Block Public Access     GetPublicAccessBlock     PutPublicAccessBlock     GetBucketPolicyStatus   
 194     */
 195    deletePublicAccessBlock(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 196    /**
 197     * This implementation of the GET action uses the accelerate subresource to return the Transfer Acceleration state of a bucket, which is either Enabled or Suspended. Amazon S3 Transfer Acceleration is a bucket-level feature that enables you to perform faster data transfers to and from Amazon S3. To use this operation, you must have permission to perform the s3:GetAccelerateConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission by default. The bucket owner can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations and Managing Access Permissions to your Amazon S3 Resources in the Amazon S3 User Guide. You set the Transfer Acceleration state of an existing bucket to Enabled or Suspended by using the PutBucketAccelerateConfiguration operation.  A GET accelerate request does not return a state value for a bucket that has no transfer acceleration state. A bucket has no Transfer Acceleration state if a state has never been set on the bucket.  For more information about transfer acceleration, see Transfer Acceleration in the Amazon S3 User Guide.  Related Resources     PutBucketAccelerateConfiguration   
 198     */
 199    getBucketAccelerateConfiguration(params: S3.Types.GetBucketAccelerateConfigurationRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetBucketAccelerateConfigurationOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetBucketAccelerateConfigurationOutput, AWSError>;
 200    /**
 201     * This implementation of the GET action uses the accelerate subresource to return the Transfer Acceleration state of a bucket, which is either Enabled or Suspended. Amazon S3 Transfer Acceleration is a bucket-level feature that enables you to perform faster data transfers to and from Amazon S3. To use this operation, you must have permission to perform the s3:GetAccelerateConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission by default. The bucket owner can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations and Managing Access Permissions to your Amazon S3 Resources in the Amazon S3 User Guide. You set the Transfer Acceleration state of an existing bucket to Enabled or Suspended by using the PutBucketAccelerateConfiguration operation.  A GET accelerate request does not return a state value for a bucket that has no transfer acceleration state. A bucket has no Transfer Acceleration state if a state has never been set on the bucket.  For more information about transfer acceleration, see Transfer Acceleration in the Amazon S3 User Guide.  Related Resources     PutBucketAccelerateConfiguration   
 202     */
 203    getBucketAccelerateConfiguration(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetBucketAccelerateConfigurationOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetBucketAccelerateConfigurationOutput, AWSError>;
 204    /**
 205     * This implementation of the GET action uses the acl subresource to return the access control list (ACL) of a bucket. To use GET to return the ACL of the bucket, you must have READ_ACP access to the bucket. If READ_ACP permission is granted to the anonymous user, you can return the ACL of the bucket without using an authorization header.  Related Resources     ListObjects   
 206     */
 207    getBucketAcl(params: S3.Types.GetBucketAclRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetBucketAclOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetBucketAclOutput, AWSError>;
 208    /**
 209     * This implementation of the GET action uses the acl subresource to return the access control list (ACL) of a bucket. To use GET to return the ACL of the bucket, you must have READ_ACP access to the bucket. If READ_ACP permission is granted to the anonymous user, you can return the ACL of the bucket without using an authorization header.  Related Resources     ListObjects   
 210     */
 211    getBucketAcl(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetBucketAclOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetBucketAclOutput, AWSError>;
 212    /**
 213     * This implementation of the GET action returns an analytics configuration (identified by the analytics configuration ID) from the bucket. To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:GetAnalyticsConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission by default. The bucket owner can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see  Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources in the Amazon S3 User Guide.  For information about Amazon S3 analytics feature, see Amazon S3 Analytics – Storage Class Analysis in the Amazon S3 User Guide.  Related Resources     DeleteBucketAnalyticsConfiguration     ListBucketAnalyticsConfigurations     PutBucketAnalyticsConfiguration   
 214     */
 215    getBucketAnalyticsConfiguration(params: S3.Types.GetBucketAnalyticsConfigurationRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetBucketAnalyticsConfigurationOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetBucketAnalyticsConfigurationOutput, AWSError>;
 216    /**
 217     * This implementation of the GET action returns an analytics configuration (identified by the analytics configuration ID) from the bucket. To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:GetAnalyticsConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission by default. The bucket owner can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see  Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources in the Amazon S3 User Guide.  For information about Amazon S3 analytics feature, see Amazon S3 Analytics – Storage Class Analysis in the Amazon S3 User Guide.  Related Resources     DeleteBucketAnalyticsConfiguration     ListBucketAnalyticsConfigurations     PutBucketAnalyticsConfiguration   
 218     */
 219    getBucketAnalyticsConfiguration(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetBucketAnalyticsConfigurationOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetBucketAnalyticsConfigurationOutput, AWSError>;
 220    /**
 221     * Returns the cors configuration information set for the bucket.  To use this operation, you must have permission to perform the s3:GetBucketCORS action. By default, the bucket owner has this permission and can grant it to others.  For more information about cors, see  Enabling Cross-Origin Resource Sharing. The following operations are related to GetBucketCors:    PutBucketCors     DeleteBucketCors   
 222     */
 223    getBucketCors(params: S3.Types.GetBucketCorsRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetBucketCorsOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetBucketCorsOutput, AWSError>;
 224    /**
 225     * Returns the cors configuration information set for the bucket.  To use this operation, you must have permission to perform the s3:GetBucketCORS action. By default, the bucket owner has this permission and can grant it to others.  For more information about cors, see  Enabling Cross-Origin Resource Sharing. The following operations are related to GetBucketCors:    PutBucketCors     DeleteBucketCors   
 226     */
 227    getBucketCors(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetBucketCorsOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetBucketCorsOutput, AWSError>;
 228    /**
 229     * Returns the default encryption configuration for an Amazon S3 bucket. If the bucket does not have a default encryption configuration, GetBucketEncryption returns ServerSideEncryptionConfigurationNotFoundError.  For information about the Amazon S3 default encryption feature, see Amazon S3 Default Bucket Encryption.  To use this operation, you must have permission to perform the s3:GetEncryptionConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission by default. The bucket owner can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources. The following operations are related to GetBucketEncryption:    PutBucketEncryption     DeleteBucketEncryption   
 230     */
 231    getBucketEncryption(params: S3.Types.GetBucketEncryptionRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetBucketEncryptionOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetBucketEncryptionOutput, AWSError>;
 232    /**
 233     * Returns the default encryption configuration for an Amazon S3 bucket. If the bucket does not have a default encryption configuration, GetBucketEncryption returns ServerSideEncryptionConfigurationNotFoundError.  For information about the Amazon S3 default encryption feature, see Amazon S3 Default Bucket Encryption.  To use this operation, you must have permission to perform the s3:GetEncryptionConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission by default. The bucket owner can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources. The following operations are related to GetBucketEncryption:    PutBucketEncryption     DeleteBucketEncryption   
 234     */
 235    getBucketEncryption(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetBucketEncryptionOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetBucketEncryptionOutput, AWSError>;
 236    /**
 237     * Gets the S3 Intelligent-Tiering configuration from the specified bucket. The S3 Intelligent-Tiering storage class is designed to optimize storage costs by automatically moving data to the most cost-effective storage access tier, without additional operational overhead. S3 Intelligent-Tiering delivers automatic cost savings by moving data between access tiers, when access patterns change. The S3 Intelligent-Tiering storage class is suitable for objects larger than 128 KB that you plan to store for at least 30 days. If the size of an object is less than 128 KB, it is not eligible for auto-tiering. Smaller objects can be stored, but they are always charged at the frequent access tier rates in the S3 Intelligent-Tiering storage class.  If you delete an object before the end of the 30-day minimum storage duration period, you are charged for 30 days. For more information, see Storage class for automatically optimizing frequently and infrequently accessed objects. Operations related to GetBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration include:     DeleteBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration     PutBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration     ListBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurations   
 238     */
 239    getBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration(params: S3.Types.GetBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurationRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurationOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurationOutput, AWSError>;
 240    /**
 241     * Gets the S3 Intelligent-Tiering configuration from the specified bucket. The S3 Intelligent-Tiering storage class is designed to optimize storage costs by automatically moving data to the most cost-effective storage access tier, without additional operational overhead. S3 Intelligent-Tiering delivers automatic cost savings by moving data between access tiers, when access patterns change. The S3 Intelligent-Tiering storage class is suitable for objects larger than 128 KB that you plan to store for at least 30 days. If the size of an object is less than 128 KB, it is not eligible for auto-tiering. Smaller objects can be stored, but they are always charged at the frequent access tier rates in the S3 Intelligent-Tiering storage class.  If you delete an object before the end of the 30-day minimum storage duration period, you are charged for 30 days. For more information, see Storage class for automatically optimizing frequently and infrequently accessed objects. Operations related to GetBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration include:     DeleteBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration     PutBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration     ListBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurations   
 242     */
 243    getBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurationOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurationOutput, AWSError>;
 244    /**
 245     * Returns an inventory configuration (identified by the inventory configuration ID) from the bucket. To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:GetInventoryConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission by default and can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources. For information about the Amazon S3 inventory feature, see Amazon S3 Inventory. The following operations are related to GetBucketInventoryConfiguration:    DeleteBucketInventoryConfiguration     ListBucketInventoryConfigurations     PutBucketInventoryConfiguration   
 246     */
 247    getBucketInventoryConfiguration(params: S3.Types.GetBucketInventoryConfigurationRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetBucketInventoryConfigurationOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetBucketInventoryConfigurationOutput, AWSError>;
 248    /**
 249     * Returns an inventory configuration (identified by the inventory configuration ID) from the bucket. To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:GetInventoryConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission by default and can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources. For information about the Amazon S3 inventory feature, see Amazon S3 Inventory. The following operations are related to GetBucketInventoryConfiguration:    DeleteBucketInventoryConfiguration     ListBucketInventoryConfigurations     PutBucketInventoryConfiguration   
 250     */
 251    getBucketInventoryConfiguration(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetBucketInventoryConfigurationOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetBucketInventoryConfigurationOutput, AWSError>;
 252    /**
 253     *  For an updated version of this API, see GetBucketLifecycleConfiguration. If you configured a bucket lifecycle using the filter element, you should see the updated version of this topic. This topic is provided for backward compatibility.  Returns the lifecycle configuration information set on the bucket. For information about lifecycle configuration, see Object Lifecycle Management.  To use this operation, you must have permission to perform the s3:GetLifecycleConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission by default. The bucket owner can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources.  GetBucketLifecycle has the following special error:   Error code: NoSuchLifecycleConfiguration    Description: The lifecycle configuration does not exist.   HTTP Status Code: 404 Not Found   SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client     The following operations are related to GetBucketLifecycle:    GetBucketLifecycleConfiguration     PutBucketLifecycle     DeleteBucketLifecycle   
 254     */
 255    getBucketLifecycle(params: S3.Types.GetBucketLifecycleRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetBucketLifecycleOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetBucketLifecycleOutput, AWSError>;
 256    /**
 257     *  For an updated version of this API, see GetBucketLifecycleConfiguration. If you configured a bucket lifecycle using the filter element, you should see the updated version of this topic. This topic is provided for backward compatibility.  Returns the lifecycle configuration information set on the bucket. For information about lifecycle configuration, see Object Lifecycle Management.  To use this operation, you must have permission to perform the s3:GetLifecycleConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission by default. The bucket owner can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources.  GetBucketLifecycle has the following special error:   Error code: NoSuchLifecycleConfiguration    Description: The lifecycle configuration does not exist.   HTTP Status Code: 404 Not Found   SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client     The following operations are related to GetBucketLifecycle:    GetBucketLifecycleConfiguration     PutBucketLifecycle     DeleteBucketLifecycle   
 258     */
 259    getBucketLifecycle(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetBucketLifecycleOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetBucketLifecycleOutput, AWSError>;
 260    /**
 261     *  Bucket lifecycle configuration now supports specifying a lifecycle rule using an object key name prefix, one or more object tags, or a combination of both. Accordingly, this section describes the latest API. The response describes the new filter element that you can use to specify a filter to select a subset of objects to which the rule applies. If you are using a previous version of the lifecycle configuration, it still works. For the earlier action, see GetBucketLifecycle.  Returns the lifecycle configuration information set on the bucket. For information about lifecycle configuration, see Object Lifecycle Management. To use this operation, you must have permission to perform the s3:GetLifecycleConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission, by default. The bucket owner can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources.  GetBucketLifecycleConfiguration has the following special error:   Error code: NoSuchLifecycleConfiguration    Description: The lifecycle configuration does not exist.   HTTP Status Code: 404 Not Found   SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client     The following operations are related to GetBucketLifecycleConfiguration:    GetBucketLifecycle     PutBucketLifecycle     DeleteBucketLifecycle   
 262     */
 263    getBucketLifecycleConfiguration(params: S3.Types.GetBucketLifecycleConfigurationRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetBucketLifecycleConfigurationOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetBucketLifecycleConfigurationOutput, AWSError>;
 264    /**
 265     *  Bucket lifecycle configuration now supports specifying a lifecycle rule using an object key name prefix, one or more object tags, or a combination of both. Accordingly, this section describes the latest API. The response describes the new filter element that you can use to specify a filter to select a subset of objects to which the rule applies. If you are using a previous version of the lifecycle configuration, it still works. For the earlier action, see GetBucketLifecycle.  Returns the lifecycle configuration information set on the bucket. For information about lifecycle configuration, see Object Lifecycle Management. To use this operation, you must have permission to perform the s3:GetLifecycleConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission, by default. The bucket owner can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources.  GetBucketLifecycleConfiguration has the following special error:   Error code: NoSuchLifecycleConfiguration    Description: The lifecycle configuration does not exist.   HTTP Status Code: 404 Not Found   SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client     The following operations are related to GetBucketLifecycleConfiguration:    GetBucketLifecycle     PutBucketLifecycle     DeleteBucketLifecycle   
 266     */
 267    getBucketLifecycleConfiguration(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetBucketLifecycleConfigurationOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetBucketLifecycleConfigurationOutput, AWSError>;
 268    /**
 269     * Returns the Region the bucket resides in. You set the bucket's Region using the LocationConstraint request parameter in a CreateBucket request. For more information, see CreateBucket. To use this implementation of the operation, you must be the bucket owner. To use this API against an access point, provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name. The following operations are related to GetBucketLocation:    GetObject     CreateBucket   
 270     */
 271    getBucketLocation(params: S3.Types.GetBucketLocationRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetBucketLocationOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetBucketLocationOutput, AWSError>;
 272    /**
 273     * Returns the Region the bucket resides in. You set the bucket's Region using the LocationConstraint request parameter in a CreateBucket request. For more information, see CreateBucket. To use this implementation of the operation, you must be the bucket owner. To use this API against an access point, provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name. The following operations are related to GetBucketLocation:    GetObject     CreateBucket   
 274     */
 275    getBucketLocation(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetBucketLocationOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetBucketLocationOutput, AWSError>;
 276    /**
 277     * Returns the logging status of a bucket and the permissions users have to view and modify that status. To use GET, you must be the bucket owner. The following operations are related to GetBucketLogging:    CreateBucket     PutBucketLogging   
 278     */
 279    getBucketLogging(params: S3.Types.GetBucketLoggingRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetBucketLoggingOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetBucketLoggingOutput, AWSError>;
 280    /**
 281     * Returns the logging status of a bucket and the permissions users have to view and modify that status. To use GET, you must be the bucket owner. The following operations are related to GetBucketLogging:    CreateBucket     PutBucketLogging   
 282     */
 283    getBucketLogging(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetBucketLoggingOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetBucketLoggingOutput, AWSError>;
 284    /**
 285     * Gets a metrics configuration (specified by the metrics configuration ID) from the bucket. Note that this doesn't include the daily storage metrics.  To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:GetMetricsConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission by default. The bucket owner can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources.  For information about CloudWatch request metrics for Amazon S3, see Monitoring Metrics with Amazon CloudWatch. The following operations are related to GetBucketMetricsConfiguration:    PutBucketMetricsConfiguration     DeleteBucketMetricsConfiguration     ListBucketMetricsConfigurations     Monitoring Metrics with Amazon CloudWatch   
 286     */
 287    getBucketMetricsConfiguration(params: S3.Types.GetBucketMetricsConfigurationRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetBucketMetricsConfigurationOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetBucketMetricsConfigurationOutput, AWSError>;
 288    /**
 289     * Gets a metrics configuration (specified by the metrics configuration ID) from the bucket. Note that this doesn't include the daily storage metrics.  To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:GetMetricsConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission by default. The bucket owner can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources.  For information about CloudWatch request metrics for Amazon S3, see Monitoring Metrics with Amazon CloudWatch. The following operations are related to GetBucketMetricsConfiguration:    PutBucketMetricsConfiguration     DeleteBucketMetricsConfiguration     ListBucketMetricsConfigurations     Monitoring Metrics with Amazon CloudWatch   
 290     */
 291    getBucketMetricsConfiguration(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetBucketMetricsConfigurationOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetBucketMetricsConfigurationOutput, AWSError>;
 292    /**
 293     *  No longer used, see GetBucketNotificationConfiguration.
 294     */
 295    getBucketNotification(params: S3.Types.GetBucketNotificationConfigurationRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.NotificationConfigurationDeprecated) => void): Request<S3.Types.NotificationConfigurationDeprecated, AWSError>;
 296    /**
 297     *  No longer used, see GetBucketNotificationConfiguration.
 298     */
 299    getBucketNotification(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.NotificationConfigurationDeprecated) => void): Request<S3.Types.NotificationConfigurationDeprecated, AWSError>;
 300    /**
 301     * Returns the notification configuration of a bucket. If notifications are not enabled on the bucket, the action returns an empty NotificationConfiguration element. By default, you must be the bucket owner to read the notification configuration of a bucket. However, the bucket owner can use a bucket policy to grant permission to other users to read this configuration with the s3:GetBucketNotification permission. For more information about setting and reading the notification configuration on a bucket, see Setting Up Notification of Bucket Events. For more information about bucket policies, see Using Bucket Policies. The following action is related to GetBucketNotification:    PutBucketNotification   
 302     */
 303    getBucketNotificationConfiguration(params: S3.Types.GetBucketNotificationConfigurationRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.NotificationConfiguration) => void): Request<S3.Types.NotificationConfiguration, AWSError>;
 304    /**
 305     * Returns the notification configuration of a bucket. If notifications are not enabled on the bucket, the action returns an empty NotificationConfiguration element. By default, you must be the bucket owner to read the notification configuration of a bucket. However, the bucket owner can use a bucket policy to grant permission to other users to read this configuration with the s3:GetBucketNotification permission. For more information about setting and reading the notification configuration on a bucket, see Setting Up Notification of Bucket Events. For more information about bucket policies, see Using Bucket Policies. The following action is related to GetBucketNotification:    PutBucketNotification   
 306     */
 307    getBucketNotificationConfiguration(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.NotificationConfiguration) => void): Request<S3.Types.NotificationConfiguration, AWSError>;
 308    /**
 309     * Retrieves OwnershipControls for an Amazon S3 bucket. To use this operation, you must have the s3:GetBucketOwnershipControls permission. For more information about Amazon S3 permissions, see Specifying Permissions in a Policy.  For information about Amazon S3 Object Ownership, see Using Object Ownership.  The following operations are related to GetBucketOwnershipControls:    PutBucketOwnershipControls     DeleteBucketOwnershipControls   
 310     */
 311    getBucketOwnershipControls(params: S3.Types.GetBucketOwnershipControlsRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetBucketOwnershipControlsOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetBucketOwnershipControlsOutput, AWSError>;
 312    /**
 313     * Retrieves OwnershipControls for an Amazon S3 bucket. To use this operation, you must have the s3:GetBucketOwnershipControls permission. For more information about Amazon S3 permissions, see Specifying Permissions in a Policy.  For information about Amazon S3 Object Ownership, see Using Object Ownership.  The following operations are related to GetBucketOwnershipControls:    PutBucketOwnershipControls     DeleteBucketOwnershipControls   
 314     */
 315    getBucketOwnershipControls(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetBucketOwnershipControlsOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetBucketOwnershipControlsOutput, AWSError>;
 316    /**
 317     * Returns the policy of a specified bucket. If you are using an identity other than the root user of the Amazon Web Services account that owns the bucket, the calling identity must have the GetBucketPolicy permissions on the specified bucket and belong to the bucket owner's account in order to use this operation. If you don't have GetBucketPolicy permissions, Amazon S3 returns a 403 Access Denied error. If you have the correct permissions, but you're not using an identity that belongs to the bucket owner's account, Amazon S3 returns a 405 Method Not Allowed error.  As a security precaution, the root user of the Amazon Web Services account that owns a bucket can always use this operation, even if the policy explicitly denies the root user the ability to perform this action.  For more information about bucket policies, see Using Bucket Policies and User Policies. The following action is related to GetBucketPolicy:    GetObject   
 318     */
 319    getBucketPolicy(params: S3.Types.GetBucketPolicyRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetBucketPolicyOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetBucketPolicyOutput, AWSError>;
 320    /**
 321     * Returns the policy of a specified bucket. If you are using an identity other than the root user of the Amazon Web Services account that owns the bucket, the calling identity must have the GetBucketPolicy permissions on the specified bucket and belong to the bucket owner's account in order to use this operation. If you don't have GetBucketPolicy permissions, Amazon S3 returns a 403 Access Denied error. If you have the correct permissions, but you're not using an identity that belongs to the bucket owner's account, Amazon S3 returns a 405 Method Not Allowed error.  As a security precaution, the root user of the Amazon Web Services account that owns a bucket can always use this operation, even if the policy explicitly denies the root user the ability to perform this action.  For more information about bucket policies, see Using Bucket Policies and User Policies. The following action is related to GetBucketPolicy:    GetObject   
 322     */
 323    getBucketPolicy(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetBucketPolicyOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetBucketPolicyOutput, AWSError>;
 324    /**
 325     * Retrieves the policy status for an Amazon S3 bucket, indicating whether the bucket is public. In order to use this operation, you must have the s3:GetBucketPolicyStatus permission. For more information about Amazon S3 permissions, see Specifying Permissions in a Policy.  For more information about when Amazon S3 considers a bucket public, see The Meaning of "Public".  The following operations are related to GetBucketPolicyStatus:    Using Amazon S3 Block Public Access     GetPublicAccessBlock     PutPublicAccessBlock     DeletePublicAccessBlock   
 326     */
 327    getBucketPolicyStatus(params: S3.Types.GetBucketPolicyStatusRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetBucketPolicyStatusOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetBucketPolicyStatusOutput, AWSError>;
 328    /**
 329     * Retrieves the policy status for an Amazon S3 bucket, indicating whether the bucket is public. In order to use this operation, you must have the s3:GetBucketPolicyStatus permission. For more information about Amazon S3 permissions, see Specifying Permissions in a Policy.  For more information about when Amazon S3 considers a bucket public, see The Meaning of "Public".  The following operations are related to GetBucketPolicyStatus:    Using Amazon S3 Block Public Access     GetPublicAccessBlock     PutPublicAccessBlock     DeletePublicAccessBlock   
 330     */
 331    getBucketPolicyStatus(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetBucketPolicyStatusOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetBucketPolicyStatusOutput, AWSError>;
 332    /**
 333     * Returns the replication configuration of a bucket.   It can take a while to propagate the put or delete a replication configuration to all Amazon S3 systems. Therefore, a get request soon after put or delete can return a wrong result.    For information about replication configuration, see Replication in the Amazon S3 User Guide. This action requires permissions for the s3:GetReplicationConfiguration action. For more information about permissions, see Using Bucket Policies and User Policies. If you include the Filter element in a replication configuration, you must also include the DeleteMarkerReplication and Priority elements. The response also returns those elements. For information about GetBucketReplication errors, see List of replication-related error codes  The following operations are related to GetBucketReplication:    PutBucketReplication     DeleteBucketReplication   
 334     */
 335    getBucketReplication(params: S3.Types.GetBucketReplicationRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetBucketReplicationOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetBucketReplicationOutput, AWSError>;
 336    /**
 337     * Returns the replication configuration of a bucket.   It can take a while to propagate the put or delete a replication configuration to all Amazon S3 systems. Therefore, a get request soon after put or delete can return a wrong result.    For information about replication configuration, see Replication in the Amazon S3 User Guide. This action requires permissions for the s3:GetReplicationConfiguration action. For more information about permissions, see Using Bucket Policies and User Policies. If you include the Filter element in a replication configuration, you must also include the DeleteMarkerReplication and Priority elements. The response also returns those elements. For information about GetBucketReplication errors, see List of replication-related error codes  The following operations are related to GetBucketReplication:    PutBucketReplication     DeleteBucketReplication   
 338     */
 339    getBucketReplication(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetBucketReplicationOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetBucketReplicationOutput, AWSError>;
 340    /**
 341     * Returns the request payment configuration of a bucket. To use this version of the operation, you must be the bucket owner. For more information, see Requester Pays Buckets. The following operations are related to GetBucketRequestPayment:    ListObjects   
 342     */
 343    getBucketRequestPayment(params: S3.Types.GetBucketRequestPaymentRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetBucketRequestPaymentOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetBucketRequestPaymentOutput, AWSError>;
 344    /**
 345     * Returns the request payment configuration of a bucket. To use this version of the operation, you must be the bucket owner. For more information, see Requester Pays Buckets. The following operations are related to GetBucketRequestPayment:    ListObjects   
 346     */
 347    getBucketRequestPayment(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetBucketRequestPaymentOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetBucketRequestPaymentOutput, AWSError>;
 348    /**
 349     * Returns the tag set associated with the bucket. To use this operation, you must have permission to perform the s3:GetBucketTagging action. By default, the bucket owner has this permission and can grant this permission to others.  GetBucketTagging has the following special error:   Error code: NoSuchTagSetError    Description: There is no tag set associated with the bucket.     The following operations are related to GetBucketTagging:    PutBucketTagging     DeleteBucketTagging   
 350     */
 351    getBucketTagging(params: S3.Types.GetBucketTaggingRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetBucketTaggingOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetBucketTaggingOutput, AWSError>;
 352    /**
 353     * Returns the tag set associated with the bucket. To use this operation, you must have permission to perform the s3:GetBucketTagging action. By default, the bucket owner has this permission and can grant this permission to others.  GetBucketTagging has the following special error:   Error code: NoSuchTagSetError    Description: There is no tag set associated with the bucket.     The following operations are related to GetBucketTagging:    PutBucketTagging     DeleteBucketTagging   
 354     */
 355    getBucketTagging(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetBucketTaggingOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetBucketTaggingOutput, AWSError>;
 356    /**
 357     * Returns the versioning state of a bucket. To retrieve the versioning state of a bucket, you must be the bucket owner. This implementation also returns the MFA Delete status of the versioning state. If the MFA Delete status is enabled, the bucket owner must use an authentication device to change the versioning state of the bucket. The following operations are related to GetBucketVersioning:    GetObject     PutObject     DeleteObject   
 358     */
 359    getBucketVersioning(params: S3.Types.GetBucketVersioningRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetBucketVersioningOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetBucketVersioningOutput, AWSError>;
 360    /**
 361     * Returns the versioning state of a bucket. To retrieve the versioning state of a bucket, you must be the bucket owner. This implementation also returns the MFA Delete status of the versioning state. If the MFA Delete status is enabled, the bucket owner must use an authentication device to change the versioning state of the bucket. The following operations are related to GetBucketVersioning:    GetObject     PutObject     DeleteObject   
 362     */
 363    getBucketVersioning(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetBucketVersioningOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetBucketVersioningOutput, AWSError>;
 364    /**
 365     * Returns the website configuration for a bucket. To host website on Amazon S3, you can configure a bucket as website by adding a website configuration. For more information about hosting websites, see Hosting Websites on Amazon S3.  This GET action requires the S3:GetBucketWebsite permission. By default, only the bucket owner can read the bucket website configuration. However, bucket owners can allow other users to read the website configuration by writing a bucket policy granting them the S3:GetBucketWebsite permission. The following operations are related to DeleteBucketWebsite:    DeleteBucketWebsite     PutBucketWebsite   
 366     */
 367    getBucketWebsite(params: S3.Types.GetBucketWebsiteRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetBucketWebsiteOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetBucketWebsiteOutput, AWSError>;
 368    /**
 369     * Returns the website configuration for a bucket. To host website on Amazon S3, you can configure a bucket as website by adding a website configuration. For more information about hosting websites, see Hosting Websites on Amazon S3.  This GET action requires the S3:GetBucketWebsite permission. By default, only the bucket owner can read the bucket website configuration. However, bucket owners can allow other users to read the website configuration by writing a bucket policy granting them the S3:GetBucketWebsite permission. The following operations are related to DeleteBucketWebsite:    DeleteBucketWebsite     PutBucketWebsite   
 370     */
 371    getBucketWebsite(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetBucketWebsiteOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetBucketWebsiteOutput, AWSError>;
 372    /**
 373     * Retrieves objects from Amazon S3. To use GET, you must have READ access to the object. If you grant READ access to the anonymous user, you can return the object without using an authorization header. An Amazon S3 bucket has no directory hierarchy such as you would find in a typical computer file system. You can, however, create a logical hierarchy by using object key names that imply a folder structure. For example, instead of naming an object sample.jpg, you can name it photos/2006/February/sample.jpg. To get an object from such a logical hierarchy, specify the full key name for the object in the GET operation. For a virtual hosted-style request example, if you have the object photos/2006/February/sample.jpg, specify the resource as /photos/2006/February/sample.jpg. For a path-style request example, if you have the object photos/2006/February/sample.jpg in the bucket named examplebucket, specify the resource as /examplebucket/photos/2006/February/sample.jpg. For more information about request types, see HTTP Host Header Bucket Specification. To distribute large files to many people, you can save bandwidth costs by using BitTorrent. For more information, see Amazon S3 Torrent. For more information about returning the ACL of an object, see GetObjectAcl. If the object you are retrieving is stored in the S3 Glacier or S3 Glacier Deep Archive storage class, or S3 Intelligent-Tiering Archive or S3 Intelligent-Tiering Deep Archive tiers, before you can retrieve the object you must first restore a copy using RestoreObject. Otherwise, this action returns an InvalidObjectStateError error. For information about restoring archived objects, see Restoring Archived Objects. Encryption request headers, like x-amz-server-side-encryption, should not be sent for GET requests if your object uses server-side encryption with CMKs stored in Amazon Web Services KMS (SSE-KMS) or server-side encryption with Amazon S3–managed encryption keys (SSE-S3). If your object does use these types of keys, you’ll get an HTTP 400 BadRequest error. If you encrypt an object by using server-side encryption with customer-provided encryption keys (SSE-C) when you store the object in Amazon S3, then when you GET the object, you must use the following headers:   x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-algorithm   x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-key   x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-key-MD5   For more information about SSE-C, see Server-Side Encryption (Using Customer-Provided Encryption Keys). Assuming you have the relevant permission to read object tags, the response also returns the x-amz-tagging-count header that provides the count of number of tags associated with the object. You can use GetObjectTagging to retrieve the tag set associated with an object.  Permissions  You need the relevant read object (or version) permission for this operation. For more information, see Specifying Permissions in a Policy. If the object you request does not exist, the error Amazon S3 returns depends on whether you also have the s3:ListBucket permission.   If you have the s3:ListBucket permission on the bucket, Amazon S3 will return an HTTP status code 404 ("no such key") error.   If you don’t have the s3:ListBucket permission, Amazon S3 will return an HTTP status code 403 ("access denied") error.    Versioning  By default, the GET action returns the current version of an object. To return a different version, use the versionId subresource.    You need the s3:GetObjectVersion permission to access a specific version of an object.    If the current version of the object is a delete marker, Amazon S3 behaves as if the object was deleted and includes x-amz-delete-marker: true in the response.    For more information about versioning, see PutBucketVersioning.   Overriding Response Header Values  There are times when you want to override certain response header values in a GET response. For example, you might override the Content-Disposition response header value in your GET request. You can override values for a set of response headers using the following query parameters. These response header values are sent only on a successful request, that is, when status code 200 OK is returned. The set of headers you can override using these parameters is a subset of the headers that Amazon S3 accepts when you create an object. The response headers that you can override for the GET response are Content-Type, Content-Language, Expires, Cache-Control, Content-Disposition, and Content-Encoding. To override these header values in the GET response, you use the following request parameters.  You must sign the request, either using an Authorization header or a presigned URL, when using these parameters. They cannot be used with an unsigned (anonymous) request.     response-content-type     response-content-language     response-expires     response-cache-control     response-content-disposition     response-content-encoding     Additional Considerations about Request Headers  If both of the If-Match and If-Unmodified-Since headers are present in the request as follows: If-Match condition evaluates to true, and; If-Unmodified-Since condition evaluates to false; then, S3 returns 200 OK and the data requested.  If both of the If-None-Match and If-Modified-Since headers are present in the request as follows: If-None-Match condition evaluates to false, and; If-Modified-Since condition evaluates to true; then, S3 returns 304 Not Modified response code. For more information about conditional requests, see RFC 7232. The following operations are related to GetObject:    ListBuckets     GetObjectAcl   
 374     */
 375    getObject(params: S3.Types.GetObjectRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetObjectOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetObjectOutput, AWSError>;
 376    /**
 377     * Retrieves objects from Amazon S3. To use GET, you must have READ access to the object. If you grant READ access to the anonymous user, you can return the object without using an authorization header. An Amazon S3 bucket has no directory hierarchy such as you would find in a typical computer file system. You can, however, create a logical hierarchy by using object key names that imply a folder structure. For example, instead of naming an object sample.jpg, you can name it photos/2006/February/sample.jpg. To get an object from such a logical hierarchy, specify the full key name for the object in the GET operation. For a virtual hosted-style request example, if you have the object photos/2006/February/sample.jpg, specify the resource as /photos/2006/February/sample.jpg. For a path-style request example, if you have the object photos/2006/February/sample.jpg in the bucket named examplebucket, specify the resource as /examplebucket/photos/2006/February/sample.jpg. For more information about request types, see HTTP Host Header Bucket Specification. To distribute large files to many people, you can save bandwidth costs by using BitTorrent. For more information, see Amazon S3 Torrent. For more information about returning the ACL of an object, see GetObjectAcl. If the object you are retrieving is stored in the S3 Glacier or S3 Glacier Deep Archive storage class, or S3 Intelligent-Tiering Archive or S3 Intelligent-Tiering Deep Archive tiers, before you can retrieve the object you must first restore a copy using RestoreObject. Otherwise, this action returns an InvalidObjectStateError error. For information about restoring archived objects, see Restoring Archived Objects. Encryption request headers, like x-amz-server-side-encryption, should not be sent for GET requests if your object uses server-side encryption with CMKs stored in Amazon Web Services KMS (SSE-KMS) or server-side encryption with Amazon S3–managed encryption keys (SSE-S3). If your object does use these types of keys, you’ll get an HTTP 400 BadRequest error. If you encrypt an object by using server-side encryption with customer-provided encryption keys (SSE-C) when you store the object in Amazon S3, then when you GET the object, you must use the following headers:   x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-algorithm   x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-key   x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-key-MD5   For more information about SSE-C, see Server-Side Encryption (Using Customer-Provided Encryption Keys). Assuming you have the relevant permission to read object tags, the response also returns the x-amz-tagging-count header that provides the count of number of tags associated with the object. You can use GetObjectTagging to retrieve the tag set associated with an object.  Permissions  You need the relevant read object (or version) permission for this operation. For more information, see Specifying Permissions in a Policy. If the object you request does not exist, the error Amazon S3 returns depends on whether you also have the s3:ListBucket permission.   If you have the s3:ListBucket permission on the bucket, Amazon S3 will return an HTTP status code 404 ("no such key") error.   If you don’t have the s3:ListBucket permission, Amazon S3 will return an HTTP status code 403 ("access denied") error.    Versioning  By default, the GET action returns the current version of an object. To return a different version, use the versionId subresource.    You need the s3:GetObjectVersion permission to access a specific version of an object.    If the current version of the object is a delete marker, Amazon S3 behaves as if the object was deleted and includes x-amz-delete-marker: true in the response.    For more information about versioning, see PutBucketVersioning.   Overriding Response Header Values  There are times when you want to override certain response header values in a GET response. For example, you might override the Content-Disposition response header value in your GET request. You can override values for a set of response headers using the following query parameters. These response header values are sent only on a successful request, that is, when status code 200 OK is returned. The set of headers you can override using these parameters is a subset of the headers that Amazon S3 accepts when you create an object. The response headers that you can override for the GET response are Content-Type, Content-Language, Expires, Cache-Control, Content-Disposition, and Content-Encoding. To override these header values in the GET response, you use the following request parameters.  You must sign the request, either using an Authorization header or a presigned URL, when using these parameters. They cannot be used with an unsigned (anonymous) request.     response-content-type     response-content-language     response-expires     response-cache-control     response-content-disposition     response-content-encoding     Additional Considerations about Request Headers  If both of the If-Match and If-Unmodified-Since headers are present in the request as follows: If-Match condition evaluates to true, and; If-Unmodified-Since condition evaluates to false; then, S3 returns 200 OK and the data requested.  If both of the If-None-Match and If-Modified-Since headers are present in the request as follows: If-None-Match condition evaluates to false, and; If-Modified-Since condition evaluates to true; then, S3 returns 304 Not Modified response code. For more information about conditional requests, see RFC 7232. The following operations are related to GetObject:    ListBuckets     GetObjectAcl   
 378     */
 379    getObject(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetObjectOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetObjectOutput, AWSError>;
 380    /**
 381     * Returns the access control list (ACL) of an object. To use this operation, you must have READ_ACP access to the object. This action is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts.  Versioning  By default, GET returns ACL information about the current version of an object. To return ACL information about a different version, use the versionId subresource. The following operations are related to GetObjectAcl:    GetObject     DeleteObject     PutObject   
 382     */
 383    getObjectAcl(params: S3.Types.GetObjectAclRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetObjectAclOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetObjectAclOutput, AWSError>;
 384    /**
 385     * Returns the access control list (ACL) of an object. To use this operation, you must have READ_ACP access to the object. This action is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts.  Versioning  By default, GET returns ACL information about the current version of an object. To return ACL information about a different version, use the versionId subresource. The following operations are related to GetObjectAcl:    GetObject     DeleteObject     PutObject   
 386     */
 387    getObjectAcl(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetObjectAclOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetObjectAclOutput, AWSError>;
 388    /**
 389     * Gets an object's current Legal Hold status. For more information, see Locking Objects. This action is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts.
 390     */
 391    getObjectLegalHold(params: S3.Types.GetObjectLegalHoldRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetObjectLegalHoldOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetObjectLegalHoldOutput, AWSError>;
 392    /**
 393     * Gets an object's current Legal Hold status. For more information, see Locking Objects. This action is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts.
 394     */
 395    getObjectLegalHold(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetObjectLegalHoldOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetObjectLegalHoldOutput, AWSError>;
 396    /**
 397     * Gets the Object Lock configuration for a bucket. The rule specified in the Object Lock configuration will be applied by default to every new object placed in the specified bucket. For more information, see Locking Objects.
 398     */
 399    getObjectLockConfiguration(params: S3.Types.GetObjectLockConfigurationRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetObjectLockConfigurationOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetObjectLockConfigurationOutput, AWSError>;
 400    /**
 401     * Gets the Object Lock configuration for a bucket. The rule specified in the Object Lock configuration will be applied by default to every new object placed in the specified bucket. For more information, see Locking Objects.
 402     */
 403    getObjectLockConfiguration(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetObjectLockConfigurationOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetObjectLockConfigurationOutput, AWSError>;
 404    /**
 405     * Retrieves an object's retention settings. For more information, see Locking Objects. This action is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts.
 406     */
 407    getObjectRetention(params: S3.Types.GetObjectRetentionRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetObjectRetentionOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetObjectRetentionOutput, AWSError>;
 408    /**
 409     * Retrieves an object's retention settings. For more information, see Locking Objects. This action is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts.
 410     */
 411    getObjectRetention(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetObjectRetentionOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetObjectRetentionOutput, AWSError>;
 412    /**
 413     * Returns the tag-set of an object. You send the GET request against the tagging subresource associated with the object. To use this operation, you must have permission to perform the s3:GetObjectTagging action. By default, the GET action returns information about current version of an object. For a versioned bucket, you can have multiple versions of an object in your bucket. To retrieve tags of any other version, use the versionId query parameter. You also need permission for the s3:GetObjectVersionTagging action.  By default, the bucket owner has this permission and can grant this permission to others.  For information about the Amazon S3 object tagging feature, see Object Tagging. The following action is related to GetObjectTagging:    PutObjectTagging     DeleteObjectTagging   
 414     */
 415    getObjectTagging(params: S3.Types.GetObjectTaggingRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetObjectTaggingOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetObjectTaggingOutput, AWSError>;
 416    /**
 417     * Returns the tag-set of an object. You send the GET request against the tagging subresource associated with the object. To use this operation, you must have permission to perform the s3:GetObjectTagging action. By default, the GET action returns information about current version of an object. For a versioned bucket, you can have multiple versions of an object in your bucket. To retrieve tags of any other version, use the versionId query parameter. You also need permission for the s3:GetObjectVersionTagging action.  By default, the bucket owner has this permission and can grant this permission to others.  For information about the Amazon S3 object tagging feature, see Object Tagging. The following action is related to GetObjectTagging:    PutObjectTagging     DeleteObjectTagging   
 418     */
 419    getObjectTagging(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetObjectTaggingOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetObjectTaggingOutput, AWSError>;
 420    /**
 421     * Returns torrent files from a bucket. BitTorrent can save you bandwidth when you're distributing large files. For more information about BitTorrent, see Using BitTorrent with Amazon S3.  You can get torrent only for objects that are less than 5 GB in size, and that are not encrypted using server-side encryption with a customer-provided encryption key.  To use GET, you must have READ access to the object. This action is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts. The following action is related to GetObjectTorrent:    GetObject   
 422     */
 423    getObjectTorrent(params: S3.Types.GetObjectTorrentRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetObjectTorrentOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetObjectTorrentOutput, AWSError>;
 424    /**
 425     * Returns torrent files from a bucket. BitTorrent can save you bandwidth when you're distributing large files. For more information about BitTorrent, see Using BitTorrent with Amazon S3.  You can get torrent only for objects that are less than 5 GB in size, and that are not encrypted using server-side encryption with a customer-provided encryption key.  To use GET, you must have READ access to the object. This action is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts. The following action is related to GetObjectTorrent:    GetObject   
 426     */
 427    getObjectTorrent(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetObjectTorrentOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetObjectTorrentOutput, AWSError>;
 428    /**
 429     * Retrieves the PublicAccessBlock configuration for an Amazon S3 bucket. To use this operation, you must have the s3:GetBucketPublicAccessBlock permission. For more information about Amazon S3 permissions, see Specifying Permissions in a Policy.  When Amazon S3 evaluates the PublicAccessBlock configuration for a bucket or an object, it checks the PublicAccessBlock configuration for both the bucket (or the bucket that contains the object) and the bucket owner's account. If the PublicAccessBlock settings are different between the bucket and the account, Amazon S3 uses the most restrictive combination of the bucket-level and account-level settings.  For more information about when Amazon S3 considers a bucket or an object public, see The Meaning of "Public". The following operations are related to GetPublicAccessBlock:    Using Amazon S3 Block Public Access     PutPublicAccessBlock     GetPublicAccessBlock     DeletePublicAccessBlock   
 430     */
 431    getPublicAccessBlock(params: S3.Types.GetPublicAccessBlockRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetPublicAccessBlockOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetPublicAccessBlockOutput, AWSError>;
 432    /**
 433     * Retrieves the PublicAccessBlock configuration for an Amazon S3 bucket. To use this operation, you must have the s3:GetBucketPublicAccessBlock permission. For more information about Amazon S3 permissions, see Specifying Permissions in a Policy.  When Amazon S3 evaluates the PublicAccessBlock configuration for a bucket or an object, it checks the PublicAccessBlock configuration for both the bucket (or the bucket that contains the object) and the bucket owner's account. If the PublicAccessBlock settings are different between the bucket and the account, Amazon S3 uses the most restrictive combination of the bucket-level and account-level settings.  For more information about when Amazon S3 considers a bucket or an object public, see The Meaning of "Public". The following operations are related to GetPublicAccessBlock:    Using Amazon S3 Block Public Access     PutPublicAccessBlock     GetPublicAccessBlock     DeletePublicAccessBlock   
 434     */
 435    getPublicAccessBlock(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.GetPublicAccessBlockOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.GetPublicAccessBlockOutput, AWSError>;
 436    /**
 437     * This action is useful to determine if a bucket exists and you have permission to access it. The action returns a 200 OK if the bucket exists and you have permission to access it. If the bucket does not exist or you do not have permission to access it, the HEAD request returns a generic 404 Not Found or 403 Forbidden code. A message body is not included, so you cannot determine the exception beyond these error codes. To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:ListBucket action. The bucket owner has this permission by default and can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources. To use this API against an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information see, Using access points.
 438     */
 439    headBucket(params: S3.Types.HeadBucketRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 440    /**
 441     * This action is useful to determine if a bucket exists and you have permission to access it. The action returns a 200 OK if the bucket exists and you have permission to access it. If the bucket does not exist or you do not have permission to access it, the HEAD request returns a generic 404 Not Found or 403 Forbidden code. A message body is not included, so you cannot determine the exception beyond these error codes. To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:ListBucket action. The bucket owner has this permission by default and can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources. To use this API against an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information see, Using access points.
 442     */
 443    headBucket(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 444    /**
 445     * The HEAD action retrieves metadata from an object without returning the object itself. This action is useful if you're only interested in an object's metadata. To use HEAD, you must have READ access to the object. A HEAD request has the same options as a GET action on an object. The response is identical to the GET response except that there is no response body. Because of this, if the HEAD request generates an error, it returns a generic 404 Not Found or 403 Forbidden code. It is not possible to retrieve the exact exception beyond these error codes. If you encrypt an object by using server-side encryption with customer-provided encryption keys (SSE-C) when you store the object in Amazon S3, then when you retrieve the metadata from the object, you must use the following headers:   x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-algorithm   x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-key   x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-key-MD5   For more information about SSE-C, see Server-Side Encryption (Using Customer-Provided Encryption Keys).    Encryption request headers, like x-amz-server-side-encryption, should not be sent for GET requests if your object uses server-side encryption with CMKs stored in Amazon Web Services KMS (SSE-KMS) or server-side encryption with Amazon S3–managed encryption keys (SSE-S3). If your object does use these types of keys, you’ll get an HTTP 400 BadRequest error.    The last modified property in this case is the creation date of the object.    Request headers are limited to 8 KB in size. For more information, see Common Request Headers. Consider the following when using request headers:    Consideration 1 – If both of the If-Match and If-Unmodified-Since headers are present in the request as follows:    If-Match condition evaluates to true, and;    If-Unmodified-Since condition evaluates to false;   Then Amazon S3 returns 200 OK and the data requested.    Consideration 2 – If both of the If-None-Match and If-Modified-Since headers are present in the request as follows:    If-None-Match condition evaluates to false, and;    If-Modified-Since condition evaluates to true;   Then Amazon S3 returns the 304 Not Modified response code.   For more information about conditional requests, see RFC 7232.  Permissions  You need the relevant read object (or version) permission for this operation. For more information, see Specifying Permissions in a Policy. If the object you request does not exist, the error Amazon S3 returns depends on whether you also have the s3:ListBucket permission.   If you have the s3:ListBucket permission on the bucket, Amazon S3 returns an HTTP status code 404 ("no such key") error.   If you don’t have the s3:ListBucket permission, Amazon S3 returns an HTTP status code 403 ("access denied") error.   The following action is related to HeadObject:    GetObject   
 446     */
 447    headObject(params: S3.Types.HeadObjectRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.HeadObjectOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.HeadObjectOutput, AWSError>;
 448    /**
 449     * The HEAD action retrieves metadata from an object without returning the object itself. This action is useful if you're only interested in an object's metadata. To use HEAD, you must have READ access to the object. A HEAD request has the same options as a GET action on an object. The response is identical to the GET response except that there is no response body. Because of this, if the HEAD request generates an error, it returns a generic 404 Not Found or 403 Forbidden code. It is not possible to retrieve the exact exception beyond these error codes. If you encrypt an object by using server-side encryption with customer-provided encryption keys (SSE-C) when you store the object in Amazon S3, then when you retrieve the metadata from the object, you must use the following headers:   x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-algorithm   x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-key   x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-key-MD5   For more information about SSE-C, see Server-Side Encryption (Using Customer-Provided Encryption Keys).    Encryption request headers, like x-amz-server-side-encryption, should not be sent for GET requests if your object uses server-side encryption with CMKs stored in Amazon Web Services KMS (SSE-KMS) or server-side encryption with Amazon S3–managed encryption keys (SSE-S3). If your object does use these types of keys, you’ll get an HTTP 400 BadRequest error.    The last modified property in this case is the creation date of the object.    Request headers are limited to 8 KB in size. For more information, see Common Request Headers. Consider the following when using request headers:    Consideration 1 – If both of the If-Match and If-Unmodified-Since headers are present in the request as follows:    If-Match condition evaluates to true, and;    If-Unmodified-Since condition evaluates to false;   Then Amazon S3 returns 200 OK and the data requested.    Consideration 2 – If both of the If-None-Match and If-Modified-Since headers are present in the request as follows:    If-None-Match condition evaluates to false, and;    If-Modified-Since condition evaluates to true;   Then Amazon S3 returns the 304 Not Modified response code.   For more information about conditional requests, see RFC 7232.  Permissions  You need the relevant read object (or version) permission for this operation. For more information, see Specifying Permissions in a Policy. If the object you request does not exist, the error Amazon S3 returns depends on whether you also have the s3:ListBucket permission.   If you have the s3:ListBucket permission on the bucket, Amazon S3 returns an HTTP status code 404 ("no such key") error.   If you don’t have the s3:ListBucket permission, Amazon S3 returns an HTTP status code 403 ("access denied") error.   The following action is related to HeadObject:    GetObject   
 450     */
 451    headObject(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.HeadObjectOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.HeadObjectOutput, AWSError>;
 452    /**
 453     * Lists the analytics configurations for the bucket. You can have up to 1,000 analytics configurations per bucket. This action supports list pagination and does not return more than 100 configurations at a time. You should always check the IsTruncated element in the response. If there are no more configurations to list, IsTruncated is set to false. If there are more configurations to list, IsTruncated is set to true, and there will be a value in NextContinuationToken. You use the NextContinuationToken value to continue the pagination of the list by passing the value in continuation-token in the request to GET the next page. To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:GetAnalyticsConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission by default. The bucket owner can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources. For information about Amazon S3 analytics feature, see Amazon S3 Analytics – Storage Class Analysis.  The following operations are related to ListBucketAnalyticsConfigurations:    GetBucketAnalyticsConfiguration     DeleteBucketAnalyticsConfiguration     PutBucketAnalyticsConfiguration   
 454     */
 455    listBucketAnalyticsConfigurations(params: S3.Types.ListBucketAnalyticsConfigurationsRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.ListBucketAnalyticsConfigurationsOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.ListBucketAnalyticsConfigurationsOutput, AWSError>;
 456    /**
 457     * Lists the analytics configurations for the bucket. You can have up to 1,000 analytics configurations per bucket. This action supports list pagination and does not return more than 100 configurations at a time. You should always check the IsTruncated element in the response. If there are no more configurations to list, IsTruncated is set to false. If there are more configurations to list, IsTruncated is set to true, and there will be a value in NextContinuationToken. You use the NextContinuationToken value to continue the pagination of the list by passing the value in continuation-token in the request to GET the next page. To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:GetAnalyticsConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission by default. The bucket owner can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources. For information about Amazon S3 analytics feature, see Amazon S3 Analytics – Storage Class Analysis.  The following operations are related to ListBucketAnalyticsConfigurations:    GetBucketAnalyticsConfiguration     DeleteBucketAnalyticsConfiguration     PutBucketAnalyticsConfiguration   
 458     */
 459    listBucketAnalyticsConfigurations(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.ListBucketAnalyticsConfigurationsOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.ListBucketAnalyticsConfigurationsOutput, AWSError>;
 460    /**
 461     * Lists the S3 Intelligent-Tiering configuration from the specified bucket. The S3 Intelligent-Tiering storage class is designed to optimize storage costs by automatically moving data to the most cost-effective storage access tier, without additional operational overhead. S3 Intelligent-Tiering delivers automatic cost savings by moving data between access tiers, when access patterns change. The S3 Intelligent-Tiering storage class is suitable for objects larger than 128 KB that you plan to store for at least 30 days. If the size of an object is less than 128 KB, it is not eligible for auto-tiering. Smaller objects can be stored, but they are always charged at the frequent access tier rates in the S3 Intelligent-Tiering storage class.  If you delete an object before the end of the 30-day minimum storage duration period, you are charged for 30 days. For more information, see Storage class for automatically optimizing frequently and infrequently accessed objects. Operations related to ListBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurations include:     DeleteBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration     PutBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration     GetBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration   
 462     */
 463    listBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurations(params: S3.Types.ListBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurationsRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.ListBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurationsOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.ListBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurationsOutput, AWSError>;
 464    /**
 465     * Lists the S3 Intelligent-Tiering configuration from the specified bucket. The S3 Intelligent-Tiering storage class is designed to optimize storage costs by automatically moving data to the most cost-effective storage access tier, without additional operational overhead. S3 Intelligent-Tiering delivers automatic cost savings by moving data between access tiers, when access patterns change. The S3 Intelligent-Tiering storage class is suitable for objects larger than 128 KB that you plan to store for at least 30 days. If the size of an object is less than 128 KB, it is not eligible for auto-tiering. Smaller objects can be stored, but they are always charged at the frequent access tier rates in the S3 Intelligent-Tiering storage class.  If you delete an object before the end of the 30-day minimum storage duration period, you are charged for 30 days. For more information, see Storage class for automatically optimizing frequently and infrequently accessed objects. Operations related to ListBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurations include:     DeleteBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration     PutBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration     GetBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration   
 466     */
 467    listBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurations(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.ListBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurationsOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.ListBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurationsOutput, AWSError>;
 468    /**
 469     * Returns a list of inventory configurations for the bucket. You can have up to 1,000 analytics configurations per bucket. This action supports list pagination and does not return more than 100 configurations at a time. Always check the IsTruncated element in the response. If there are no more configurations to list, IsTruncated is set to false. If there are more configurations to list, IsTruncated is set to true, and there is a value in NextContinuationToken. You use the NextContinuationToken value to continue the pagination of the list by passing the value in continuation-token in the request to GET the next page.  To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:GetInventoryConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission by default. The bucket owner can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources. For information about the Amazon S3 inventory feature, see Amazon S3 Inventory  The following operations are related to ListBucketInventoryConfigurations:    GetBucketInventoryConfiguration     DeleteBucketInventoryConfiguration     PutBucketInventoryConfiguration   
 470     */
 471    listBucketInventoryConfigurations(params: S3.Types.ListBucketInventoryConfigurationsRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.ListBucketInventoryConfigurationsOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.ListBucketInventoryConfigurationsOutput, AWSError>;
 472    /**
 473     * Returns a list of inventory configurations for the bucket. You can have up to 1,000 analytics configurations per bucket. This action supports list pagination and does not return more than 100 configurations at a time. Always check the IsTruncated element in the response. If there are no more configurations to list, IsTruncated is set to false. If there are more configurations to list, IsTruncated is set to true, and there is a value in NextContinuationToken. You use the NextContinuationToken value to continue the pagination of the list by passing the value in continuation-token in the request to GET the next page.  To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:GetInventoryConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission by default. The bucket owner can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources. For information about the Amazon S3 inventory feature, see Amazon S3 Inventory  The following operations are related to ListBucketInventoryConfigurations:    GetBucketInventoryConfiguration     DeleteBucketInventoryConfiguration     PutBucketInventoryConfiguration   
 474     */
 475    listBucketInventoryConfigurations(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.ListBucketInventoryConfigurationsOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.ListBucketInventoryConfigurationsOutput, AWSError>;
 476    /**
 477     * Lists the metrics configurations for the bucket. The metrics configurations are only for the request metrics of the bucket and do not provide information on daily storage metrics. You can have up to 1,000 configurations per bucket. This action supports list pagination and does not return more than 100 configurations at a time. Always check the IsTruncated element in the response. If there are no more configurations to list, IsTruncated is set to false. If there are more configurations to list, IsTruncated is set to true, and there is a value in NextContinuationToken. You use the NextContinuationToken value to continue the pagination of the list by passing the value in continuation-token in the request to GET the next page. To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:GetMetricsConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission by default. The bucket owner can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources. For more information about metrics configurations and CloudWatch request metrics, see Monitoring Metrics with Amazon CloudWatch. The following operations are related to ListBucketMetricsConfigurations:    PutBucketMetricsConfiguration     GetBucketMetricsConfiguration     DeleteBucketMetricsConfiguration   
 478     */
 479    listBucketMetricsConfigurations(params: S3.Types.ListBucketMetricsConfigurationsRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.ListBucketMetricsConfigurationsOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.ListBucketMetricsConfigurationsOutput, AWSError>;
 480    /**
 481     * Lists the metrics configurations for the bucket. The metrics configurations are only for the request metrics of the bucket and do not provide information on daily storage metrics. You can have up to 1,000 configurations per bucket. This action supports list pagination and does not return more than 100 configurations at a time. Always check the IsTruncated element in the response. If there are no more configurations to list, IsTruncated is set to false. If there are more configurations to list, IsTruncated is set to true, and there is a value in NextContinuationToken. You use the NextContinuationToken value to continue the pagination of the list by passing the value in continuation-token in the request to GET the next page. To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:GetMetricsConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission by default. The bucket owner can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources. For more information about metrics configurations and CloudWatch request metrics, see Monitoring Metrics with Amazon CloudWatch. The following operations are related to ListBucketMetricsConfigurations:    PutBucketMetricsConfiguration     GetBucketMetricsConfiguration     DeleteBucketMetricsConfiguration   
 482     */
 483    listBucketMetricsConfigurations(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.ListBucketMetricsConfigurationsOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.ListBucketMetricsConfigurationsOutput, AWSError>;
 484    /**
 485     * Returns a list of all buckets owned by the authenticated sender of the request.
 486     */
 487    listBuckets(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.ListBucketsOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.ListBucketsOutput, AWSError>;
 488    /**
 489     * This action lists in-progress multipart uploads. An in-progress multipart upload is a multipart upload that has been initiated using the Initiate Multipart Upload request, but has not yet been completed or aborted. This action returns at most 1,000 multipart uploads in the response. 1,000 multipart uploads is the maximum number of uploads a response can include, which is also the default value. You can further limit the number of uploads in a response by specifying the max-uploads parameter in the response. If additional multipart uploads satisfy the list criteria, the response will contain an IsTruncated element with the value true. To list the additional multipart uploads, use the key-marker and upload-id-marker request parameters. In the response, the uploads are sorted by key. If your application has initiated more than one multipart upload using the same object key, then uploads in the response are first sorted by key. Additionally, uploads are sorted in ascending order within each key by the upload initiation time. For more information on multipart uploads, see Uploading Objects Using Multipart Upload. For information on permissions required to use the multipart upload API, see Multipart Upload and Permissions. The following operations are related to ListMultipartUploads:    CreateMultipartUpload     UploadPart     CompleteMultipartUpload     ListParts     AbortMultipartUpload   
 490     */
 491    listMultipartUploads(params: S3.Types.ListMultipartUploadsRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.ListMultipartUploadsOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.ListMultipartUploadsOutput, AWSError>;
 492    /**
 493     * This action lists in-progress multipart uploads. An in-progress multipart upload is a multipart upload that has been initiated using the Initiate Multipart Upload request, but has not yet been completed or aborted. This action returns at most 1,000 multipart uploads in the response. 1,000 multipart uploads is the maximum number of uploads a response can include, which is also the default value. You can further limit the number of uploads in a response by specifying the max-uploads parameter in the response. If additional multipart uploads satisfy the list criteria, the response will contain an IsTruncated element with the value true. To list the additional multipart uploads, use the key-marker and upload-id-marker request parameters. In the response, the uploads are sorted by key. If your application has initiated more than one multipart upload using the same object key, then uploads in the response are first sorted by key. Additionally, uploads are sorted in ascending order within each key by the upload initiation time. For more information on multipart uploads, see Uploading Objects Using Multipart Upload. For information on permissions required to use the multipart upload API, see Multipart Upload and Permissions. The following operations are related to ListMultipartUploads:    CreateMultipartUpload     UploadPart     CompleteMultipartUpload     ListParts     AbortMultipartUpload   
 494     */
 495    listMultipartUploads(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.ListMultipartUploadsOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.ListMultipartUploadsOutput, AWSError>;
 496    /**
 497     * Returns metadata about all versions of the objects in a bucket. You can also use request parameters as selection criteria to return metadata about a subset of all the object versions.   To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:ListBucketVersions action. Be aware of the name difference.     A 200 OK response can contain valid or invalid XML. Make sure to design your application to parse the contents of the response and handle it appropriately.  To use this operation, you must have READ access to the bucket. This action is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts. The following operations are related to ListObjectVersions:    ListObjectsV2     GetObject     PutObject     DeleteObject   
 498     */
 499    listObjectVersions(params: S3.Types.ListObjectVersionsRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.ListObjectVersionsOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.ListObjectVersionsOutput, AWSError>;
 500    /**
 501     * Returns metadata about all versions of the objects in a bucket. You can also use request parameters as selection criteria to return metadata about a subset of all the object versions.   To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:ListBucketVersions action. Be aware of the name difference.     A 200 OK response can contain valid or invalid XML. Make sure to design your application to parse the contents of the response and handle it appropriately.  To use this operation, you must have READ access to the bucket. This action is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts. The following operations are related to ListObjectVersions:    ListObjectsV2     GetObject     PutObject     DeleteObject   
 502     */
 503    listObjectVersions(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.ListObjectVersionsOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.ListObjectVersionsOutput, AWSError>;
 504    /**
 505     * Returns some or all (up to 1,000) of the objects in a bucket. You can use the request parameters as selection criteria to return a subset of the objects in a bucket. A 200 OK response can contain valid or invalid XML. Be sure to design your application to parse the contents of the response and handle it appropriately.  This action has been revised. We recommend that you use the newer version, ListObjectsV2, when developing applications. For backward compatibility, Amazon S3 continues to support ListObjects.  The following operations are related to ListObjects:    ListObjectsV2     GetObject     PutObject     CreateBucket     ListBuckets   
 506     */
 507    listObjects(params: S3.Types.ListObjectsRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.ListObjectsOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.ListObjectsOutput, AWSError>;
 508    /**
 509     * Returns some or all (up to 1,000) of the objects in a bucket. You can use the request parameters as selection criteria to return a subset of the objects in a bucket. A 200 OK response can contain valid or invalid XML. Be sure to design your application to parse the contents of the response and handle it appropriately.  This action has been revised. We recommend that you use the newer version, ListObjectsV2, when developing applications. For backward compatibility, Amazon S3 continues to support ListObjects.  The following operations are related to ListObjects:    ListObjectsV2     GetObject     PutObject     CreateBucket     ListBuckets   
 510     */
 511    listObjects(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.ListObjectsOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.ListObjectsOutput, AWSError>;
 512    /**
 513     * Returns some or all (up to 1,000) of the objects in a bucket with each request. You can use the request parameters as selection criteria to return a subset of the objects in a bucket. A 200 OK response can contain valid or invalid XML. Make sure to design your application to parse the contents of the response and handle it appropriately. Objects are returned sorted in an ascending order of the respective key names in the list. For more information about listing objects, see Listing object keys programmatically  To use this operation, you must have READ access to the bucket. To use this action in an Identity and Access Management (IAM) policy, you must have permissions to perform the s3:ListBucket action. The bucket owner has this permission by default and can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources.  This section describes the latest revision of this action. We recommend that you use this revised API for application development. For backward compatibility, Amazon S3 continues to support the prior version of this API, ListObjects.  To get a list of your buckets, see ListBuckets. The following operations are related to ListObjectsV2:    GetObject     PutObject     CreateBucket   
 514     */
 515    listObjectsV2(params: S3.Types.ListObjectsV2Request, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.ListObjectsV2Output) => void): Request<S3.Types.ListObjectsV2Output, AWSError>;
 516    /**
 517     * Returns some or all (up to 1,000) of the objects in a bucket with each request. You can use the request parameters as selection criteria to return a subset of the objects in a bucket. A 200 OK response can contain valid or invalid XML. Make sure to design your application to parse the contents of the response and handle it appropriately. Objects are returned sorted in an ascending order of the respective key names in the list. For more information about listing objects, see Listing object keys programmatically  To use this operation, you must have READ access to the bucket. To use this action in an Identity and Access Management (IAM) policy, you must have permissions to perform the s3:ListBucket action. The bucket owner has this permission by default and can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources.  This section describes the latest revision of this action. We recommend that you use this revised API for application development. For backward compatibility, Amazon S3 continues to support the prior version of this API, ListObjects.  To get a list of your buckets, see ListBuckets. The following operations are related to ListObjectsV2:    GetObject     PutObject     CreateBucket   
 518     */
 519    listObjectsV2(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.ListObjectsV2Output) => void): Request<S3.Types.ListObjectsV2Output, AWSError>;
 520    /**
 521     * Lists the parts that have been uploaded for a specific multipart upload. This operation must include the upload ID, which you obtain by sending the initiate multipart upload request (see CreateMultipartUpload). This request returns a maximum of 1,000 uploaded parts. The default number of parts returned is 1,000 parts. You can restrict the number of parts returned by specifying the max-parts request parameter. If your multipart upload consists of more than 1,000 parts, the response returns an IsTruncated field with the value of true, and a NextPartNumberMarker element. In subsequent ListParts requests you can include the part-number-marker query string parameter and set its value to the NextPartNumberMarker field value from the previous response. For more information on multipart uploads, see Uploading Objects Using Multipart Upload. For information on permissions required to use the multipart upload API, see Multipart Upload and Permissions. The following operations are related to ListParts:    CreateMultipartUpload     UploadPart     CompleteMultipartUpload     AbortMultipartUpload     ListMultipartUploads   
 522     */
 523    listParts(params: S3.Types.ListPartsRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.ListPartsOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.ListPartsOutput, AWSError>;
 524    /**
 525     * Lists the parts that have been uploaded for a specific multipart upload. This operation must include the upload ID, which you obtain by sending the initiate multipart upload request (see CreateMultipartUpload). This request returns a maximum of 1,000 uploaded parts. The default number of parts returned is 1,000 parts. You can restrict the number of parts returned by specifying the max-parts request parameter. If your multipart upload consists of more than 1,000 parts, the response returns an IsTruncated field with the value of true, and a NextPartNumberMarker element. In subsequent ListParts requests you can include the part-number-marker query string parameter and set its value to the NextPartNumberMarker field value from the previous response. For more information on multipart uploads, see Uploading Objects Using Multipart Upload. For information on permissions required to use the multipart upload API, see Multipart Upload and Permissions. The following operations are related to ListParts:    CreateMultipartUpload     UploadPart     CompleteMultipartUpload     AbortMultipartUpload     ListMultipartUploads   
 526     */
 527    listParts(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.ListPartsOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.ListPartsOutput, AWSError>;
 528    /**
 529     * Sets the accelerate configuration of an existing bucket. Amazon S3 Transfer Acceleration is a bucket-level feature that enables you to perform faster data transfers to Amazon S3.  To use this operation, you must have permission to perform the s3:PutAccelerateConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission by default. The bucket owner can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources.  The Transfer Acceleration state of a bucket can be set to one of the following two values:    Enabled – Enables accelerated data transfers to the bucket.    Suspended – Disables accelerated data transfers to the bucket.   The GetBucketAccelerateConfiguration action returns the transfer acceleration state of a bucket. After setting the Transfer Acceleration state of a bucket to Enabled, it might take up to thirty minutes before the data transfer rates to the bucket increase.  The name of the bucket used for Transfer Acceleration must be DNS-compliant and must not contain periods (".").  For more information about transfer acceleration, see Transfer Acceleration. The following operations are related to PutBucketAccelerateConfiguration:    GetBucketAccelerateConfiguration     CreateBucket   
 530     */
 531    putBucketAccelerateConfiguration(params: S3.Types.PutBucketAccelerateConfigurationRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 532    /**
 533     * Sets the accelerate configuration of an existing bucket. Amazon S3 Transfer Acceleration is a bucket-level feature that enables you to perform faster data transfers to Amazon S3.  To use this operation, you must have permission to perform the s3:PutAccelerateConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission by default. The bucket owner can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources.  The Transfer Acceleration state of a bucket can be set to one of the following two values:    Enabled – Enables accelerated data transfers to the bucket.    Suspended – Disables accelerated data transfers to the bucket.   The GetBucketAccelerateConfiguration action returns the transfer acceleration state of a bucket. After setting the Transfer Acceleration state of a bucket to Enabled, it might take up to thirty minutes before the data transfer rates to the bucket increase.  The name of the bucket used for Transfer Acceleration must be DNS-compliant and must not contain periods (".").  For more information about transfer acceleration, see Transfer Acceleration. The following operations are related to PutBucketAccelerateConfiguration:    GetBucketAccelerateConfiguration     CreateBucket   
 534     */
 535    putBucketAccelerateConfiguration(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 536    /**
 537     * Sets the permissions on an existing bucket using access control lists (ACL). For more information, see Using ACLs. To set the ACL of a bucket, you must have WRITE_ACP permission. You can use one of the following two ways to set a bucket's permissions:   Specify the ACL in the request body   Specify permissions using request headers    You cannot specify access permission using both the body and the request headers.  Depending on your application needs, you may choose to set the ACL on a bucket using either the request body or the headers. For example, if you have an existing application that updates a bucket ACL using the request body, then you can continue to use that approach.  Access Permissions  You can set access permissions using one of the following methods:   Specify a canned ACL with the x-amz-acl request header. Amazon S3 supports a set of predefined ACLs, known as canned ACLs. Each canned ACL has a predefined set of grantees and permissions. Specify the canned ACL name as the value of x-amz-acl. If you use this header, you cannot use other access control-specific headers in your request. For more information, see Canned ACL.   Specify access permissions explicitly with the x-amz-grant-read, x-amz-grant-read-acp, x-amz-grant-write-acp, and x-amz-grant-full-control headers. When using these headers, you specify explicit access permissions and grantees (Amazon Web Services accounts or Amazon S3 groups) who will receive the permission. If you use these ACL-specific headers, you cannot use the x-amz-acl header to set a canned ACL. These parameters map to the set of permissions that Amazon S3 supports in an ACL. For more information, see Access Control List (ACL) Overview. You specify each grantee as a type=value pair, where the type is one of the following:    id – if the value specified is the canonical user ID of an Amazon Web Services account    uri – if you are granting permissions to a predefined group    emailAddress – if the value specified is the email address of an Amazon Web Services account  Using email addresses to specify a grantee is only supported in the following Amazon Web Services Regions:    US East (N. Virginia)   US West (N. California)    US West (Oregon)    Asia Pacific (Singapore)   Asia Pacific (Sydney)   Asia Pacific (Tokyo)   Europe (Ireland)   South America (São Paulo)   For a list of all the Amazon S3 supported Regions and endpoints, see Regions and Endpoints in the Amazon Web Services General Reference.    For example, the following x-amz-grant-write header grants create, overwrite, and delete objects permission to LogDelivery group predefined by Amazon S3 and two Amazon Web Services accounts identified by their email addresses.  x-amz-grant-write: uri="http://acs.amazonaws.com/groups/s3/LogDelivery", id="111122223333", id="555566667777"     You can use either a canned ACL or specify access permissions explicitly. You cannot do both.  Grantee Values  You can specify the person (grantee) to whom you're assigning access rights (using request elements) in the following ways:   By the person's ID:  &lt;Grantee xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance" xsi:type="CanonicalUser"&gt;&lt;ID&gt;&lt;&gt;ID&lt;&gt;&lt;/ID&gt;&lt;DisplayName&gt;&lt;&gt;GranteesEmail&lt;&gt;&lt;/DisplayName&gt; &lt;/Grantee&gt;  DisplayName is optional and ignored in the request   By URI:  &lt;Grantee xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance" xsi:type="Group"&gt;&lt;URI&gt;&lt;&gt;http://acs.amazonaws.com/groups/global/AuthenticatedUsers&lt;&gt;&lt;/URI&gt;&lt;/Grantee&gt;    By Email address:  &lt;Grantee xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance" xsi:type="AmazonCustomerByEmail"&gt;&lt;EmailAddress&gt;&lt;&gt;Grantees@email.com&lt;&gt;&lt;/EmailAddress&gt;lt;/Grantee&gt;  The grantee is resolved to the CanonicalUser and, in a response to a GET Object acl request, appears as the CanonicalUser.   Using email addresses to specify a grantee is only supported in the following Amazon Web Services Regions:    US East (N. Virginia)   US West (N. California)    US West (Oregon)    Asia Pacific (Singapore)   Asia Pacific (Sydney)   Asia Pacific (Tokyo)   Europe (Ireland)   South America (São Paulo)   For a list of all the Amazon S3 supported Regions and endpoints, see Regions and Endpoints in the Amazon Web Services General Reference.     Related Resources     CreateBucket     DeleteBucket     GetObjectAcl   
 538     */
 539    putBucketAcl(params: S3.Types.PutBucketAclRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 540    /**
 541     * Sets the permissions on an existing bucket using access control lists (ACL). For more information, see Using ACLs. To set the ACL of a bucket, you must have WRITE_ACP permission. You can use one of the following two ways to set a bucket's permissions:   Specify the ACL in the request body   Specify permissions using request headers    You cannot specify access permission using both the body and the request headers.  Depending on your application needs, you may choose to set the ACL on a bucket using either the request body or the headers. For example, if you have an existing application that updates a bucket ACL using the request body, then you can continue to use that approach.  Access Permissions  You can set access permissions using one of the following methods:   Specify a canned ACL with the x-amz-acl request header. Amazon S3 supports a set of predefined ACLs, known as canned ACLs. Each canned ACL has a predefined set of grantees and permissions. Specify the canned ACL name as the value of x-amz-acl. If you use this header, you cannot use other access control-specific headers in your request. For more information, see Canned ACL.   Specify access permissions explicitly with the x-amz-grant-read, x-amz-grant-read-acp, x-amz-grant-write-acp, and x-amz-grant-full-control headers. When using these headers, you specify explicit access permissions and grantees (Amazon Web Services accounts or Amazon S3 groups) who will receive the permission. If you use these ACL-specific headers, you cannot use the x-amz-acl header to set a canned ACL. These parameters map to the set of permissions that Amazon S3 supports in an ACL. For more information, see Access Control List (ACL) Overview. You specify each grantee as a type=value pair, where the type is one of the following:    id – if the value specified is the canonical user ID of an Amazon Web Services account    uri – if you are granting permissions to a predefined group    emailAddress – if the value specified is the email address of an Amazon Web Services account  Using email addresses to specify a grantee is only supported in the following Amazon Web Services Regions:    US East (N. Virginia)   US West (N. California)    US West (Oregon)    Asia Pacific (Singapore)   Asia Pacific (Sydney)   Asia Pacific (Tokyo)   Europe (Ireland)   South America (São Paulo)   For a list of all the Amazon S3 supported Regions and endpoints, see Regions and Endpoints in the Amazon Web Services General Reference.    For example, the following x-amz-grant-write header grants create, overwrite, and delete objects permission to LogDelivery group predefined by Amazon S3 and two Amazon Web Services accounts identified by their email addresses.  x-amz-grant-write: uri="http://acs.amazonaws.com/groups/s3/LogDelivery", id="111122223333", id="555566667777"     You can use either a canned ACL or specify access permissions explicitly. You cannot do both.  Grantee Values  You can specify the person (grantee) to whom you're assigning access rights (using request elements) in the following ways:   By the person's ID:  &lt;Grantee xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance" xsi:type="CanonicalUser"&gt;&lt;ID&gt;&lt;&gt;ID&lt;&gt;&lt;/ID&gt;&lt;DisplayName&gt;&lt;&gt;GranteesEmail&lt;&gt;&lt;/DisplayName&gt; &lt;/Grantee&gt;  DisplayName is optional and ignored in the request   By URI:  &lt;Grantee xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance" xsi:type="Group"&gt;&lt;URI&gt;&lt;&gt;http://acs.amazonaws.com/groups/global/AuthenticatedUsers&lt;&gt;&lt;/URI&gt;&lt;/Grantee&gt;    By Email address:  &lt;Grantee xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance" xsi:type="AmazonCustomerByEmail"&gt;&lt;EmailAddress&gt;&lt;&gt;Grantees@email.com&lt;&gt;&lt;/EmailAddress&gt;lt;/Grantee&gt;  The grantee is resolved to the CanonicalUser and, in a response to a GET Object acl request, appears as the CanonicalUser.   Using email addresses to specify a grantee is only supported in the following Amazon Web Services Regions:    US East (N. Virginia)   US West (N. California)    US West (Oregon)    Asia Pacific (Singapore)   Asia Pacific (Sydney)   Asia Pacific (Tokyo)   Europe (Ireland)   South America (São Paulo)   For a list of all the Amazon S3 supported Regions and endpoints, see Regions and Endpoints in the Amazon Web Services General Reference.     Related Resources     CreateBucket     DeleteBucket     GetObjectAcl   
 542     */
 543    putBucketAcl(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 544    /**
 545     * Sets an analytics configuration for the bucket (specified by the analytics configuration ID). You can have up to 1,000 analytics configurations per bucket. You can choose to have storage class analysis export analysis reports sent to a comma-separated values (CSV) flat file. See the DataExport request element. Reports are updated daily and are based on the object filters that you configure. When selecting data export, you specify a destination bucket and an optional destination prefix where the file is written. You can export the data to a destination bucket in a different account. However, the destination bucket must be in the same Region as the bucket that you are making the PUT analytics configuration to. For more information, see Amazon S3 Analytics – Storage Class Analysis.   You must create a bucket policy on the destination bucket where the exported file is written to grant permissions to Amazon S3 to write objects to the bucket. For an example policy, see Granting Permissions for Amazon S3 Inventory and Storage Class Analysis.  To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:PutAnalyticsConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission by default. The bucket owner can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources.  Special Errors       HTTP Error: HTTP 400 Bad Request     Code: InvalidArgument     Cause: Invalid argument.         HTTP Error: HTTP 400 Bad Request     Code: TooManyConfigurations     Cause: You are attempting to create a new configuration but have already reached the 1,000-configuration limit.         HTTP Error: HTTP 403 Forbidden     Code: AccessDenied     Cause: You are not the owner of the specified bucket, or you do not have the s3:PutAnalyticsConfiguration bucket permission to set the configuration on the bucket.       Related Resources     GetBucketAnalyticsConfiguration     DeleteBucketAnalyticsConfiguration     ListBucketAnalyticsConfigurations   
 546     */
 547    putBucketAnalyticsConfiguration(params: S3.Types.PutBucketAnalyticsConfigurationRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 548    /**
 549     * Sets an analytics configuration for the bucket (specified by the analytics configuration ID). You can have up to 1,000 analytics configurations per bucket. You can choose to have storage class analysis export analysis reports sent to a comma-separated values (CSV) flat file. See the DataExport request element. Reports are updated daily and are based on the object filters that you configure. When selecting data export, you specify a destination bucket and an optional destination prefix where the file is written. You can export the data to a destination bucket in a different account. However, the destination bucket must be in the same Region as the bucket that you are making the PUT analytics configuration to. For more information, see Amazon S3 Analytics – Storage Class Analysis.   You must create a bucket policy on the destination bucket where the exported file is written to grant permissions to Amazon S3 to write objects to the bucket. For an example policy, see Granting Permissions for Amazon S3 Inventory and Storage Class Analysis.  To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:PutAnalyticsConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission by default. The bucket owner can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources.  Special Errors       HTTP Error: HTTP 400 Bad Request     Code: InvalidArgument     Cause: Invalid argument.         HTTP Error: HTTP 400 Bad Request     Code: TooManyConfigurations     Cause: You are attempting to create a new configuration but have already reached the 1,000-configuration limit.         HTTP Error: HTTP 403 Forbidden     Code: AccessDenied     Cause: You are not the owner of the specified bucket, or you do not have the s3:PutAnalyticsConfiguration bucket permission to set the configuration on the bucket.       Related Resources     GetBucketAnalyticsConfiguration     DeleteBucketAnalyticsConfiguration     ListBucketAnalyticsConfigurations   
 550     */
 551    putBucketAnalyticsConfiguration(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 552    /**
 553     * Sets the cors configuration for your bucket. If the configuration exists, Amazon S3 replaces it. To use this operation, you must be allowed to perform the s3:PutBucketCORS action. By default, the bucket owner has this permission and can grant it to others. You set this configuration on a bucket so that the bucket can service cross-origin requests. For example, you might want to enable a request whose origin is http://www.example.com to access your Amazon S3 bucket at my.example.bucket.com by using the browser's XMLHttpRequest capability. To enable cross-origin resource sharing (CORS) on a bucket, you add the cors subresource to the bucket. The cors subresource is an XML document in which you configure rules that identify origins and the HTTP methods that can be executed on your bucket. The document is limited to 64 KB in size.  When Amazon S3 receives a cross-origin request (or a pre-flight OPTIONS request) against a bucket, it evaluates the cors configuration on the bucket and uses the first CORSRule rule that matches the incoming browser request to enable a cross-origin request. For a rule to match, the following conditions must be met:   The request's Origin header must match AllowedOrigin elements.   The request method (for example, GET, PUT, HEAD, and so on) or the Access-Control-Request-Method header in case of a pre-flight OPTIONS request must be one of the AllowedMethod elements.    Every header specified in the Access-Control-Request-Headers request header of a pre-flight request must match an AllowedHeader element.     For more information about CORS, go to Enabling Cross-Origin Resource Sharing in the Amazon S3 User Guide.  Related Resources     GetBucketCors     DeleteBucketCors     RESTOPTIONSobject   
 554     */
 555    putBucketCors(params: S3.Types.PutBucketCorsRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 556    /**
 557     * Sets the cors configuration for your bucket. If the configuration exists, Amazon S3 replaces it. To use this operation, you must be allowed to perform the s3:PutBucketCORS action. By default, the bucket owner has this permission and can grant it to others. You set this configuration on a bucket so that the bucket can service cross-origin requests. For example, you might want to enable a request whose origin is http://www.example.com to access your Amazon S3 bucket at my.example.bucket.com by using the browser's XMLHttpRequest capability. To enable cross-origin resource sharing (CORS) on a bucket, you add the cors subresource to the bucket. The cors subresource is an XML document in which you configure rules that identify origins and the HTTP methods that can be executed on your bucket. The document is limited to 64 KB in size.  When Amazon S3 receives a cross-origin request (or a pre-flight OPTIONS request) against a bucket, it evaluates the cors configuration on the bucket and uses the first CORSRule rule that matches the incoming browser request to enable a cross-origin request. For a rule to match, the following conditions must be met:   The request's Origin header must match AllowedOrigin elements.   The request method (for example, GET, PUT, HEAD, and so on) or the Access-Control-Request-Method header in case of a pre-flight OPTIONS request must be one of the AllowedMethod elements.    Every header specified in the Access-Control-Request-Headers request header of a pre-flight request must match an AllowedHeader element.     For more information about CORS, go to Enabling Cross-Origin Resource Sharing in the Amazon S3 User Guide.  Related Resources     GetBucketCors     DeleteBucketCors     RESTOPTIONSobject   
 558     */
 559    putBucketCors(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 560    /**
 561     * This action uses the encryption subresource to configure default encryption and Amazon S3 Bucket Key for an existing bucket. Default encryption for a bucket can use server-side encryption with Amazon S3-managed keys (SSE-S3) or Amazon Web Services KMS customer master keys (SSE-KMS). If you specify default encryption using SSE-KMS, you can also configure Amazon S3 Bucket Key. For information about default encryption, see Amazon S3 default bucket encryption in the Amazon S3 User Guide. For more information about S3 Bucket Keys, see Amazon S3 Bucket Keys in the Amazon S3 User Guide.  This action requires Amazon Web Services Signature Version 4. For more information, see  Authenticating Requests (Amazon Web Services Signature Version 4).   To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:PutEncryptionConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission by default. The bucket owner can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources in the Amazon S3 User Guide.   Related Resources     GetBucketEncryption     DeleteBucketEncryption   
 562     */
 563    putBucketEncryption(params: S3.Types.PutBucketEncryptionRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 564    /**
 565     * This action uses the encryption subresource to configure default encryption and Amazon S3 Bucket Key for an existing bucket. Default encryption for a bucket can use server-side encryption with Amazon S3-managed keys (SSE-S3) or Amazon Web Services KMS customer master keys (SSE-KMS). If you specify default encryption using SSE-KMS, you can also configure Amazon S3 Bucket Key. For information about default encryption, see Amazon S3 default bucket encryption in the Amazon S3 User Guide. For more information about S3 Bucket Keys, see Amazon S3 Bucket Keys in the Amazon S3 User Guide.  This action requires Amazon Web Services Signature Version 4. For more information, see  Authenticating Requests (Amazon Web Services Signature Version 4).   To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:PutEncryptionConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission by default. The bucket owner can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources in the Amazon S3 User Guide.   Related Resources     GetBucketEncryption     DeleteBucketEncryption   
 566     */
 567    putBucketEncryption(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 568    /**
 569     * Puts a S3 Intelligent-Tiering configuration to the specified bucket. You can have up to 1,000 S3 Intelligent-Tiering configurations per bucket. The S3 Intelligent-Tiering storage class is designed to optimize storage costs by automatically moving data to the most cost-effective storage access tier, without additional operational overhead. S3 Intelligent-Tiering delivers automatic cost savings by moving data between access tiers, when access patterns change. The S3 Intelligent-Tiering storage class is suitable for objects larger than 128 KB that you plan to store for at least 30 days. If the size of an object is less than 128 KB, it is not eligible for auto-tiering. Smaller objects can be stored, but they are always charged at the frequent access tier rates in the S3 Intelligent-Tiering storage class.  If you delete an object before the end of the 30-day minimum storage duration period, you are charged for 30 days. For more information, see Storage class for automatically optimizing frequently and infrequently accessed objects. Operations related to PutBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration include:     DeleteBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration     GetBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration     ListBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurations     You only need S3 Intelligent-Tiering enabled on a bucket if you want to automatically move objects stored in the S3 Intelligent-Tiering storage class to the Archive Access or Deep Archive Access tier.   Special Errors     HTTP 400 Bad Request Error     Code: InvalidArgument    Cause: Invalid Argument      HTTP 400 Bad Request Error     Code: TooManyConfigurations    Cause: You are attempting to create a new configuration but have already reached the 1,000-configuration limit.       HTTP 403 Forbidden Error     Code: AccessDenied    Cause: You are not the owner of the specified bucket, or you do not have the s3:PutIntelligentTieringConfiguration bucket permission to set the configuration on the bucket.     
 570     */
 571    putBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration(params: S3.Types.PutBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurationRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 572    /**
 573     * Puts a S3 Intelligent-Tiering configuration to the specified bucket. You can have up to 1,000 S3 Intelligent-Tiering configurations per bucket. The S3 Intelligent-Tiering storage class is designed to optimize storage costs by automatically moving data to the most cost-effective storage access tier, without additional operational overhead. S3 Intelligent-Tiering delivers automatic cost savings by moving data between access tiers, when access patterns change. The S3 Intelligent-Tiering storage class is suitable for objects larger than 128 KB that you plan to store for at least 30 days. If the size of an object is less than 128 KB, it is not eligible for auto-tiering. Smaller objects can be stored, but they are always charged at the frequent access tier rates in the S3 Intelligent-Tiering storage class.  If you delete an object before the end of the 30-day minimum storage duration period, you are charged for 30 days. For more information, see Storage class for automatically optimizing frequently and infrequently accessed objects. Operations related to PutBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration include:     DeleteBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration     GetBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration     ListBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurations     You only need S3 Intelligent-Tiering enabled on a bucket if you want to automatically move objects stored in the S3 Intelligent-Tiering storage class to the Archive Access or Deep Archive Access tier.   Special Errors     HTTP 400 Bad Request Error     Code: InvalidArgument    Cause: Invalid Argument      HTTP 400 Bad Request Error     Code: TooManyConfigurations    Cause: You are attempting to create a new configuration but have already reached the 1,000-configuration limit.       HTTP 403 Forbidden Error     Code: AccessDenied    Cause: You are not the owner of the specified bucket, or you do not have the s3:PutIntelligentTieringConfiguration bucket permission to set the configuration on the bucket.     
 574     */
 575    putBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 576    /**
 577     * This implementation of the PUT action adds an inventory configuration (identified by the inventory ID) to the bucket. You can have up to 1,000 inventory configurations per bucket.  Amazon S3 inventory generates inventories of the objects in the bucket on a daily or weekly basis, and the results are published to a flat file. The bucket that is inventoried is called the source bucket, and the bucket where the inventory flat file is stored is called the destination bucket. The destination bucket must be in the same Amazon Web Services Region as the source bucket.  When you configure an inventory for a source bucket, you specify the destination bucket where you want the inventory to be stored, and whether to generate the inventory daily or weekly. You can also configure what object metadata to include and whether to inventory all object versions or only current versions. For more information, see Amazon S3 Inventory in the Amazon S3 User Guide.  You must create a bucket policy on the destination bucket to grant permissions to Amazon S3 to write objects to the bucket in the defined location. For an example policy, see  Granting Permissions for Amazon S3 Inventory and Storage Class Analysis.  To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:PutInventoryConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission by default and can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources in the Amazon S3 User Guide.  Special Errors     HTTP 400 Bad Request Error     Code: InvalidArgument    Cause: Invalid Argument      HTTP 400 Bad Request Error     Code: TooManyConfigurations    Cause: You are attempting to create a new configuration but have already reached the 1,000-configuration limit.       HTTP 403 Forbidden Error     Code: AccessDenied    Cause: You are not the owner of the specified bucket, or you do not have the s3:PutInventoryConfiguration bucket permission to set the configuration on the bucket.       Related Resources     GetBucketInventoryConfiguration     DeleteBucketInventoryConfiguration     ListBucketInventoryConfigurations   
 578     */
 579    putBucketInventoryConfiguration(params: S3.Types.PutBucketInventoryConfigurationRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 580    /**
 581     * This implementation of the PUT action adds an inventory configuration (identified by the inventory ID) to the bucket. You can have up to 1,000 inventory configurations per bucket.  Amazon S3 inventory generates inventories of the objects in the bucket on a daily or weekly basis, and the results are published to a flat file. The bucket that is inventoried is called the source bucket, and the bucket where the inventory flat file is stored is called the destination bucket. The destination bucket must be in the same Amazon Web Services Region as the source bucket.  When you configure an inventory for a source bucket, you specify the destination bucket where you want the inventory to be stored, and whether to generate the inventory daily or weekly. You can also configure what object metadata to include and whether to inventory all object versions or only current versions. For more information, see Amazon S3 Inventory in the Amazon S3 User Guide.  You must create a bucket policy on the destination bucket to grant permissions to Amazon S3 to write objects to the bucket in the defined location. For an example policy, see  Granting Permissions for Amazon S3 Inventory and Storage Class Analysis.  To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:PutInventoryConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission by default and can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources in the Amazon S3 User Guide.  Special Errors     HTTP 400 Bad Request Error     Code: InvalidArgument    Cause: Invalid Argument      HTTP 400 Bad Request Error     Code: TooManyConfigurations    Cause: You are attempting to create a new configuration but have already reached the 1,000-configuration limit.       HTTP 403 Forbidden Error     Code: AccessDenied    Cause: You are not the owner of the specified bucket, or you do not have the s3:PutInventoryConfiguration bucket permission to set the configuration on the bucket.       Related Resources     GetBucketInventoryConfiguration     DeleteBucketInventoryConfiguration     ListBucketInventoryConfigurations   
 582     */
 583    putBucketInventoryConfiguration(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 584    /**
 585     *  For an updated version of this API, see PutBucketLifecycleConfiguration. This version has been deprecated. Existing lifecycle configurations will work. For new lifecycle configurations, use the updated API.   Creates a new lifecycle configuration for the bucket or replaces an existing lifecycle configuration. For information about lifecycle configuration, see Object Lifecycle Management in the Amazon S3 User Guide.  By default, all Amazon S3 resources, including buckets, objects, and related subresources (for example, lifecycle configuration and website configuration) are private. Only the resource owner, the Amazon Web Services account that created the resource, can access it. The resource owner can optionally grant access permissions to others by writing an access policy. For this operation, users must get the s3:PutLifecycleConfiguration permission. You can also explicitly deny permissions. Explicit denial also supersedes any other permissions. If you want to prevent users or accounts from removing or deleting objects from your bucket, you must deny them permissions for the following actions:     s3:DeleteObject     s3:DeleteObjectVersion     s3:PutLifecycleConfiguration    For more information about permissions, see Managing Access Permissions to your Amazon S3 Resources in the Amazon S3 User Guide. For more examples of transitioning objects to storage classes such as STANDARD_IA or ONEZONE_IA, see Examples of Lifecycle Configuration.  Related Resources     GetBucketLifecycle(Deprecated)    GetBucketLifecycleConfiguration     RestoreObject    By default, a resource owner—in this case, a bucket owner, which is the Amazon Web Services account that created the bucket—can perform any of the operations. A resource owner can also grant others permission to perform the operation. For more information, see the following topics in the Amazon S3 User Guide:     Specifying Permissions in a Policy     Managing Access Permissions to your Amazon S3 Resources     
 586     */
 587    putBucketLifecycle(params: S3.Types.PutBucketLifecycleRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 588    /**
 589     *  For an updated version of this API, see PutBucketLifecycleConfiguration. This version has been deprecated. Existing lifecycle configurations will work. For new lifecycle configurations, use the updated API.   Creates a new lifecycle configuration for the bucket or replaces an existing lifecycle configuration. For information about lifecycle configuration, see Object Lifecycle Management in the Amazon S3 User Guide.  By default, all Amazon S3 resources, including buckets, objects, and related subresources (for example, lifecycle configuration and website configuration) are private. Only the resource owner, the Amazon Web Services account that created the resource, can access it. The resource owner can optionally grant access permissions to others by writing an access policy. For this operation, users must get the s3:PutLifecycleConfiguration permission. You can also explicitly deny permissions. Explicit denial also supersedes any other permissions. If you want to prevent users or accounts from removing or deleting objects from your bucket, you must deny them permissions for the following actions:     s3:DeleteObject     s3:DeleteObjectVersion     s3:PutLifecycleConfiguration    For more information about permissions, see Managing Access Permissions to your Amazon S3 Resources in the Amazon S3 User Guide. For more examples of transitioning objects to storage classes such as STANDARD_IA or ONEZONE_IA, see Examples of Lifecycle Configuration.  Related Resources     GetBucketLifecycle(Deprecated)    GetBucketLifecycleConfiguration     RestoreObject    By default, a resource owner—in this case, a bucket owner, which is the Amazon Web Services account that created the bucket—can perform any of the operations. A resource owner can also grant others permission to perform the operation. For more information, see the following topics in the Amazon S3 User Guide:     Specifying Permissions in a Policy     Managing Access Permissions to your Amazon S3 Resources     
 590     */
 591    putBucketLifecycle(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 592    /**
 593     * Creates a new lifecycle configuration for the bucket or replaces an existing lifecycle configuration. For information about lifecycle configuration, see Managing your storage lifecycle.  Bucket lifecycle configuration now supports specifying a lifecycle rule using an object key name prefix, one or more object tags, or a combination of both. Accordingly, this section describes the latest API. The previous version of the API supported filtering based only on an object key name prefix, which is supported for backward compatibility. For the related API description, see PutBucketLifecycle.   Rules  You specify the lifecycle configuration in your request body. The lifecycle configuration is specified as XML consisting of one or more rules. Each rule consists of the following:   Filter identifying a subset of objects to which the rule applies. The filter can be based on a key name prefix, object tags, or a combination of both.   Status whether the rule is in effect.   One or more lifecycle transition and expiration actions that you want Amazon S3 to perform on the objects identified by the filter. If the state of your bucket is versioning-enabled or versioning-suspended, you can have many versions of the same object (one current version and zero or more noncurrent versions). Amazon S3 provides predefined actions that you can specify for current and noncurrent object versions.   For more information, see Object Lifecycle Management and Lifecycle Configuration Elements.  Permissions  By default, all Amazon S3 resources are private, including buckets, objects, and related subresources (for example, lifecycle configuration and website configuration). Only the resource owner (that is, the Amazon Web Services account that created it) can access the resource. The resource owner can optionally grant access permissions to others by writing an access policy. For this operation, a user must get the s3:PutLifecycleConfiguration permission. You can also explicitly deny permissions. Explicit deny also supersedes any other permissions. If you want to block users or accounts from removing or deleting objects from your bucket, you must deny them permissions for the following actions:   s3:DeleteObject   s3:DeleteObjectVersion   s3:PutLifecycleConfiguration   For more information about permissions, see Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources. The following are related to PutBucketLifecycleConfiguration:    Examples of Lifecycle Configuration     GetBucketLifecycleConfiguration     DeleteBucketLifecycle   
 594     */
 595    putBucketLifecycleConfiguration(params: S3.Types.PutBucketLifecycleConfigurationRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 596    /**
 597     * Creates a new lifecycle configuration for the bucket or replaces an existing lifecycle configuration. For information about lifecycle configuration, see Managing your storage lifecycle.  Bucket lifecycle configuration now supports specifying a lifecycle rule using an object key name prefix, one or more object tags, or a combination of both. Accordingly, this section describes the latest API. The previous version of the API supported filtering based only on an object key name prefix, which is supported for backward compatibility. For the related API description, see PutBucketLifecycle.   Rules  You specify the lifecycle configuration in your request body. The lifecycle configuration is specified as XML consisting of one or more rules. Each rule consists of the following:   Filter identifying a subset of objects to which the rule applies. The filter can be based on a key name prefix, object tags, or a combination of both.   Status whether the rule is in effect.   One or more lifecycle transition and expiration actions that you want Amazon S3 to perform on the objects identified by the filter. If the state of your bucket is versioning-enabled or versioning-suspended, you can have many versions of the same object (one current version and zero or more noncurrent versions). Amazon S3 provides predefined actions that you can specify for current and noncurrent object versions.   For more information, see Object Lifecycle Management and Lifecycle Configuration Elements.  Permissions  By default, all Amazon S3 resources are private, including buckets, objects, and related subresources (for example, lifecycle configuration and website configuration). Only the resource owner (that is, the Amazon Web Services account that created it) can access the resource. The resource owner can optionally grant access permissions to others by writing an access policy. For this operation, a user must get the s3:PutLifecycleConfiguration permission. You can also explicitly deny permissions. Explicit deny also supersedes any other permissions. If you want to block users or accounts from removing or deleting objects from your bucket, you must deny them permissions for the following actions:   s3:DeleteObject   s3:DeleteObjectVersion   s3:PutLifecycleConfiguration   For more information about permissions, see Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources. The following are related to PutBucketLifecycleConfiguration:    Examples of Lifecycle Configuration     GetBucketLifecycleConfiguration     DeleteBucketLifecycle   
 598     */
 599    putBucketLifecycleConfiguration(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 600    /**
 601     * Set the logging parameters for a bucket and to specify permissions for who can view and modify the logging parameters. All logs are saved to buckets in the same Amazon Web Services Region as the source bucket. To set the logging status of a bucket, you must be the bucket owner. The bucket owner is automatically granted FULL_CONTROL to all logs. You use the Grantee request element to grant access to other people. The Permissions request element specifies the kind of access the grantee has to the logs.  Grantee Values  You can specify the person (grantee) to whom you're assigning access rights (using request elements) in the following ways:   By the person's ID:  &lt;Grantee xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance" xsi:type="CanonicalUser"&gt;&lt;ID&gt;&lt;&gt;ID&lt;&gt;&lt;/ID&gt;&lt;DisplayName&gt;&lt;&gt;GranteesEmail&lt;&gt;&lt;/DisplayName&gt; &lt;/Grantee&gt;  DisplayName is optional and ignored in the request.   By Email address:   &lt;Grantee xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance" xsi:type="AmazonCustomerByEmail"&gt;&lt;EmailAddress&gt;&lt;&gt;Grantees@email.com&lt;&gt;&lt;/EmailAddress&gt;&lt;/Grantee&gt;  The grantee is resolved to the CanonicalUser and, in a response to a GET Object acl request, appears as the CanonicalUser.   By URI:  &lt;Grantee xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance" xsi:type="Group"&gt;&lt;URI&gt;&lt;&gt;http://acs.amazonaws.com/groups/global/AuthenticatedUsers&lt;&gt;&lt;/URI&gt;&lt;/Grantee&gt;    To enable logging, you use LoggingEnabled and its children request elements. To disable logging, you use an empty BucketLoggingStatus request element:  &lt;BucketLoggingStatus xmlns="http://doc.s3.amazonaws.com/2006-03-01" /&gt;  For more information about server access logging, see Server Access Logging.  For more information about creating a bucket, see CreateBucket. For more information about returning the logging status of a bucket, see GetBucketLogging. The following operations are related to PutBucketLogging:    PutObject     DeleteBucket     CreateBucket     GetBucketLogging   
 602     */
 603    putBucketLogging(params: S3.Types.PutBucketLoggingRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 604    /**
 605     * Set the logging parameters for a bucket and to specify permissions for who can view and modify the logging parameters. All logs are saved to buckets in the same Amazon Web Services Region as the source bucket. To set the logging status of a bucket, you must be the bucket owner. The bucket owner is automatically granted FULL_CONTROL to all logs. You use the Grantee request element to grant access to other people. The Permissions request element specifies the kind of access the grantee has to the logs.  Grantee Values  You can specify the person (grantee) to whom you're assigning access rights (using request elements) in the following ways:   By the person's ID:  &lt;Grantee xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance" xsi:type="CanonicalUser"&gt;&lt;ID&gt;&lt;&gt;ID&lt;&gt;&lt;/ID&gt;&lt;DisplayName&gt;&lt;&gt;GranteesEmail&lt;&gt;&lt;/DisplayName&gt; &lt;/Grantee&gt;  DisplayName is optional and ignored in the request.   By Email address:   &lt;Grantee xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance" xsi:type="AmazonCustomerByEmail"&gt;&lt;EmailAddress&gt;&lt;&gt;Grantees@email.com&lt;&gt;&lt;/EmailAddress&gt;&lt;/Grantee&gt;  The grantee is resolved to the CanonicalUser and, in a response to a GET Object acl request, appears as the CanonicalUser.   By URI:  &lt;Grantee xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance" xsi:type="Group"&gt;&lt;URI&gt;&lt;&gt;http://acs.amazonaws.com/groups/global/AuthenticatedUsers&lt;&gt;&lt;/URI&gt;&lt;/Grantee&gt;    To enable logging, you use LoggingEnabled and its children request elements. To disable logging, you use an empty BucketLoggingStatus request element:  &lt;BucketLoggingStatus xmlns="http://doc.s3.amazonaws.com/2006-03-01" /&gt;  For more information about server access logging, see Server Access Logging.  For more information about creating a bucket, see CreateBucket. For more information about returning the logging status of a bucket, see GetBucketLogging. The following operations are related to PutBucketLogging:    PutObject     DeleteBucket     CreateBucket     GetBucketLogging   
 606     */
 607    putBucketLogging(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 608    /**
 609     * Sets a metrics configuration (specified by the metrics configuration ID) for the bucket. You can have up to 1,000 metrics configurations per bucket. If you're updating an existing metrics configuration, note that this is a full replacement of the existing metrics configuration. If you don't include the elements you want to keep, they are erased. To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:PutMetricsConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission by default. The bucket owner can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources. For information about CloudWatch request metrics for Amazon S3, see Monitoring Metrics with Amazon CloudWatch. The following operations are related to PutBucketMetricsConfiguration:    DeleteBucketMetricsConfiguration     PutBucketMetricsConfiguration     ListBucketMetricsConfigurations     GetBucketLifecycle has the following special error:   Error code: TooManyConfigurations    Description: You are attempting to create a new configuration but have already reached the 1,000-configuration limit.   HTTP Status Code: HTTP 400 Bad Request    
 610     */
 611    putBucketMetricsConfiguration(params: S3.Types.PutBucketMetricsConfigurationRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 612    /**
 613     * Sets a metrics configuration (specified by the metrics configuration ID) for the bucket. You can have up to 1,000 metrics configurations per bucket. If you're updating an existing metrics configuration, note that this is a full replacement of the existing metrics configuration. If you don't include the elements you want to keep, they are erased. To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:PutMetricsConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission by default. The bucket owner can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources. For information about CloudWatch request metrics for Amazon S3, see Monitoring Metrics with Amazon CloudWatch. The following operations are related to PutBucketMetricsConfiguration:    DeleteBucketMetricsConfiguration     PutBucketMetricsConfiguration     ListBucketMetricsConfigurations     GetBucketLifecycle has the following special error:   Error code: TooManyConfigurations    Description: You are attempting to create a new configuration but have already reached the 1,000-configuration limit.   HTTP Status Code: HTTP 400 Bad Request    
 614     */
 615    putBucketMetricsConfiguration(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 616    /**
 617     *  No longer used, see the PutBucketNotificationConfiguration operation.
 618     */
 619    putBucketNotification(params: S3.Types.PutBucketNotificationRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 620    /**
 621     *  No longer used, see the PutBucketNotificationConfiguration operation.
 622     */
 623    putBucketNotification(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 624    /**
 625     * Enables notifications of specified events for a bucket. For more information about event notifications, see Configuring Event Notifications. Using this API, you can replace an existing notification configuration. The configuration is an XML file that defines the event types that you want Amazon S3 to publish and the destination where you want Amazon S3 to publish an event notification when it detects an event of the specified type. By default, your bucket has no event notifications configured. That is, the notification configuration will be an empty NotificationConfiguration.  &lt;NotificationConfiguration&gt;   &lt;/NotificationConfiguration&gt;  This action replaces the existing notification configuration with the configuration you include in the request body. After Amazon S3 receives this request, it first verifies that any Amazon Simple Notification Service (Amazon SNS) or Amazon Simple Queue Service (Amazon SQS) destination exists, and that the bucket owner has permission to publish to it by sending a test notification. In the case of Lambda destinations, Amazon S3 verifies that the Lambda function permissions grant Amazon S3 permission to invoke the function from the Amazon S3 bucket. For more information, see Configuring Notifications for Amazon S3 Events. You can disable notifications by adding the empty NotificationConfiguration element. By default, only the bucket owner can configure notifications on a bucket. However, bucket owners can use a bucket policy to grant permission to other users to set this configuration with s3:PutBucketNotification permission.  The PUT notification is an atomic operation. For example, suppose your notification configuration includes SNS topic, SQS queue, and Lambda function configurations. When you send a PUT request with this configuration, Amazon S3 sends test messages to your SNS topic. If the message fails, the entire PUT action will fail, and Amazon S3 will not add the configuration to your bucket.   Responses  If the configuration in the request body includes only one TopicConfiguration specifying only the s3:ReducedRedundancyLostObject event type, the response will also include the x-amz-sns-test-message-id header containing the message ID of the test notification sent to the topic. The following action is related to PutBucketNotificationConfiguration:    GetBucketNotificationConfiguration   
 626     */
 627    putBucketNotificationConfiguration(params: S3.Types.PutBucketNotificationConfigurationRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 628    /**
 629     * Enables notifications of specified events for a bucket. For more information about event notifications, see Configuring Event Notifications. Using this API, you can replace an existing notification configuration. The configuration is an XML file that defines the event types that you want Amazon S3 to publish and the destination where you want Amazon S3 to publish an event notification when it detects an event of the specified type. By default, your bucket has no event notifications configured. That is, the notification configuration will be an empty NotificationConfiguration.  &lt;NotificationConfiguration&gt;   &lt;/NotificationConfiguration&gt;  This action replaces the existing notification configuration with the configuration you include in the request body. After Amazon S3 receives this request, it first verifies that any Amazon Simple Notification Service (Amazon SNS) or Amazon Simple Queue Service (Amazon SQS) destination exists, and that the bucket owner has permission to publish to it by sending a test notification. In the case of Lambda destinations, Amazon S3 verifies that the Lambda function permissions grant Amazon S3 permission to invoke the function from the Amazon S3 bucket. For more information, see Configuring Notifications for Amazon S3 Events. You can disable notifications by adding the empty NotificationConfiguration element. By default, only the bucket owner can configure notifications on a bucket. However, bucket owners can use a bucket policy to grant permission to other users to set this configuration with s3:PutBucketNotification permission.  The PUT notification is an atomic operation. For example, suppose your notification configuration includes SNS topic, SQS queue, and Lambda function configurations. When you send a PUT request with this configuration, Amazon S3 sends test messages to your SNS topic. If the message fails, the entire PUT action will fail, and Amazon S3 will not add the configuration to your bucket.   Responses  If the configuration in the request body includes only one TopicConfiguration specifying only the s3:ReducedRedundancyLostObject event type, the response will also include the x-amz-sns-test-message-id header containing the message ID of the test notification sent to the topic. The following action is related to PutBucketNotificationConfiguration:    GetBucketNotificationConfiguration   
 630     */
 631    putBucketNotificationConfiguration(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 632    /**
 633     * Creates or modifies OwnershipControls for an Amazon S3 bucket. To use this operation, you must have the s3:PutBucketOwnershipControls permission. For more information about Amazon S3 permissions, see Specifying Permissions in a Policy.  For information about Amazon S3 Object Ownership, see Using Object Ownership.  The following operations are related to PutBucketOwnershipControls:    GetBucketOwnershipControls     DeleteBucketOwnershipControls   
 634     */
 635    putBucketOwnershipControls(params: S3.Types.PutBucketOwnershipControlsRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 636    /**
 637     * Creates or modifies OwnershipControls for an Amazon S3 bucket. To use this operation, you must have the s3:PutBucketOwnershipControls permission. For more information about Amazon S3 permissions, see Specifying Permissions in a Policy.  For information about Amazon S3 Object Ownership, see Using Object Ownership.  The following operations are related to PutBucketOwnershipControls:    GetBucketOwnershipControls     DeleteBucketOwnershipControls   
 638     */
 639    putBucketOwnershipControls(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 640    /**
 641     * Applies an Amazon S3 bucket policy to an Amazon S3 bucket. If you are using an identity other than the root user of the Amazon Web Services account that owns the bucket, the calling identity must have the PutBucketPolicy permissions on the specified bucket and belong to the bucket owner's account in order to use this operation. If you don't have PutBucketPolicy permissions, Amazon S3 returns a 403 Access Denied error. If you have the correct permissions, but you're not using an identity that belongs to the bucket owner's account, Amazon S3 returns a 405 Method Not Allowed error.   As a security precaution, the root user of the Amazon Web Services account that owns a bucket can always use this operation, even if the policy explicitly denies the root user the ability to perform this action.   For more information, see Bucket policy examples. The following operations are related to PutBucketPolicy:    CreateBucket     DeleteBucket   
 642     */
 643    putBucketPolicy(params: S3.Types.PutBucketPolicyRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 644    /**
 645     * Applies an Amazon S3 bucket policy to an Amazon S3 bucket. If you are using an identity other than the root user of the Amazon Web Services account that owns the bucket, the calling identity must have the PutBucketPolicy permissions on the specified bucket and belong to the bucket owner's account in order to use this operation. If you don't have PutBucketPolicy permissions, Amazon S3 returns a 403 Access Denied error. If you have the correct permissions, but you're not using an identity that belongs to the bucket owner's account, Amazon S3 returns a 405 Method Not Allowed error.   As a security precaution, the root user of the Amazon Web Services account that owns a bucket can always use this operation, even if the policy explicitly denies the root user the ability to perform this action.   For more information, see Bucket policy examples. The following operations are related to PutBucketPolicy:    CreateBucket     DeleteBucket   
 646     */
 647    putBucketPolicy(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 648    /**
 649     *  Creates a replication configuration or replaces an existing one. For more information, see Replication in the Amazon S3 User Guide.  Specify the replication configuration in the request body. In the replication configuration, you provide the name of the destination bucket or buckets where you want Amazon S3 to replicate objects, the IAM role that Amazon S3 can assume to replicate objects on your behalf, and other relevant information. A replication configuration must include at least one rule, and can contain a maximum of 1,000. Each rule identifies a subset of objects to replicate by filtering the objects in the source bucket. To choose additional subsets of objects to replicate, add a rule for each subset. To specify a subset of the objects in the source bucket to apply a replication rule to, add the Filter element as a child of the Rule element. You can filter objects based on an object key prefix, one or more object tags, or both. When you add the Filter element in the configuration, you must also add the following elements: DeleteMarkerReplication, Status, and Priority.  If you are using an earlier version of the replication configuration, Amazon S3 handles replication of delete markers differently. For more information, see Backward Compatibility.  For information about enabling versioning on a bucket, see Using Versioning.  Handling Replication of Encrypted Objects  By default, Amazon S3 doesn't replicate objects that are stored at rest using server-side encryption with CMKs stored in Amazon Web Services KMS. To replicate Amazon Web Services KMS-encrypted objects, add the following: SourceSelectionCriteria, SseKmsEncryptedObjects, Status, EncryptionConfiguration, and ReplicaKmsKeyID. For information about replication configuration, see Replicating Objects Created with SSE Using CMKs stored in Amazon Web Services KMS. For information on PutBucketReplication errors, see List of replication-related error codes   Permissions  To create a PutBucketReplication request, you must have s3:PutReplicationConfiguration permissions for the bucket.  By default, a resource owner, in this case the Amazon Web Services account that created the bucket, can perform this operation. The resource owner can also grant others permissions to perform the operation. For more information about permissions, see Specifying Permissions in a Policy and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources.  To perform this operation, the user or role performing the action must have the iam:PassRole permission.  The following operations are related to PutBucketReplication:    GetBucketReplication     DeleteBucketReplication   
 650     */
 651    putBucketReplication(params: S3.Types.PutBucketReplicationRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 652    /**
 653     *  Creates a replication configuration or replaces an existing one. For more information, see Replication in the Amazon S3 User Guide.  Specify the replication configuration in the request body. In the replication configuration, you provide the name of the destination bucket or buckets where you want Amazon S3 to replicate objects, the IAM role that Amazon S3 can assume to replicate objects on your behalf, and other relevant information. A replication configuration must include at least one rule, and can contain a maximum of 1,000. Each rule identifies a subset of objects to replicate by filtering the objects in the source bucket. To choose additional subsets of objects to replicate, add a rule for each subset. To specify a subset of the objects in the source bucket to apply a replication rule to, add the Filter element as a child of the Rule element. You can filter objects based on an object key prefix, one or more object tags, or both. When you add the Filter element in the configuration, you must also add the following elements: DeleteMarkerReplication, Status, and Priority.  If you are using an earlier version of the replication configuration, Amazon S3 handles replication of delete markers differently. For more information, see Backward Compatibility.  For information about enabling versioning on a bucket, see Using Versioning.  Handling Replication of Encrypted Objects  By default, Amazon S3 doesn't replicate objects that are stored at rest using server-side encryption with CMKs stored in Amazon Web Services KMS. To replicate Amazon Web Services KMS-encrypted objects, add the following: SourceSelectionCriteria, SseKmsEncryptedObjects, Status, EncryptionConfiguration, and ReplicaKmsKeyID. For information about replication configuration, see Replicating Objects Created with SSE Using CMKs stored in Amazon Web Services KMS. For information on PutBucketReplication errors, see List of replication-related error codes   Permissions  To create a PutBucketReplication request, you must have s3:PutReplicationConfiguration permissions for the bucket.  By default, a resource owner, in this case the Amazon Web Services account that created the bucket, can perform this operation. The resource owner can also grant others permissions to perform the operation. For more information about permissions, see Specifying Permissions in a Policy and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources.  To perform this operation, the user or role performing the action must have the iam:PassRole permission.  The following operations are related to PutBucketReplication:    GetBucketReplication     DeleteBucketReplication   
 654     */
 655    putBucketReplication(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 656    /**
 657     * Sets the request payment configuration for a bucket. By default, the bucket owner pays for downloads from the bucket. This configuration parameter enables the bucket owner (only) to specify that the person requesting the download will be charged for the download. For more information, see Requester Pays Buckets. The following operations are related to PutBucketRequestPayment:    CreateBucket     GetBucketRequestPayment   
 658     */
 659    putBucketRequestPayment(params: S3.Types.PutBucketRequestPaymentRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 660    /**
 661     * Sets the request payment configuration for a bucket. By default, the bucket owner pays for downloads from the bucket. This configuration parameter enables the bucket owner (only) to specify that the person requesting the download will be charged for the download. For more information, see Requester Pays Buckets. The following operations are related to PutBucketRequestPayment:    CreateBucket     GetBucketRequestPayment   
 662     */
 663    putBucketRequestPayment(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 664    /**
 665     * Sets the tags for a bucket. Use tags to organize your Amazon Web Services bill to reflect your own cost structure. To do this, sign up to get your Amazon Web Services account bill with tag key values included. Then, to see the cost of combined resources, organize your billing information according to resources with the same tag key values. For example, you can tag several resources with a specific application name, and then organize your billing information to see the total cost of that application across several services. For more information, see Cost Allocation and Tagging and Using Cost Allocation in Amazon S3 Bucket Tags.   When this operation sets the tags for a bucket, it will overwrite any current tags the bucket already has. You cannot use this operation to add tags to an existing list of tags.  To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:PutBucketTagging action. The bucket owner has this permission by default and can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources.  PutBucketTagging has the following special errors:   Error code: InvalidTagError    Description: The tag provided was not a valid tag. This error can occur if the tag did not pass input validation. For information about tag restrictions, see User-Defined Tag Restrictions and Amazon Web Services-Generated Cost Allocation Tag Restrictions.     Error code: MalformedXMLError    Description: The XML provided does not match the schema.     Error code: OperationAbortedError     Description: A conflicting conditional action is currently in progress against this resource. Please try again.     Error code: InternalError    Description: The service was unable to apply the provided tag to the bucket.     The following operations are related to PutBucketTagging:    GetBucketTagging     DeleteBucketTagging   
 666     */
 667    putBucketTagging(params: S3.Types.PutBucketTaggingRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 668    /**
 669     * Sets the tags for a bucket. Use tags to organize your Amazon Web Services bill to reflect your own cost structure. To do this, sign up to get your Amazon Web Services account bill with tag key values included. Then, to see the cost of combined resources, organize your billing information according to resources with the same tag key values. For example, you can tag several resources with a specific application name, and then organize your billing information to see the total cost of that application across several services. For more information, see Cost Allocation and Tagging and Using Cost Allocation in Amazon S3 Bucket Tags.   When this operation sets the tags for a bucket, it will overwrite any current tags the bucket already has. You cannot use this operation to add tags to an existing list of tags.  To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:PutBucketTagging action. The bucket owner has this permission by default and can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources.  PutBucketTagging has the following special errors:   Error code: InvalidTagError    Description: The tag provided was not a valid tag. This error can occur if the tag did not pass input validation. For information about tag restrictions, see User-Defined Tag Restrictions and Amazon Web Services-Generated Cost Allocation Tag Restrictions.     Error code: MalformedXMLError    Description: The XML provided does not match the schema.     Error code: OperationAbortedError     Description: A conflicting conditional action is currently in progress against this resource. Please try again.     Error code: InternalError    Description: The service was unable to apply the provided tag to the bucket.     The following operations are related to PutBucketTagging:    GetBucketTagging     DeleteBucketTagging   
 670     */
 671    putBucketTagging(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 672    /**
 673     * Sets the versioning state of an existing bucket. To set the versioning state, you must be the bucket owner. You can set the versioning state with one of the following values:  Enabled—Enables versioning for the objects in the bucket. All objects added to the bucket receive a unique version ID.  Suspended—Disables versioning for the objects in the bucket. All objects added to the bucket receive the version ID null. If the versioning state has never been set on a bucket, it has no versioning state; a GetBucketVersioning request does not return a versioning state value. If the bucket owner enables MFA Delete in the bucket versioning configuration, the bucket owner must include the x-amz-mfa request header and the Status and the MfaDelete request elements in a request to set the versioning state of the bucket.  If you have an object expiration lifecycle policy in your non-versioned bucket and you want to maintain the same permanent delete behavior when you enable versioning, you must add a noncurrent expiration policy. The noncurrent expiration lifecycle policy will manage the deletes of the noncurrent object versions in the version-enabled bucket. (A version-enabled bucket maintains one current and zero or more noncurrent object versions.) For more information, see Lifecycle and Versioning.   Related Resources     CreateBucket     DeleteBucket     GetBucketVersioning   
 674     */
 675    putBucketVersioning(params: S3.Types.PutBucketVersioningRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 676    /**
 677     * Sets the versioning state of an existing bucket. To set the versioning state, you must be the bucket owner. You can set the versioning state with one of the following values:  Enabled—Enables versioning for the objects in the bucket. All objects added to the bucket receive a unique version ID.  Suspended—Disables versioning for the objects in the bucket. All objects added to the bucket receive the version ID null. If the versioning state has never been set on a bucket, it has no versioning state; a GetBucketVersioning request does not return a versioning state value. If the bucket owner enables MFA Delete in the bucket versioning configuration, the bucket owner must include the x-amz-mfa request header and the Status and the MfaDelete request elements in a request to set the versioning state of the bucket.  If you have an object expiration lifecycle policy in your non-versioned bucket and you want to maintain the same permanent delete behavior when you enable versioning, you must add a noncurrent expiration policy. The noncurrent expiration lifecycle policy will manage the deletes of the noncurrent object versions in the version-enabled bucket. (A version-enabled bucket maintains one current and zero or more noncurrent object versions.) For more information, see Lifecycle and Versioning.   Related Resources     CreateBucket     DeleteBucket     GetBucketVersioning   
 678     */
 679    putBucketVersioning(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 680    /**
 681     * Sets the configuration of the website that is specified in the website subresource. To configure a bucket as a website, you can add this subresource on the bucket with website configuration information such as the file name of the index document and any redirect rules. For more information, see Hosting Websites on Amazon S3. This PUT action requires the S3:PutBucketWebsite permission. By default, only the bucket owner can configure the website attached to a bucket; however, bucket owners can allow other users to set the website configuration by writing a bucket policy that grants them the S3:PutBucketWebsite permission. To redirect all website requests sent to the bucket's website endpoint, you add a website configuration with the following elements. Because all requests are sent to another website, you don't need to provide index document name for the bucket.    WebsiteConfiguration     RedirectAllRequestsTo     HostName     Protocol    If you want granular control over redirects, you can use the following elements to add routing rules that describe conditions for redirecting requests and information about the redirect destination. In this case, the website configuration must provide an index document for the bucket, because some requests might not be redirected.     WebsiteConfiguration     IndexDocument     Suffix     ErrorDocument     Key     RoutingRules     RoutingRule     Condition     HttpErrorCodeReturnedEquals     KeyPrefixEquals     Redirect     Protocol     HostName     ReplaceKeyPrefixWith     ReplaceKeyWith     HttpRedirectCode    Amazon S3 has a limitation of 50 routing rules per website configuration. If you require more than 50 routing rules, you can use object redirect. For more information, see Configuring an Object Redirect in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
 682     */
 683    putBucketWebsite(params: S3.Types.PutBucketWebsiteRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 684    /**
 685     * Sets the configuration of the website that is specified in the website subresource. To configure a bucket as a website, you can add this subresource on the bucket with website configuration information such as the file name of the index document and any redirect rules. For more information, see Hosting Websites on Amazon S3. This PUT action requires the S3:PutBucketWebsite permission. By default, only the bucket owner can configure the website attached to a bucket; however, bucket owners can allow other users to set the website configuration by writing a bucket policy that grants them the S3:PutBucketWebsite permission. To redirect all website requests sent to the bucket's website endpoint, you add a website configuration with the following elements. Because all requests are sent to another website, you don't need to provide index document name for the bucket.    WebsiteConfiguration     RedirectAllRequestsTo     HostName     Protocol    If you want granular control over redirects, you can use the following elements to add routing rules that describe conditions for redirecting requests and information about the redirect destination. In this case, the website configuration must provide an index document for the bucket, because some requests might not be redirected.     WebsiteConfiguration     IndexDocument     Suffix     ErrorDocument     Key     RoutingRules     RoutingRule     Condition     HttpErrorCodeReturnedEquals     KeyPrefixEquals     Redirect     Protocol     HostName     ReplaceKeyPrefixWith     ReplaceKeyWith     HttpRedirectCode    Amazon S3 has a limitation of 50 routing rules per website configuration. If you require more than 50 routing rules, you can use object redirect. For more information, see Configuring an Object Redirect in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
 686     */
 687    putBucketWebsite(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 688    /**
 689     * Adds an object to a bucket. You must have WRITE permissions on a bucket to add an object to it. Amazon S3 never adds partial objects; if you receive a success response, Amazon S3 added the entire object to the bucket. Amazon S3 is a distributed system. If it receives multiple write requests for the same object simultaneously, it overwrites all but the last object written. Amazon S3 does not provide object locking; if you need this, make sure to build it into your application layer or use versioning instead. To ensure that data is not corrupted traversing the network, use the Content-MD5 header. When you use this header, Amazon S3 checks the object against the provided MD5 value and, if they do not match, returns an error. Additionally, you can calculate the MD5 while putting an object to Amazon S3 and compare the returned ETag to the calculated MD5 value.    To successfully complete the PutObject request, you must have the s3:PutObject in your IAM permissions.   To successfully change the objects acl of your PutObject request, you must have the s3:PutObjectAcl in your IAM permissions.    The Content-MD5 header is required for any request to upload an object with a retention period configured using Amazon S3 Object Lock. For more information about Amazon S3 Object Lock, see Amazon S3 Object Lock Overview in the Amazon S3 User Guide.      Server-side Encryption  You can optionally request server-side encryption. With server-side encryption, Amazon S3 encrypts your data as it writes it to disks in its data centers and decrypts the data when you access it. You have the option to provide your own encryption key or use Amazon Web Services managed encryption keys (SSE-S3 or SSE-KMS). For more information, see Using Server-Side Encryption. If you request server-side encryption using Amazon Web Services Key Management Service (SSE-KMS), you can enable an S3 Bucket Key at the object-level. For more information, see Amazon S3 Bucket Keys in the Amazon S3 User Guide.  Access Control List (ACL)-Specific Request Headers  You can use headers to grant ACL- based permissions. By default, all objects are private. Only the owner has full access control. When adding a new object, you can grant permissions to individual Amazon Web Services accounts or to predefined groups defined by Amazon S3. These permissions are then added to the ACL on the object. For more information, see Access Control List (ACL) Overview and Managing ACLs Using the REST API.   Storage Class Options  By default, Amazon S3 uses the STANDARD Storage Class to store newly created objects. The STANDARD storage class provides high durability and high availability. Depending on performance needs, you can specify a different Storage Class. Amazon S3 on Outposts only uses the OUTPOSTS Storage Class. For more information, see Storage Classes in the Amazon S3 User Guide.  Versioning  If you enable versioning for a bucket, Amazon S3 automatically generates a unique version ID for the object being stored. Amazon S3 returns this ID in the response. When you enable versioning for a bucket, if Amazon S3 receives multiple write requests for the same object simultaneously, it stores all of the objects. For more information about versioning, see Adding Objects to Versioning Enabled Buckets. For information about returning the versioning state of a bucket, see GetBucketVersioning.   Related Resources     CopyObject     DeleteObject   
 690     */
 691    putObject(params: S3.Types.PutObjectRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.PutObjectOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.PutObjectOutput, AWSError>;
 692    /**
 693     * Adds an object to a bucket. You must have WRITE permissions on a bucket to add an object to it. Amazon S3 never adds partial objects; if you receive a success response, Amazon S3 added the entire object to the bucket. Amazon S3 is a distributed system. If it receives multiple write requests for the same object simultaneously, it overwrites all but the last object written. Amazon S3 does not provide object locking; if you need this, make sure to build it into your application layer or use versioning instead. To ensure that data is not corrupted traversing the network, use the Content-MD5 header. When you use this header, Amazon S3 checks the object against the provided MD5 value and, if they do not match, returns an error. Additionally, you can calculate the MD5 while putting an object to Amazon S3 and compare the returned ETag to the calculated MD5 value.    To successfully complete the PutObject request, you must have the s3:PutObject in your IAM permissions.   To successfully change the objects acl of your PutObject request, you must have the s3:PutObjectAcl in your IAM permissions.    The Content-MD5 header is required for any request to upload an object with a retention period configured using Amazon S3 Object Lock. For more information about Amazon S3 Object Lock, see Amazon S3 Object Lock Overview in the Amazon S3 User Guide.      Server-side Encryption  You can optionally request server-side encryption. With server-side encryption, Amazon S3 encrypts your data as it writes it to disks in its data centers and decrypts the data when you access it. You have the option to provide your own encryption key or use Amazon Web Services managed encryption keys (SSE-S3 or SSE-KMS). For more information, see Using Server-Side Encryption. If you request server-side encryption using Amazon Web Services Key Management Service (SSE-KMS), you can enable an S3 Bucket Key at the object-level. For more information, see Amazon S3 Bucket Keys in the Amazon S3 User Guide.  Access Control List (ACL)-Specific Request Headers  You can use headers to grant ACL- based permissions. By default, all objects are private. Only the owner has full access control. When adding a new object, you can grant permissions to individual Amazon Web Services accounts or to predefined groups defined by Amazon S3. These permissions are then added to the ACL on the object. For more information, see Access Control List (ACL) Overview and Managing ACLs Using the REST API.   Storage Class Options  By default, Amazon S3 uses the STANDARD Storage Class to store newly created objects. The STANDARD storage class provides high durability and high availability. Depending on performance needs, you can specify a different Storage Class. Amazon S3 on Outposts only uses the OUTPOSTS Storage Class. For more information, see Storage Classes in the Amazon S3 User Guide.  Versioning  If you enable versioning for a bucket, Amazon S3 automatically generates a unique version ID for the object being stored. Amazon S3 returns this ID in the response. When you enable versioning for a bucket, if Amazon S3 receives multiple write requests for the same object simultaneously, it stores all of the objects. For more information about versioning, see Adding Objects to Versioning Enabled Buckets. For information about returning the versioning state of a bucket, see GetBucketVersioning.   Related Resources     CopyObject     DeleteObject   
 694     */
 695    putObject(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.PutObjectOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.PutObjectOutput, AWSError>;
 696    /**
 697     * Uses the acl subresource to set the access control list (ACL) permissions for a new or existing object in an S3 bucket. You must have WRITE_ACP permission to set the ACL of an object. For more information, see What permissions can I grant? in the Amazon S3 User Guide. This action is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts. Depending on your application needs, you can choose to set the ACL on an object using either the request body or the headers. For example, if you have an existing application that updates a bucket ACL using the request body, you can continue to use that approach. For more information, see Access Control List (ACL) Overview in the Amazon S3 User Guide.  Access Permissions  You can set access permissions using one of the following methods:   Specify a canned ACL with the x-amz-acl request header. Amazon S3 supports a set of predefined ACLs, known as canned ACLs. Each canned ACL has a predefined set of grantees and permissions. Specify the canned ACL name as the value of x-amz-acl. If you use this header, you cannot use other access control-specific headers in your request. For more information, see Canned ACL.   Specify access permissions explicitly with the x-amz-grant-read, x-amz-grant-read-acp, x-amz-grant-write-acp, and x-amz-grant-full-control headers. When using these headers, you specify explicit access permissions and grantees (Amazon Web Services accounts or Amazon S3 groups) who will receive the permission. If you use these ACL-specific headers, you cannot use x-amz-acl header to set a canned ACL. These parameters map to the set of permissions that Amazon S3 supports in an ACL. For more information, see Access Control List (ACL) Overview. You specify each grantee as a type=value pair, where the type is one of the following:    id – if the value specified is the canonical user ID of an Amazon Web Services account    uri – if you are granting permissions to a predefined group    emailAddress – if the value specified is the email address of an Amazon Web Services account  Using email addresses to specify a grantee is only supported in the following Amazon Web Services Regions:    US East (N. Virginia)   US West (N. California)    US West (Oregon)    Asia Pacific (Singapore)   Asia Pacific (Sydney)   Asia Pacific (Tokyo)   Europe (Ireland)   South America (São Paulo)   For a list of all the Amazon S3 supported Regions and endpoints, see Regions and Endpoints in the Amazon Web Services General Reference.    For example, the following x-amz-grant-read header grants list objects permission to the two Amazon Web Services accounts identified by their email addresses.  x-amz-grant-read: emailAddress="xyz@amazon.com", emailAddress="abc@amazon.com"     You can use either a canned ACL or specify access permissions explicitly. You cannot do both.  Grantee Values  You can specify the person (grantee) to whom you're assigning access rights (using request elements) in the following ways:   By the person's ID:  &lt;Grantee xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance" xsi:type="CanonicalUser"&gt;&lt;ID&gt;&lt;&gt;ID&lt;&gt;&lt;/ID&gt;&lt;DisplayName&gt;&lt;&gt;GranteesEmail&lt;&gt;&lt;/DisplayName&gt; &lt;/Grantee&gt;  DisplayName is optional and ignored in the request.   By URI:  &lt;Grantee xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance" xsi:type="Group"&gt;&lt;URI&gt;&lt;&gt;http://acs.amazonaws.com/groups/global/AuthenticatedUsers&lt;&gt;&lt;/URI&gt;&lt;/Grantee&gt;    By Email address:  &lt;Grantee xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance" xsi:type="AmazonCustomerByEmail"&gt;&lt;EmailAddress&gt;&lt;&gt;Grantees@email.com&lt;&gt;&lt;/EmailAddress&gt;lt;/Grantee&gt;  The grantee is resolved to the CanonicalUser and, in a response to a GET Object acl request, appears as the CanonicalUser.  Using email addresses to specify a grantee is only supported in the following Amazon Web Services Regions:    US East (N. Virginia)   US West (N. California)    US West (Oregon)    Asia Pacific (Singapore)   Asia Pacific (Sydney)   Asia Pacific (Tokyo)   Europe (Ireland)   South America (São Paulo)   For a list of all the Amazon S3 supported Regions and endpoints, see Regions and Endpoints in the Amazon Web Services General Reference.     Versioning  The ACL of an object is set at the object version level. By default, PUT sets the ACL of the current version of an object. To set the ACL of a different version, use the versionId subresource.  Related Resources     CopyObject     GetObject   
 698     */
 699    putObjectAcl(params: S3.Types.PutObjectAclRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.PutObjectAclOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.PutObjectAclOutput, AWSError>;
 700    /**
 701     * Uses the acl subresource to set the access control list (ACL) permissions for a new or existing object in an S3 bucket. You must have WRITE_ACP permission to set the ACL of an object. For more information, see What permissions can I grant? in the Amazon S3 User Guide. This action is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts. Depending on your application needs, you can choose to set the ACL on an object using either the request body or the headers. For example, if you have an existing application that updates a bucket ACL using the request body, you can continue to use that approach. For more information, see Access Control List (ACL) Overview in the Amazon S3 User Guide.  Access Permissions  You can set access permissions using one of the following methods:   Specify a canned ACL with the x-amz-acl request header. Amazon S3 supports a set of predefined ACLs, known as canned ACLs. Each canned ACL has a predefined set of grantees and permissions. Specify the canned ACL name as the value of x-amz-acl. If you use this header, you cannot use other access control-specific headers in your request. For more information, see Canned ACL.   Specify access permissions explicitly with the x-amz-grant-read, x-amz-grant-read-acp, x-amz-grant-write-acp, and x-amz-grant-full-control headers. When using these headers, you specify explicit access permissions and grantees (Amazon Web Services accounts or Amazon S3 groups) who will receive the permission. If you use these ACL-specific headers, you cannot use x-amz-acl header to set a canned ACL. These parameters map to the set of permissions that Amazon S3 supports in an ACL. For more information, see Access Control List (ACL) Overview. You specify each grantee as a type=value pair, where the type is one of the following:    id – if the value specified is the canonical user ID of an Amazon Web Services account    uri – if you are granting permissions to a predefined group    emailAddress – if the value specified is the email address of an Amazon Web Services account  Using email addresses to specify a grantee is only supported in the following Amazon Web Services Regions:    US East (N. Virginia)   US West (N. California)    US West (Oregon)    Asia Pacific (Singapore)   Asia Pacific (Sydney)   Asia Pacific (Tokyo)   Europe (Ireland)   South America (São Paulo)   For a list of all the Amazon S3 supported Regions and endpoints, see Regions and Endpoints in the Amazon Web Services General Reference.    For example, the following x-amz-grant-read header grants list objects permission to the two Amazon Web Services accounts identified by their email addresses.  x-amz-grant-read: emailAddress="xyz@amazon.com", emailAddress="abc@amazon.com"     You can use either a canned ACL or specify access permissions explicitly. You cannot do both.  Grantee Values  You can specify the person (grantee) to whom you're assigning access rights (using request elements) in the following ways:   By the person's ID:  &lt;Grantee xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance" xsi:type="CanonicalUser"&gt;&lt;ID&gt;&lt;&gt;ID&lt;&gt;&lt;/ID&gt;&lt;DisplayName&gt;&lt;&gt;GranteesEmail&lt;&gt;&lt;/DisplayName&gt; &lt;/Grantee&gt;  DisplayName is optional and ignored in the request.   By URI:  &lt;Grantee xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance" xsi:type="Group"&gt;&lt;URI&gt;&lt;&gt;http://acs.amazonaws.com/groups/global/AuthenticatedUsers&lt;&gt;&lt;/URI&gt;&lt;/Grantee&gt;    By Email address:  &lt;Grantee xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance" xsi:type="AmazonCustomerByEmail"&gt;&lt;EmailAddress&gt;&lt;&gt;Grantees@email.com&lt;&gt;&lt;/EmailAddress&gt;lt;/Grantee&gt;  The grantee is resolved to the CanonicalUser and, in a response to a GET Object acl request, appears as the CanonicalUser.  Using email addresses to specify a grantee is only supported in the following Amazon Web Services Regions:    US East (N. Virginia)   US West (N. California)    US West (Oregon)    Asia Pacific (Singapore)   Asia Pacific (Sydney)   Asia Pacific (Tokyo)   Europe (Ireland)   South America (São Paulo)   For a list of all the Amazon S3 supported Regions and endpoints, see Regions and Endpoints in the Amazon Web Services General Reference.     Versioning  The ACL of an object is set at the object version level. By default, PUT sets the ACL of the current version of an object. To set the ACL of a different version, use the versionId subresource.  Related Resources     CopyObject     GetObject   
 702     */
 703    putObjectAcl(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.PutObjectAclOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.PutObjectAclOutput, AWSError>;
 704    /**
 705     * Applies a Legal Hold configuration to the specified object. For more information, see Locking Objects. This action is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts.
 706     */
 707    putObjectLegalHold(params: S3.Types.PutObjectLegalHoldRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.PutObjectLegalHoldOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.PutObjectLegalHoldOutput, AWSError>;
 708    /**
 709     * Applies a Legal Hold configuration to the specified object. For more information, see Locking Objects. This action is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts.
 710     */
 711    putObjectLegalHold(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.PutObjectLegalHoldOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.PutObjectLegalHoldOutput, AWSError>;
 712    /**
 713     * Places an Object Lock configuration on the specified bucket. The rule specified in the Object Lock configuration will be applied by default to every new object placed in the specified bucket. For more information, see Locking Objects.     The DefaultRetention settings require both a mode and a period.   The DefaultRetention period can be either Days or Years but you must select one. You cannot specify Days and Years at the same time.   You can only enable Object Lock for new buckets. If you want to turn on Object Lock for an existing bucket, contact Amazon Web Services Support.   
 714     */
 715    putObjectLockConfiguration(params: S3.Types.PutObjectLockConfigurationRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.PutObjectLockConfigurationOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.PutObjectLockConfigurationOutput, AWSError>;
 716    /**
 717     * Places an Object Lock configuration on the specified bucket. The rule specified in the Object Lock configuration will be applied by default to every new object placed in the specified bucket. For more information, see Locking Objects.     The DefaultRetention settings require both a mode and a period.   The DefaultRetention period can be either Days or Years but you must select one. You cannot specify Days and Years at the same time.   You can only enable Object Lock for new buckets. If you want to turn on Object Lock for an existing bucket, contact Amazon Web Services Support.   
 718     */
 719    putObjectLockConfiguration(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.PutObjectLockConfigurationOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.PutObjectLockConfigurationOutput, AWSError>;
 720    /**
 721     * Places an Object Retention configuration on an object. For more information, see Locking Objects. Users or accounts require the s3:PutObjectRetention permission in order to place an Object Retention configuration on objects. Bypassing a Governance Retention configuration requires the s3:BypassGovernanceRetention permission.  This action is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts.  Permissions  When the Object Lock retention mode is set to compliance, you need s3:PutObjectRetention and s3:BypassGovernanceRetention permissions. For other requests to PutObjectRetention, only s3:PutObjectRetention permissions are required.
 722     */
 723    putObjectRetention(params: S3.Types.PutObjectRetentionRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.PutObjectRetentionOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.PutObjectRetentionOutput, AWSError>;
 724    /**
 725     * Places an Object Retention configuration on an object. For more information, see Locking Objects. Users or accounts require the s3:PutObjectRetention permission in order to place an Object Retention configuration on objects. Bypassing a Governance Retention configuration requires the s3:BypassGovernanceRetention permission.  This action is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts.  Permissions  When the Object Lock retention mode is set to compliance, you need s3:PutObjectRetention and s3:BypassGovernanceRetention permissions. For other requests to PutObjectRetention, only s3:PutObjectRetention permissions are required.
 726     */
 727    putObjectRetention(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.PutObjectRetentionOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.PutObjectRetentionOutput, AWSError>;
 728    /**
 729     * Sets the supplied tag-set to an object that already exists in a bucket. A tag is a key-value pair. You can associate tags with an object by sending a PUT request against the tagging subresource that is associated with the object. You can retrieve tags by sending a GET request. For more information, see GetObjectTagging. For tagging-related restrictions related to characters and encodings, see Tag Restrictions. Note that Amazon S3 limits the maximum number of tags to 10 tags per object. To use this operation, you must have permission to perform the s3:PutObjectTagging action. By default, the bucket owner has this permission and can grant this permission to others. To put tags of any other version, use the versionId query parameter. You also need permission for the s3:PutObjectVersionTagging action. For information about the Amazon S3 object tagging feature, see Object Tagging.  Special Errors       Code: InvalidTagError      Cause: The tag provided was not a valid tag. This error can occur if the tag did not pass input validation. For more information, see Object Tagging.         Code: MalformedXMLError      Cause: The XML provided does not match the schema.         Code: OperationAbortedError      Cause: A conflicting conditional action is currently in progress against this resource. Please try again.         Code: InternalError     Cause: The service was unable to apply the provided tag to the object.       Related Resources     GetObjectTagging     DeleteObjectTagging   
 730     */
 731    putObjectTagging(params: S3.Types.PutObjectTaggingRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.PutObjectTaggingOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.PutObjectTaggingOutput, AWSError>;
 732    /**
 733     * Sets the supplied tag-set to an object that already exists in a bucket. A tag is a key-value pair. You can associate tags with an object by sending a PUT request against the tagging subresource that is associated with the object. You can retrieve tags by sending a GET request. For more information, see GetObjectTagging. For tagging-related restrictions related to characters and encodings, see Tag Restrictions. Note that Amazon S3 limits the maximum number of tags to 10 tags per object. To use this operation, you must have permission to perform the s3:PutObjectTagging action. By default, the bucket owner has this permission and can grant this permission to others. To put tags of any other version, use the versionId query parameter. You also need permission for the s3:PutObjectVersionTagging action. For information about the Amazon S3 object tagging feature, see Object Tagging.  Special Errors       Code: InvalidTagError      Cause: The tag provided was not a valid tag. This error can occur if the tag did not pass input validation. For more information, see Object Tagging.         Code: MalformedXMLError      Cause: The XML provided does not match the schema.         Code: OperationAbortedError      Cause: A conflicting conditional action is currently in progress against this resource. Please try again.         Code: InternalError     Cause: The service was unable to apply the provided tag to the object.       Related Resources     GetObjectTagging     DeleteObjectTagging   
 734     */
 735    putObjectTagging(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.PutObjectTaggingOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.PutObjectTaggingOutput, AWSError>;
 736    /**
 737     * Creates or modifies the PublicAccessBlock configuration for an Amazon S3 bucket. To use this operation, you must have the s3:PutBucketPublicAccessBlock permission. For more information about Amazon S3 permissions, see Specifying Permissions in a Policy.  When Amazon S3 evaluates the PublicAccessBlock configuration for a bucket or an object, it checks the PublicAccessBlock configuration for both the bucket (or the bucket that contains the object) and the bucket owner's account. If the PublicAccessBlock configurations are different between the bucket and the account, Amazon S3 uses the most restrictive combination of the bucket-level and account-level settings.  For more information about when Amazon S3 considers a bucket or an object public, see The Meaning of "Public".  Related Resources     GetPublicAccessBlock     DeletePublicAccessBlock     GetBucketPolicyStatus     Using Amazon S3 Block Public Access   
 738     */
 739    putPublicAccessBlock(params: S3.Types.PutPublicAccessBlockRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 740    /**
 741     * Creates or modifies the PublicAccessBlock configuration for an Amazon S3 bucket. To use this operation, you must have the s3:PutBucketPublicAccessBlock permission. For more information about Amazon S3 permissions, see Specifying Permissions in a Policy.  When Amazon S3 evaluates the PublicAccessBlock configuration for a bucket or an object, it checks the PublicAccessBlock configuration for both the bucket (or the bucket that contains the object) and the bucket owner's account. If the PublicAccessBlock configurations are different between the bucket and the account, Amazon S3 uses the most restrictive combination of the bucket-level and account-level settings.  For more information about when Amazon S3 considers a bucket or an object public, see The Meaning of "Public".  Related Resources     GetPublicAccessBlock     DeletePublicAccessBlock     GetBucketPolicyStatus     Using Amazon S3 Block Public Access   
 742     */
 743    putPublicAccessBlock(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 744    /**
 745     * Restores an archived copy of an object back into Amazon S3 This action is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts. This action performs the following types of requests:     select - Perform a select query on an archived object    restore an archive - Restore an archived object   To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:RestoreObject action. The bucket owner has this permission by default and can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources in the Amazon S3 User Guide.  Querying Archives with Select Requests  You use a select type of request to perform SQL queries on archived objects. The archived objects that are being queried by the select request must be formatted as uncompressed comma-separated values (CSV) files. You can run queries and custom analytics on your archived data without having to restore your data to a hotter Amazon S3 tier. For an overview about select requests, see Querying Archived Objects in the Amazon S3 User Guide. When making a select request, do the following:   Define an output location for the select query's output. This must be an Amazon S3 bucket in the same Amazon Web Services Region as the bucket that contains the archive object that is being queried. The Amazon Web Services account that initiates the job must have permissions to write to the S3 bucket. You can specify the storage class and encryption for the output objects stored in the bucket. For more information about output, see Querying Archived Objects in the Amazon S3 User Guide. For more information about the S3 structure in the request body, see the following:    PutObject     Managing Access with ACLs in the Amazon S3 User Guide     Protecting Data Using Server-Side Encryption in the Amazon S3 User Guide      Define the SQL expression for the SELECT type of restoration for your query in the request body's SelectParameters structure. You can use expressions like the following examples.   The following expression returns all records from the specified object.  SELECT * FROM Object    Assuming that you are not using any headers for data stored in the object, you can specify columns with positional headers.  SELECT s._1, s._2 FROM Object s WHERE s._3 &gt; 100    If you have headers and you set the fileHeaderInfo in the CSV structure in the request body to USE, you can specify headers in the query. (If you set the fileHeaderInfo field to IGNORE, the first row is skipped for the query.) You cannot mix ordinal positions with header column names.   SELECT s.Id, s.FirstName, s.SSN FROM S3Object s      For more information about using SQL with S3 Glacier Select restore, see SQL Reference for Amazon S3 Select and S3 Glacier Select in the Amazon S3 User Guide.  When making a select request, you can also do the following:   To expedite your queries, specify the Expedited tier. For more information about tiers, see "Restoring Archives," later in this topic.   Specify details about the data serialization format of both the input object that is being queried and the serialization of the CSV-encoded query results.   The following are additional important facts about the select feature:   The output results are new Amazon S3 objects. Unlike archive retrievals, they are stored until explicitly deleted-manually or through a lifecycle policy.   You can issue more than one select request on the same Amazon S3 object. Amazon S3 doesn't deduplicate requests, so avoid issuing duplicate requests.    Amazon S3 accepts a select request even if the object has already been restored. A select request doesn’t return error response 409.    Restoring objects  Objects that you archive to the S3 Glacier or S3 Glacier Deep Archive storage class, and S3 Intelligent-Tiering Archive or S3 Intelligent-Tiering Deep Archive tiers are not accessible in real time. For objects in Archive Access or Deep Archive Access tiers you must first initiate a restore request, and then wait until the object is moved into the Frequent Access tier. For objects in S3 Glacier or S3 Glacier Deep Archive storage classes you must first initiate a restore request, and then wait until a temporary copy of the object is available. To access an archived object, you must restore the object for the duration (number of days) that you specify. To restore a specific object version, you can provide a version ID. If you don't provide a version ID, Amazon S3 restores the current version. When restoring an archived object (or using a select request), you can specify one of the following data access tier options in the Tier element of the request body:      Expedited  - Expedited retrievals allow you to quickly access your data stored in the S3 Glacier storage class or S3 Intelligent-Tiering Archive tier when occasional urgent requests for a subset of archives are required. For all but the largest archived objects (250 MB+), data accessed using Expedited retrievals is typically made available within 1–5 minutes. Provisioned capacity ensures that retrieval capacity for Expedited retrievals is available when you need it. Expedited retrievals and provisioned capacity are not available for objects stored in the S3 Glacier Deep Archive storage class or S3 Intelligent-Tiering Deep Archive tier.     Standard  - Standard retrievals allow you to access any of your archived objects within several hours. This is the default option for retrieval requests that do not specify the retrieval option. Standard retrievals typically finish within 3–5 hours for objects stored in the S3 Glacier storage class or S3 Intelligent-Tiering Archive tier. They typically finish within 12 hours for objects stored in the S3 Glacier Deep Archive storage class or S3 Intelligent-Tiering Deep Archive tier. Standard retrievals are free for objects stored in S3 Intelligent-Tiering.     Bulk  - Bulk retrievals are the lowest-cost retrieval option in S3 Glacier, enabling you to retrieve large amounts, even petabytes, of data inexpensively. Bulk retrievals typically finish within 5–12 hours for objects stored in the S3 Glacier storage class or S3 Intelligent-Tiering Archive tier. They typically finish within 48 hours for objects stored in the S3 Glacier Deep Archive storage class or S3 Intelligent-Tiering Deep Archive tier. Bulk retrievals are free for objects stored in S3 Intelligent-Tiering.   For more information about archive retrieval options and provisioned capacity for Expedited data access, see Restoring Archived Objects in the Amazon S3 User Guide.  You can use Amazon S3 restore speed upgrade to change the restore speed to a faster speed while it is in progress. For more information, see  Upgrading the speed of an in-progress restore in the Amazon S3 User Guide.  To get the status of object restoration, you can send a HEAD request. Operations return the x-amz-restore header, which provides information about the restoration status, in the response. You can use Amazon S3 event notifications to notify you when a restore is initiated or completed. For more information, see Configuring Amazon S3 Event Notifications in the Amazon S3 User Guide. After restoring an archived object, you can update the restoration period by reissuing the request with a new period. Amazon S3 updates the restoration period relative to the current time and charges only for the request-there are no data transfer charges. You cannot update the restoration period when Amazon S3 is actively processing your current restore request for the object. If your bucket has a lifecycle configuration with a rule that includes an expiration action, the object expiration overrides the life span that you specify in a restore request. For example, if you restore an object copy for 10 days, but the object is scheduled to expire in 3 days, Amazon S3 deletes the object in 3 days. For more information about lifecycle configuration, see PutBucketLifecycleConfiguration and Object Lifecycle Management in Amazon S3 User Guide.  Responses  A successful action returns either the 200 OK or 202 Accepted status code.    If the object is not previously restored, then Amazon S3 returns 202 Accepted in the response.    If the object is previously restored, Amazon S3 returns 200 OK in the response.     Special Errors       Code: RestoreAlreadyInProgress     Cause: Object restore is already in progress. (This error does not apply to SELECT type requests.)     HTTP Status Code: 409 Conflict     SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client         Code: GlacierExpeditedRetrievalNotAvailable     Cause: expedited retrievals are currently not available. Try again later. (Returned if there is insufficient capacity to process the Expedited request. This error applies only to Expedited retrievals and not to S3 Standard or Bulk retrievals.)     HTTP Status Code: 503     SOAP Fault Code Prefix: N/A       Related Resources     PutBucketLifecycleConfiguration     GetBucketNotificationConfiguration     SQL Reference for Amazon S3 Select and S3 Glacier Select  in the Amazon S3 User Guide   
 746     */
 747    restoreObject(params: S3.Types.RestoreObjectRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.RestoreObjectOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.RestoreObjectOutput, AWSError>;
 748    /**
 749     * Restores an archived copy of an object back into Amazon S3 This action is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts. This action performs the following types of requests:     select - Perform a select query on an archived object    restore an archive - Restore an archived object   To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:RestoreObject action. The bucket owner has this permission by default and can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources in the Amazon S3 User Guide.  Querying Archives with Select Requests  You use a select type of request to perform SQL queries on archived objects. The archived objects that are being queried by the select request must be formatted as uncompressed comma-separated values (CSV) files. You can run queries and custom analytics on your archived data without having to restore your data to a hotter Amazon S3 tier. For an overview about select requests, see Querying Archived Objects in the Amazon S3 User Guide. When making a select request, do the following:   Define an output location for the select query's output. This must be an Amazon S3 bucket in the same Amazon Web Services Region as the bucket that contains the archive object that is being queried. The Amazon Web Services account that initiates the job must have permissions to write to the S3 bucket. You can specify the storage class and encryption for the output objects stored in the bucket. For more information about output, see Querying Archived Objects in the Amazon S3 User Guide. For more information about the S3 structure in the request body, see the following:    PutObject     Managing Access with ACLs in the Amazon S3 User Guide     Protecting Data Using Server-Side Encryption in the Amazon S3 User Guide      Define the SQL expression for the SELECT type of restoration for your query in the request body's SelectParameters structure. You can use expressions like the following examples.   The following expression returns all records from the specified object.  SELECT * FROM Object    Assuming that you are not using any headers for data stored in the object, you can specify columns with positional headers.  SELECT s._1, s._2 FROM Object s WHERE s._3 &gt; 100    If you have headers and you set the fileHeaderInfo in the CSV structure in the request body to USE, you can specify headers in the query. (If you set the fileHeaderInfo field to IGNORE, the first row is skipped for the query.) You cannot mix ordinal positions with header column names.   SELECT s.Id, s.FirstName, s.SSN FROM S3Object s      For more information about using SQL with S3 Glacier Select restore, see SQL Reference for Amazon S3 Select and S3 Glacier Select in the Amazon S3 User Guide.  When making a select request, you can also do the following:   To expedite your queries, specify the Expedited tier. For more information about tiers, see "Restoring Archives," later in this topic.   Specify details about the data serialization format of both the input object that is being queried and the serialization of the CSV-encoded query results.   The following are additional important facts about the select feature:   The output results are new Amazon S3 objects. Unlike archive retrievals, they are stored until explicitly deleted-manually or through a lifecycle policy.   You can issue more than one select request on the same Amazon S3 object. Amazon S3 doesn't deduplicate requests, so avoid issuing duplicate requests.    Amazon S3 accepts a select request even if the object has already been restored. A select request doesn’t return error response 409.    Restoring objects  Objects that you archive to the S3 Glacier or S3 Glacier Deep Archive storage class, and S3 Intelligent-Tiering Archive or S3 Intelligent-Tiering Deep Archive tiers are not accessible in real time. For objects in Archive Access or Deep Archive Access tiers you must first initiate a restore request, and then wait until the object is moved into the Frequent Access tier. For objects in S3 Glacier or S3 Glacier Deep Archive storage classes you must first initiate a restore request, and then wait until a temporary copy of the object is available. To access an archived object, you must restore the object for the duration (number of days) that you specify. To restore a specific object version, you can provide a version ID. If you don't provide a version ID, Amazon S3 restores the current version. When restoring an archived object (or using a select request), you can specify one of the following data access tier options in the Tier element of the request body:      Expedited  - Expedited retrievals allow you to quickly access your data stored in the S3 Glacier storage class or S3 Intelligent-Tiering Archive tier when occasional urgent requests for a subset of archives are required. For all but the largest archived objects (250 MB+), data accessed using Expedited retrievals is typically made available within 1–5 minutes. Provisioned capacity ensures that retrieval capacity for Expedited retrievals is available when you need it. Expedited retrievals and provisioned capacity are not available for objects stored in the S3 Glacier Deep Archive storage class or S3 Intelligent-Tiering Deep Archive tier.     Standard  - Standard retrievals allow you to access any of your archived objects within several hours. This is the default option for retrieval requests that do not specify the retrieval option. Standard retrievals typically finish within 3–5 hours for objects stored in the S3 Glacier storage class or S3 Intelligent-Tiering Archive tier. They typically finish within 12 hours for objects stored in the S3 Glacier Deep Archive storage class or S3 Intelligent-Tiering Deep Archive tier. Standard retrievals are free for objects stored in S3 Intelligent-Tiering.     Bulk  - Bulk retrievals are the lowest-cost retrieval option in S3 Glacier, enabling you to retrieve large amounts, even petabytes, of data inexpensively. Bulk retrievals typically finish within 5–12 hours for objects stored in the S3 Glacier storage class or S3 Intelligent-Tiering Archive tier. They typically finish within 48 hours for objects stored in the S3 Glacier Deep Archive storage class or S3 Intelligent-Tiering Deep Archive tier. Bulk retrievals are free for objects stored in S3 Intelligent-Tiering.   For more information about archive retrieval options and provisioned capacity for Expedited data access, see Restoring Archived Objects in the Amazon S3 User Guide.  You can use Amazon S3 restore speed upgrade to change the restore speed to a faster speed while it is in progress. For more information, see  Upgrading the speed of an in-progress restore in the Amazon S3 User Guide.  To get the status of object restoration, you can send a HEAD request. Operations return the x-amz-restore header, which provides information about the restoration status, in the response. You can use Amazon S3 event notifications to notify you when a restore is initiated or completed. For more information, see Configuring Amazon S3 Event Notifications in the Amazon S3 User Guide. After restoring an archived object, you can update the restoration period by reissuing the request with a new period. Amazon S3 updates the restoration period relative to the current time and charges only for the request-there are no data transfer charges. You cannot update the restoration period when Amazon S3 is actively processing your current restore request for the object. If your bucket has a lifecycle configuration with a rule that includes an expiration action, the object expiration overrides the life span that you specify in a restore request. For example, if you restore an object copy for 10 days, but the object is scheduled to expire in 3 days, Amazon S3 deletes the object in 3 days. For more information about lifecycle configuration, see PutBucketLifecycleConfiguration and Object Lifecycle Management in Amazon S3 User Guide.  Responses  A successful action returns either the 200 OK or 202 Accepted status code.    If the object is not previously restored, then Amazon S3 returns 202 Accepted in the response.    If the object is previously restored, Amazon S3 returns 200 OK in the response.     Special Errors       Code: RestoreAlreadyInProgress     Cause: Object restore is already in progress. (This error does not apply to SELECT type requests.)     HTTP Status Code: 409 Conflict     SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client         Code: GlacierExpeditedRetrievalNotAvailable     Cause: expedited retrievals are currently not available. Try again later. (Returned if there is insufficient capacity to process the Expedited request. This error applies only to Expedited retrievals and not to S3 Standard or Bulk retrievals.)     HTTP Status Code: 503     SOAP Fault Code Prefix: N/A       Related Resources     PutBucketLifecycleConfiguration     GetBucketNotificationConfiguration     SQL Reference for Amazon S3 Select and S3 Glacier Select  in the Amazon S3 User Guide   
 750     */
 751    restoreObject(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.RestoreObjectOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.RestoreObjectOutput, AWSError>;
 752    /**
 753     * This action filters the contents of an Amazon S3 object based on a simple structured query language (SQL) statement. In the request, along with the SQL expression, you must also specify a data serialization format (JSON, CSV, or Apache Parquet) of the object. Amazon S3 uses this format to parse object data into records, and returns only records that match the specified SQL expression. You must also specify the data serialization format for the response. This action is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts. For more information about Amazon S3 Select, see Selecting Content from Objects in the Amazon S3 User Guide. For more information about using SQL with Amazon S3 Select, see  SQL Reference for Amazon S3 Select and S3 Glacier Select in the Amazon S3 User Guide.   Permissions  You must have s3:GetObject permission for this operation. Amazon S3 Select does not support anonymous access. For more information about permissions, see Specifying Permissions in a Policy in the Amazon S3 User Guide.   Object Data Formats  You can use Amazon S3 Select to query objects that have the following format properties:    CSV, JSON, and Parquet - Objects must be in CSV, JSON, or Parquet format.    UTF-8 - UTF-8 is the only encoding type Amazon S3 Select supports.    GZIP or BZIP2 - CSV and JSON files can be compressed using GZIP or BZIP2. GZIP and BZIP2 are the only compression formats that Amazon S3 Select supports for CSV and JSON files. Amazon S3 Select supports columnar compression for Parquet using GZIP or Snappy. Amazon S3 Select does not support whole-object compression for Parquet objects.    Server-side encryption - Amazon S3 Select supports querying objects that are protected with server-side encryption. For objects that are encrypted with customer-provided encryption keys (SSE-C), you must use HTTPS, and you must use the headers that are documented in the GetObject. For more information about SSE-C, see Server-Side Encryption (Using Customer-Provided Encryption Keys) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. For objects that are encrypted with Amazon S3 managed encryption keys (SSE-S3) and customer master keys (CMKs) stored in Amazon Web Services Key Management Service (SSE-KMS), server-side encryption is handled transparently, so you don't need to specify anything. For more information about server-side encryption, including SSE-S3 and SSE-KMS, see Protecting Data Using Server-Side Encryption in the Amazon S3 User Guide.    Working with the Response Body  Given the response size is unknown, Amazon S3 Select streams the response as a series of messages and includes a Transfer-Encoding header with chunked as its value in the response. For more information, see Appendix: SelectObjectContent Response.   GetObject Support  The SelectObjectContent action does not support the following GetObject functionality. For more information, see GetObject.    Range: Although you can specify a scan range for an Amazon S3 Select request (see SelectObjectContentRequest - ScanRange in the request parameters), you cannot specify the range of bytes of an object to return.    GLACIER, DEEP_ARCHIVE and REDUCED_REDUNDANCY storage classes: You cannot specify the GLACIER, DEEP_ARCHIVE, or REDUCED_REDUNDANCY storage classes. For more information, about storage classes see Storage Classes in the Amazon S3 User Guide.     Special Errors  For a list of special errors for this operation, see List of SELECT Object Content Error Codes   Related Resources     GetObject     GetBucketLifecycleConfiguration     PutBucketLifecycleConfiguration   
 754     */
 755    selectObjectContent(params: S3.Types.SelectObjectContentRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.SelectObjectContentOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.SelectObjectContentOutput, AWSError>;
 756    /**
 757     * This action filters the contents of an Amazon S3 object based on a simple structured query language (SQL) statement. In the request, along with the SQL expression, you must also specify a data serialization format (JSON, CSV, or Apache Parquet) of the object. Amazon S3 uses this format to parse object data into records, and returns only records that match the specified SQL expression. You must also specify the data serialization format for the response. This action is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts. For more information about Amazon S3 Select, see Selecting Content from Objects in the Amazon S3 User Guide. For more information about using SQL with Amazon S3 Select, see  SQL Reference for Amazon S3 Select and S3 Glacier Select in the Amazon S3 User Guide.   Permissions  You must have s3:GetObject permission for this operation. Amazon S3 Select does not support anonymous access. For more information about permissions, see Specifying Permissions in a Policy in the Amazon S3 User Guide.   Object Data Formats  You can use Amazon S3 Select to query objects that have the following format properties:    CSV, JSON, and Parquet - Objects must be in CSV, JSON, or Parquet format.    UTF-8 - UTF-8 is the only encoding type Amazon S3 Select supports.    GZIP or BZIP2 - CSV and JSON files can be compressed using GZIP or BZIP2. GZIP and BZIP2 are the only compression formats that Amazon S3 Select supports for CSV and JSON files. Amazon S3 Select supports columnar compression for Parquet using GZIP or Snappy. Amazon S3 Select does not support whole-object compression for Parquet objects.    Server-side encryption - Amazon S3 Select supports querying objects that are protected with server-side encryption. For objects that are encrypted with customer-provided encryption keys (SSE-C), you must use HTTPS, and you must use the headers that are documented in the GetObject. For more information about SSE-C, see Server-Side Encryption (Using Customer-Provided Encryption Keys) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. For objects that are encrypted with Amazon S3 managed encryption keys (SSE-S3) and customer master keys (CMKs) stored in Amazon Web Services Key Management Service (SSE-KMS), server-side encryption is handled transparently, so you don't need to specify anything. For more information about server-side encryption, including SSE-S3 and SSE-KMS, see Protecting Data Using Server-Side Encryption in the Amazon S3 User Guide.    Working with the Response Body  Given the response size is unknown, Amazon S3 Select streams the response as a series of messages and includes a Transfer-Encoding header with chunked as its value in the response. For more information, see Appendix: SelectObjectContent Response.   GetObject Support  The SelectObjectContent action does not support the following GetObject functionality. For more information, see GetObject.    Range: Although you can specify a scan range for an Amazon S3 Select request (see SelectObjectContentRequest - ScanRange in the request parameters), you cannot specify the range of bytes of an object to return.    GLACIER, DEEP_ARCHIVE and REDUCED_REDUNDANCY storage classes: You cannot specify the GLACIER, DEEP_ARCHIVE, or REDUCED_REDUNDANCY storage classes. For more information, about storage classes see Storage Classes in the Amazon S3 User Guide.     Special Errors  For a list of special errors for this operation, see List of SELECT Object Content Error Codes   Related Resources     GetObject     GetBucketLifecycleConfiguration     PutBucketLifecycleConfiguration   
 758     */
 759    selectObjectContent(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.SelectObjectContentOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.SelectObjectContentOutput, AWSError>;
 760    /**
 761     * Uploads a part in a multipart upload.  In this operation, you provide part data in your request. However, you have an option to specify your existing Amazon S3 object as a data source for the part you are uploading. To upload a part from an existing object, you use the UploadPartCopy operation.   You must initiate a multipart upload (see CreateMultipartUpload) before you can upload any part. In response to your initiate request, Amazon S3 returns an upload ID, a unique identifier, that you must include in your upload part request. Part numbers can be any number from 1 to 10,000, inclusive. A part number uniquely identifies a part and also defines its position within the object being created. If you upload a new part using the same part number that was used with a previous part, the previously uploaded part is overwritten. Each part must be at least 5 MB in size, except the last part. There is no size limit on the last part of your multipart upload. To ensure that data is not corrupted when traversing the network, specify the Content-MD5 header in the upload part request. Amazon S3 checks the part data against the provided MD5 value. If they do not match, Amazon S3 returns an error.  If the upload request is signed with Signature Version 4, then Amazon Web Services S3 uses the x-amz-content-sha256 header as a checksum instead of Content-MD5. For more information see Authenticating Requests: Using the Authorization Header (Amazon Web Services Signature Version 4).   Note: After you initiate multipart upload and upload one or more parts, you must either complete or abort multipart upload in order to stop getting charged for storage of the uploaded parts. Only after you either complete or abort multipart upload, Amazon S3 frees up the parts storage and stops charging you for the parts storage. For more information on multipart uploads, go to Multipart Upload Overview in the Amazon S3 User Guide . For information on the permissions required to use the multipart upload API, go to Multipart Upload and Permissions in the Amazon S3 User Guide. You can optionally request server-side encryption where Amazon S3 encrypts your data as it writes it to disks in its data centers and decrypts it for you when you access it. You have the option of providing your own encryption key, or you can use the Amazon Web Services managed encryption keys. If you choose to provide your own encryption key, the request headers you provide in the request must match the headers you used in the request to initiate the upload by using CreateMultipartUpload. For more information, go to Using Server-Side Encryption in the Amazon S3 User Guide. Server-side encryption is supported by the S3 Multipart Upload actions. Unless you are using a customer-provided encryption key, you don't need to specify the encryption parameters in each UploadPart request. Instead, you only need to specify the server-side encryption parameters in the initial Initiate Multipart request. For more information, see CreateMultipartUpload. If you requested server-side encryption using a customer-provided encryption key in your initiate multipart upload request, you must provide identical encryption information in each part upload using the following headers.   x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-algorithm   x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-key   x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-key-MD5    Special Errors       Code: NoSuchUpload     Cause: The specified multipart upload does not exist. The upload ID might be invalid, or the multipart upload might have been aborted or completed.      HTTP Status Code: 404 Not Found      SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client       Related Resources     CreateMultipartUpload     CompleteMultipartUpload     AbortMultipartUpload     ListParts     ListMultipartUploads   
 762     */
 763    uploadPart(params: S3.Types.UploadPartRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.UploadPartOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.UploadPartOutput, AWSError>;
 764    /**
 765     * Uploads a part in a multipart upload.  In this operation, you provide part data in your request. However, you have an option to specify your existing Amazon S3 object as a data source for the part you are uploading. To upload a part from an existing object, you use the UploadPartCopy operation.   You must initiate a multipart upload (see CreateMultipartUpload) before you can upload any part. In response to your initiate request, Amazon S3 returns an upload ID, a unique identifier, that you must include in your upload part request. Part numbers can be any number from 1 to 10,000, inclusive. A part number uniquely identifies a part and also defines its position within the object being created. If you upload a new part using the same part number that was used with a previous part, the previously uploaded part is overwritten. Each part must be at least 5 MB in size, except the last part. There is no size limit on the last part of your multipart upload. To ensure that data is not corrupted when traversing the network, specify the Content-MD5 header in the upload part request. Amazon S3 checks the part data against the provided MD5 value. If they do not match, Amazon S3 returns an error.  If the upload request is signed with Signature Version 4, then Amazon Web Services S3 uses the x-amz-content-sha256 header as a checksum instead of Content-MD5. For more information see Authenticating Requests: Using the Authorization Header (Amazon Web Services Signature Version 4).   Note: After you initiate multipart upload and upload one or more parts, you must either complete or abort multipart upload in order to stop getting charged for storage of the uploaded parts. Only after you either complete or abort multipart upload, Amazon S3 frees up the parts storage and stops charging you for the parts storage. For more information on multipart uploads, go to Multipart Upload Overview in the Amazon S3 User Guide . For information on the permissions required to use the multipart upload API, go to Multipart Upload and Permissions in the Amazon S3 User Guide. You can optionally request server-side encryption where Amazon S3 encrypts your data as it writes it to disks in its data centers and decrypts it for you when you access it. You have the option of providing your own encryption key, or you can use the Amazon Web Services managed encryption keys. If you choose to provide your own encryption key, the request headers you provide in the request must match the headers you used in the request to initiate the upload by using CreateMultipartUpload. For more information, go to Using Server-Side Encryption in the Amazon S3 User Guide. Server-side encryption is supported by the S3 Multipart Upload actions. Unless you are using a customer-provided encryption key, you don't need to specify the encryption parameters in each UploadPart request. Instead, you only need to specify the server-side encryption parameters in the initial Initiate Multipart request. For more information, see CreateMultipartUpload. If you requested server-side encryption using a customer-provided encryption key in your initiate multipart upload request, you must provide identical encryption information in each part upload using the following headers.   x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-algorithm   x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-key   x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-key-MD5    Special Errors       Code: NoSuchUpload     Cause: The specified multipart upload does not exist. The upload ID might be invalid, or the multipart upload might have been aborted or completed.      HTTP Status Code: 404 Not Found      SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client       Related Resources     CreateMultipartUpload     CompleteMultipartUpload     AbortMultipartUpload     ListParts     ListMultipartUploads   
 766     */
 767    uploadPart(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.UploadPartOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.UploadPartOutput, AWSError>;
 768    /**
 769     * Uploads a part by copying data from an existing object as data source. You specify the data source by adding the request header x-amz-copy-source in your request and a byte range by adding the request header x-amz-copy-source-range in your request.  The minimum allowable part size for a multipart upload is 5 MB. For more information about multipart upload limits, go to Quick Facts in the Amazon S3 User Guide.   Instead of using an existing object as part data, you might use the UploadPart action and provide data in your request.  You must initiate a multipart upload before you can upload any part. In response to your initiate request. Amazon S3 returns a unique identifier, the upload ID, that you must include in your upload part request. For more information about using the UploadPartCopy operation, see the following:   For conceptual information about multipart uploads, see Uploading Objects Using Multipart Upload in the Amazon S3 User Guide.   For information about permissions required to use the multipart upload API, see Multipart Upload and Permissions in the Amazon S3 User Guide.   For information about copying objects using a single atomic action vs. the multipart upload, see Operations on Objects in the Amazon S3 User Guide.   For information about using server-side encryption with customer-provided encryption keys with the UploadPartCopy operation, see CopyObject and UploadPart.   Note the following additional considerations about the request headers x-amz-copy-source-if-match, x-amz-copy-source-if-none-match, x-amz-copy-source-if-unmodified-since, and x-amz-copy-source-if-modified-since:      Consideration 1 - If both of the x-amz-copy-source-if-match and x-amz-copy-source-if-unmodified-since headers are present in the request as follows:  x-amz-copy-source-if-match condition evaluates to true, and;  x-amz-copy-source-if-unmodified-since condition evaluates to false; Amazon S3 returns 200 OK and copies the data.     Consideration 2 - If both of the x-amz-copy-source-if-none-match and x-amz-copy-source-if-modified-since headers are present in the request as follows:  x-amz-copy-source-if-none-match condition evaluates to false, and;  x-amz-copy-source-if-modified-since condition evaluates to true; Amazon S3 returns 412 Precondition Failed response code.     Versioning  If your bucket has versioning enabled, you could have multiple versions of the same object. By default, x-amz-copy-source identifies the current version of the object to copy. If the current version is a delete marker and you don't specify a versionId in the x-amz-copy-source, Amazon S3 returns a 404 error, because the object does not exist. If you specify versionId in the x-amz-copy-source and the versionId is a delete marker, Amazon S3 returns an HTTP 400 error, because you are not allowed to specify a delete marker as a version for the x-amz-copy-source.  You can optionally specify a specific version of the source object to copy by adding the versionId subresource as shown in the following example:  x-amz-copy-source: /bucket/object?versionId=version id   Special Errors       Code: NoSuchUpload     Cause: The specified multipart upload does not exist. The upload ID might be invalid, or the multipart upload might have been aborted or completed.     HTTP Status Code: 404 Not Found         Code: InvalidRequest     Cause: The specified copy source is not supported as a byte-range copy source.     HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request       Related Resources     CreateMultipartUpload     UploadPart     CompleteMultipartUpload     AbortMultipartUpload     ListParts     ListMultipartUploads   
 770     */
 771    uploadPartCopy(params: S3.Types.UploadPartCopyRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.UploadPartCopyOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.UploadPartCopyOutput, AWSError>;
 772    /**
 773     * Uploads a part by copying data from an existing object as data source. You specify the data source by adding the request header x-amz-copy-source in your request and a byte range by adding the request header x-amz-copy-source-range in your request.  The minimum allowable part size for a multipart upload is 5 MB. For more information about multipart upload limits, go to Quick Facts in the Amazon S3 User Guide.   Instead of using an existing object as part data, you might use the UploadPart action and provide data in your request.  You must initiate a multipart upload before you can upload any part. In response to your initiate request. Amazon S3 returns a unique identifier, the upload ID, that you must include in your upload part request. For more information about using the UploadPartCopy operation, see the following:   For conceptual information about multipart uploads, see Uploading Objects Using Multipart Upload in the Amazon S3 User Guide.   For information about permissions required to use the multipart upload API, see Multipart Upload and Permissions in the Amazon S3 User Guide.   For information about copying objects using a single atomic action vs. the multipart upload, see Operations on Objects in the Amazon S3 User Guide.   For information about using server-side encryption with customer-provided encryption keys with the UploadPartCopy operation, see CopyObject and UploadPart.   Note the following additional considerations about the request headers x-amz-copy-source-if-match, x-amz-copy-source-if-none-match, x-amz-copy-source-if-unmodified-since, and x-amz-copy-source-if-modified-since:      Consideration 1 - If both of the x-amz-copy-source-if-match and x-amz-copy-source-if-unmodified-since headers are present in the request as follows:  x-amz-copy-source-if-match condition evaluates to true, and;  x-amz-copy-source-if-unmodified-since condition evaluates to false; Amazon S3 returns 200 OK and copies the data.     Consideration 2 - If both of the x-amz-copy-source-if-none-match and x-amz-copy-source-if-modified-since headers are present in the request as follows:  x-amz-copy-source-if-none-match condition evaluates to false, and;  x-amz-copy-source-if-modified-since condition evaluates to true; Amazon S3 returns 412 Precondition Failed response code.     Versioning  If your bucket has versioning enabled, you could have multiple versions of the same object. By default, x-amz-copy-source identifies the current version of the object to copy. If the current version is a delete marker and you don't specify a versionId in the x-amz-copy-source, Amazon S3 returns a 404 error, because the object does not exist. If you specify versionId in the x-amz-copy-source and the versionId is a delete marker, Amazon S3 returns an HTTP 400 error, because you are not allowed to specify a delete marker as a version for the x-amz-copy-source.  You can optionally specify a specific version of the source object to copy by adding the versionId subresource as shown in the following example:  x-amz-copy-source: /bucket/object?versionId=version id   Special Errors       Code: NoSuchUpload     Cause: The specified multipart upload does not exist. The upload ID might be invalid, or the multipart upload might have been aborted or completed.     HTTP Status Code: 404 Not Found         Code: InvalidRequest     Cause: The specified copy source is not supported as a byte-range copy source.     HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request       Related Resources     CreateMultipartUpload     UploadPart     CompleteMultipartUpload     AbortMultipartUpload     ListParts     ListMultipartUploads   
 774     */
 775    uploadPartCopy(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.UploadPartCopyOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.UploadPartCopyOutput, AWSError>;
 776    /**
 777     * Passes transformed objects to a GetObject operation when using Object Lambda Access Points. For information about Object Lambda Access Points, see Transforming objects with Object Lambda Access Points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. This operation supports metadata that can be returned by GetObject, in addition to RequestRoute, RequestToken, StatusCode, ErrorCode, and ErrorMessage. The GetObject response metadata is supported so that the WriteGetObjectResponse caller, typically an Lambda function, can provide the same metadata when it internally invokes GetObject. When WriteGetObjectResponse is called by a customer-owned Lambda function, the metadata returned to the end user GetObject call might differ from what Amazon S3 would normally return. You can include any number of metadata headers. When including a metadata header, it should be prefaced with x-amz-meta. For example, x-amz-meta-my-custom-header: MyCustomValue. The primary use case for this is to forward GetObject metadata. Amazon Web Services provides some prebuilt Lambda functions that you can use with S3 Object Lambda to detect and redact personally identifiable information (PII) and decompress S3 objects. These Lambda functions are available in the Amazon Web Services Serverless Application Repository, and can be selected through the Amazon Web Services Management Console when you create your Object Lambda Access Point. Example 1: PII Access Control - This Lambda function uses Amazon Comprehend, a natural language processing (NLP) service using machine learning to find insights and relationships in text. It automatically detects personally identifiable information (PII) such as names, addresses, dates, credit card numbers, and social security numbers from documents in your Amazon S3 bucket.  Example 2: PII Redaction - This Lambda function uses Amazon Comprehend, a natural language processing (NLP) service using machine learning to find insights and relationships in text. It automatically redacts personally identifiable information (PII) such as names, addresses, dates, credit card numbers, and social security numbers from documents in your Amazon S3 bucket.  Example 3: Decompression - The Lambda function S3ObjectLambdaDecompression, is equipped to decompress objects stored in S3 in one of six compressed file formats including bzip2, gzip, snappy, zlib, zstandard and ZIP.  For information on how to view and use these functions, see Using Amazon Web Services built Lambda functions in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
 778     */
 779    writeGetObjectResponse(params: S3.Types.WriteGetObjectResponseRequest, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 780    /**
 781     * Passes transformed objects to a GetObject operation when using Object Lambda Access Points. For information about Object Lambda Access Points, see Transforming objects with Object Lambda Access Points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. This operation supports metadata that can be returned by GetObject, in addition to RequestRoute, RequestToken, StatusCode, ErrorCode, and ErrorMessage. The GetObject response metadata is supported so that the WriteGetObjectResponse caller, typically an Lambda function, can provide the same metadata when it internally invokes GetObject. When WriteGetObjectResponse is called by a customer-owned Lambda function, the metadata returned to the end user GetObject call might differ from what Amazon S3 would normally return. You can include any number of metadata headers. When including a metadata header, it should be prefaced with x-amz-meta. For example, x-amz-meta-my-custom-header: MyCustomValue. The primary use case for this is to forward GetObject metadata. Amazon Web Services provides some prebuilt Lambda functions that you can use with S3 Object Lambda to detect and redact personally identifiable information (PII) and decompress S3 objects. These Lambda functions are available in the Amazon Web Services Serverless Application Repository, and can be selected through the Amazon Web Services Management Console when you create your Object Lambda Access Point. Example 1: PII Access Control - This Lambda function uses Amazon Comprehend, a natural language processing (NLP) service using machine learning to find insights and relationships in text. It automatically detects personally identifiable information (PII) such as names, addresses, dates, credit card numbers, and social security numbers from documents in your Amazon S3 bucket.  Example 2: PII Redaction - This Lambda function uses Amazon Comprehend, a natural language processing (NLP) service using machine learning to find insights and relationships in text. It automatically redacts personally identifiable information (PII) such as names, addresses, dates, credit card numbers, and social security numbers from documents in your Amazon S3 bucket.  Example 3: Decompression - The Lambda function S3ObjectLambdaDecompression, is equipped to decompress objects stored in S3 in one of six compressed file formats including bzip2, gzip, snappy, zlib, zstandard and ZIP.  For information on how to view and use these functions, see Using Amazon Web Services built Lambda functions in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
 782     */
 783    writeGetObjectResponse(callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 784    /**
 785     * Waits for the bucketExists state by periodically calling the underlying S3.headBucketoperation every 5 seconds (at most 20 times).
 786     */
 787    waitFor(state: "bucketExists", params: S3.Types.HeadBucketRequest & {$waiter?: WaiterConfiguration}, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 788    /**
 789     * Waits for the bucketExists state by periodically calling the underlying S3.headBucketoperation every 5 seconds (at most 20 times).
 790     */
 791    waitFor(state: "bucketExists", callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 792    /**
 793     * Waits for the bucketNotExists state by periodically calling the underlying S3.headBucketoperation every 5 seconds (at most 20 times).
 794     */
 795    waitFor(state: "bucketNotExists", params: S3.Types.HeadBucketRequest & {$waiter?: WaiterConfiguration}, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 796    /**
 797     * Waits for the bucketNotExists state by periodically calling the underlying S3.headBucketoperation every 5 seconds (at most 20 times).
 798     */
 799    waitFor(state: "bucketNotExists", callback?: (err: AWSError, data: {}) => void): Request<{}, AWSError>;
 800    /**
 801     * Waits for the objectExists state by periodically calling the underlying S3.headObjectoperation every 5 seconds (at most 20 times).
 802     */
 803    waitFor(state: "objectExists", params: S3.Types.HeadObjectRequest & {$waiter?: WaiterConfiguration}, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.HeadObjectOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.HeadObjectOutput, AWSError>;
 804    /**
 805     * Waits for the objectExists state by periodically calling the underlying S3.headObjectoperation every 5 seconds (at most 20 times).
 806     */
 807    waitFor(state: "objectExists", callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.HeadObjectOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.HeadObjectOutput, AWSError>;
 808    /**
 809     * Waits for the objectNotExists state by periodically calling the underlying S3.headObjectoperation every 5 seconds (at most 20 times).
 810     */
 811    waitFor(state: "objectNotExists", params: S3.Types.HeadObjectRequest & {$waiter?: WaiterConfiguration}, callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.HeadObjectOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.HeadObjectOutput, AWSError>;
 812    /**
 813     * Waits for the objectNotExists state by periodically calling the underlying S3.headObjectoperation every 5 seconds (at most 20 times).
 814     */
 815    waitFor(state: "objectNotExists", callback?: (err: AWSError, data: S3.Types.HeadObjectOutput) => void): Request<S3.Types.HeadObjectOutput, AWSError>;
 816  }
 817  declare namespace S3 {
 818    export import ManagedUpload = managed_upload;
 819    export import PresignedPost = presigned_post;
 820  }
 821  declare namespace S3 {
 822    export type AbortDate = Date;
 823    export interface AbortIncompleteMultipartUpload {
 824      /**
 825       * Specifies the number of days after which Amazon S3 aborts an incomplete multipart upload.
 826       */
 827      DaysAfterInitiation?: DaysAfterInitiation;
 828    }
 829    export interface AbortMultipartUploadOutput {
 830      RequestCharged?: RequestCharged;
 831    }
 832    export interface AbortMultipartUploadRequest {
 833      /**
 834       * The bucket name to which the upload was taking place.  When using this action with an access point, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. When using this action with Amazon S3 on Outposts, you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action using S3 on Outposts through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the Outposts bucket ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about S3 on Outposts ARNs, see Using S3 on Outposts in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
 835       */
 836      Bucket: BucketName;
 837      /**
 838       * Key of the object for which the multipart upload was initiated.
 839       */
 840      Key: ObjectKey;
 841      /**
 842       * Upload ID that identifies the multipart upload.
 843       */
 844      UploadId: MultipartUploadId;
 845      RequestPayer?: RequestPayer;
 846      /**
 847       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
 848       */
 849      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
 850    }
 851    export type AbortRuleId = string;
 852    export interface AccelerateConfiguration {
 853      /**
 854       * Specifies the transfer acceleration status of the bucket.
 855       */
 856      Status?: BucketAccelerateStatus;
 857    }
 858    export type AcceptRanges = string;
 859    export interface AccessControlPolicy {
 860      /**
 861       * A list of grants.
 862       */
 863      Grants?: Grants;
 864      /**
 865       * Container for the bucket owner's display name and ID.
 866       */
 867      Owner?: Owner;
 868    }
 869    export interface AccessControlTranslation {
 870      /**
 871       * Specifies the replica ownership. For default and valid values, see PUT bucket replication in the Amazon S3 API Reference.
 872       */
 873      Owner: OwnerOverride;
 874    }
 875    export type AccountId = string;
 876    export type AllowQuotedRecordDelimiter = boolean;
 877    export type AllowedHeader = string;
 878    export type AllowedHeaders = AllowedHeader[];
 879    export type AllowedMethod = string;
 880    export type AllowedMethods = AllowedMethod[];
 881    export type AllowedOrigin = string;
 882    export type AllowedOrigins = AllowedOrigin[];
 883    export interface AnalyticsAndOperator {
 884      /**
 885       * The prefix to use when evaluating an AND predicate: The prefix that an object must have to be included in the metrics results.
 886       */
 887      Prefix?: Prefix;
 888      /**
 889       * The list of tags to use when evaluating an AND predicate.
 890       */
 891      Tags?: TagSet;
 892    }
 893    export interface AnalyticsConfiguration {
 894      /**
 895       * The ID that identifies the analytics configuration.
 896       */
 897      Id: AnalyticsId;
 898      /**
 899       * The filter used to describe a set of objects for analyses. A filter must have exactly one prefix, one tag, or one conjunction (AnalyticsAndOperator). If no filter is provided, all objects will be considered in any analysis.
 900       */
 901      Filter?: AnalyticsFilter;
 902      /**
 903       *  Contains data related to access patterns to be collected and made available to analyze the tradeoffs between different storage classes. 
 904       */
 905      StorageClassAnalysis: StorageClassAnalysis;
 906    }
 907    export type AnalyticsConfigurationList = AnalyticsConfiguration[];
 908    export interface AnalyticsExportDestination {
 909      /**
 910       * A destination signifying output to an S3 bucket.
 911       */
 912      S3BucketDestination: AnalyticsS3BucketDestination;
 913    }
 914    export interface AnalyticsFilter {
 915      /**
 916       * The prefix to use when evaluating an analytics filter.
 917       */
 918      Prefix?: Prefix;
 919      /**
 920       * The tag to use when evaluating an analytics filter.
 921       */
 922      Tag?: Tag;
 923      /**
 924       * A conjunction (logical AND) of predicates, which is used in evaluating an analytics filter. The operator must have at least two predicates.
 925       */
 926      And?: AnalyticsAndOperator;
 927    }
 928    export type AnalyticsId = string;
 929    export interface AnalyticsS3BucketDestination {
 930      /**
 931       * Specifies the file format used when exporting data to Amazon S3.
 932       */
 933      Format: AnalyticsS3ExportFileFormat;
 934      /**
 935       * The account ID that owns the destination S3 bucket. If no account ID is provided, the owner is not validated before exporting data.   Although this value is optional, we strongly recommend that you set it to help prevent problems if the destination bucket ownership changes.  
 936       */
 937      BucketAccountId?: AccountId;
 938      /**
 939       * The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the bucket to which data is exported.
 940       */
 941      Bucket: BucketName;
 942      /**
 943       * The prefix to use when exporting data. The prefix is prepended to all results.
 944       */
 945      Prefix?: Prefix;
 946    }
 947    export type AnalyticsS3ExportFileFormat = "CSV"|string;
 948    export type ArchiveStatus = "ARCHIVE_ACCESS"|"DEEP_ARCHIVE_ACCESS"|string;
 949    export type Body = Buffer|Uint8Array|Blob|string|Readable;
 950    export interface Bucket {
 951      /**
 952       * The name of the bucket.
 953       */
 954      Name?: BucketName;
 955      /**
 956       * Date the bucket was created. This date can change when making changes to your bucket, such as editing its bucket policy.
 957       */
 958      CreationDate?: CreationDate;
 959    }
 960    export type BucketAccelerateStatus = "Enabled"|"Suspended"|string;
 961    export type BucketCannedACL = "private"|"public-read"|"public-read-write"|"authenticated-read"|string;
 962    export type BucketKeyEnabled = boolean;
 963    export interface BucketLifecycleConfiguration {
 964      /**
 965       * A lifecycle rule for individual objects in an Amazon S3 bucket.
 966       */
 967      Rules: LifecycleRules;
 968    }
 969    export type BucketLocationConstraint = "af-south-1"|"ap-east-1"|"ap-northeast-1"|"ap-northeast-2"|"ap-northeast-3"|"ap-south-1"|"ap-southeast-1"|"ap-southeast-2"|"ca-central-1"|"cn-north-1"|"cn-northwest-1"|"EU"|"eu-central-1"|"eu-north-1"|"eu-south-1"|"eu-west-1"|"eu-west-2"|"eu-west-3"|"me-south-1"|"sa-east-1"|"us-east-2"|"us-gov-east-1"|"us-gov-west-1"|"us-west-1"|"us-west-2"|string;
 970    export interface BucketLoggingStatus {
 971      LoggingEnabled?: LoggingEnabled;
 972    }
 973    export type BucketLogsPermission = "FULL_CONTROL"|"READ"|"WRITE"|string;
 974    export type BucketName = string;
 975    export type BucketVersioningStatus = "Enabled"|"Suspended"|string;
 976    export type Buckets = Bucket[];
 977    export type BypassGovernanceRetention = boolean;
 978    export type BytesProcessed = number;
 979    export type BytesReturned = number;
 980    export type BytesScanned = number;
 981    export interface CORSConfiguration {
 982      /**
 983       * A set of origins and methods (cross-origin access that you want to allow). You can add up to 100 rules to the configuration.
 984       */
 985      CORSRules: CORSRules;
 986    }
 987    export interface CORSRule {
 988      /**
 989       * Unique identifier for the rule. The value cannot be longer than 255 characters.
 990       */
 991      ID?: ID;
 992      /**
 993       * Headers that are specified in the Access-Control-Request-Headers header. These headers are allowed in a preflight OPTIONS request. In response to any preflight OPTIONS request, Amazon S3 returns any requested headers that are allowed.
 994       */
 995      AllowedHeaders?: AllowedHeaders;
 996      /**
 997       * An HTTP method that you allow the origin to execute. Valid values are GET, PUT, HEAD, POST, and DELETE.
 998       */
 999      AllowedMethods: AllowedMethods;
1000      /**
1001       * One or more origins you want customers to be able to access the bucket from.
1002       */
1003      AllowedOrigins: AllowedOrigins;
1004      /**
1005       * One or more headers in the response that you want customers to be able to access from their applications (for example, from a JavaScript XMLHttpRequest object).
1006       */
1007      ExposeHeaders?: ExposeHeaders;
1008      /**
1009       * The time in seconds that your browser is to cache the preflight response for the specified resource.
1010       */
1011      MaxAgeSeconds?: MaxAgeSeconds;
1012    }
1013    export type CORSRules = CORSRule[];
1014    export interface CSVInput {
1015      /**
1016       * Describes the first line of input. Valid values are:    NONE: First line is not a header.    IGNORE: First line is a header, but you can't use the header values to indicate the column in an expression. You can use column position (such as _1, _2, …) to indicate the column (SELECT s._1 FROM OBJECT s).    Use: First line is a header, and you can use the header value to identify a column in an expression (SELECT "name" FROM OBJECT).   
1017       */
1018      FileHeaderInfo?: FileHeaderInfo;
1019      /**
1020       * A single character used to indicate that a row should be ignored when the character is present at the start of that row. You can specify any character to indicate a comment line.
1021       */
1022      Comments?: Comments;
1023      /**
1024       * A single character used for escaping the quotation mark character inside an already escaped value. For example, the value """ a , b """ is parsed as " a , b ".
1025       */
1026      QuoteEscapeCharacter?: QuoteEscapeCharacter;
1027      /**
1028       * A single character used to separate individual records in the input. Instead of the default value, you can specify an arbitrary delimiter.
1029       */
1030      RecordDelimiter?: RecordDelimiter;
1031      /**
1032       * A single character used to separate individual fields in a record. You can specify an arbitrary delimiter.
1033       */
1034      FieldDelimiter?: FieldDelimiter;
1035      /**
1036       * A single character used for escaping when the field delimiter is part of the value. For example, if the value is a, b, Amazon S3 wraps this field value in quotation marks, as follows: " a , b ". Type: String Default: "  Ancestors: CSV 
1037       */
1038      QuoteCharacter?: QuoteCharacter;
1039      /**
1040       * Specifies that CSV field values may contain quoted record delimiters and such records should be allowed. Default value is FALSE. Setting this value to TRUE may lower performance.
1041       */
1042      AllowQuotedRecordDelimiter?: AllowQuotedRecordDelimiter;
1043    }
1044    export interface CSVOutput {
1045      /**
1046       * Indicates whether to use quotation marks around output fields.     ALWAYS: Always use quotation marks for output fields.    ASNEEDED: Use quotation marks for output fields when needed.  
1047       */
1048      QuoteFields?: QuoteFields;
1049      /**
1050       * The single character used for escaping the quote character inside an already escaped value.
1051       */
1052      QuoteEscapeCharacter?: QuoteEscapeCharacter;
1053      /**
1054       * A single character used to separate individual records in the output. Instead of the default value, you can specify an arbitrary delimiter.
1055       */
1056      RecordDelimiter?: RecordDelimiter;
1057      /**
1058       * The value used to separate individual fields in a record. You can specify an arbitrary delimiter.
1059       */
1060      FieldDelimiter?: FieldDelimiter;
1061      /**
1062       * A single character used for escaping when the field delimiter is part of the value. For example, if the value is a, b, Amazon S3 wraps this field value in quotation marks, as follows: " a , b ".
1063       */
1064      QuoteCharacter?: QuoteCharacter;
1065    }
1066    export type CacheControl = string;
1067    export type CloudFunction = string;
1068    export interface CloudFunctionConfiguration {
1069      Id?: NotificationId;
1070      Event?: Event;
1071      /**
1072       * Bucket events for which to send notifications.
1073       */
1074      Events?: EventList;
1075      /**
1076       * Lambda cloud function ARN that Amazon S3 can invoke when it detects events of the specified type.
1077       */
1078      CloudFunction?: CloudFunction;
1079      /**
1080       * The role supporting the invocation of the Lambda function
1081       */
1082      InvocationRole?: CloudFunctionInvocationRole;
1083    }
1084    export type CloudFunctionInvocationRole = string;
1085    export type Code = string;
1086    export type Comments = string;
1087    export interface CommonPrefix {
1088      /**
1089       * Container for the specified common prefix.
1090       */
1091      Prefix?: Prefix;
1092    }
1093    export type CommonPrefixList = CommonPrefix[];
1094    export interface CompleteMultipartUploadOutput {
1095      /**
1096       * The URI that identifies the newly created object.
1097       */
1098      Location?: Location;
1099      /**
1100       * The name of the bucket that contains the newly created object. Does not return the access point ARN or access point alias if used. When using this action with an access point, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. When using this action with Amazon S3 on Outposts, you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action using S3 on Outposts through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the Outposts bucket ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about S3 on Outposts ARNs, see Using S3 on Outposts in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
1101       */
1102      Bucket?: BucketName;
1103      /**
1104       * The object key of the newly created object.
1105       */
1106      Key?: ObjectKey;
1107      /**
1108       * If the object expiration is configured, this will contain the expiration date (expiry-date) and rule ID (rule-id). The value of rule-id is URL encoded.
1109       */
1110      Expiration?: Expiration;
1111      /**
1112       * Entity tag that identifies the newly created object's data. Objects with different object data will have different entity tags. The entity tag is an opaque string. The entity tag may or may not be an MD5 digest of the object data. If the entity tag is not an MD5 digest of the object data, it will contain one or more nonhexadecimal characters and/or will consist of less than 32 or more than 32 hexadecimal digits.
1113       */
1114      ETag?: ETag;
1115      /**
1116       * If you specified server-side encryption either with an Amazon S3-managed encryption key or an Amazon Web Services KMS customer master key (CMK) in your initiate multipart upload request, the response includes this header. It confirms the encryption algorithm that Amazon S3 used to encrypt the object.
1117       */
1118      ServerSideEncryption?: ServerSideEncryption;
1119      /**
1120       * Version ID of the newly created object, in case the bucket has versioning turned on.
1121       */
1122      VersionId?: ObjectVersionId;
1123      /**
1124       * If present, specifies the ID of the Amazon Web Services Key Management Service (Amazon Web Services KMS) symmetric customer managed customer master key (CMK) that was used for the object.
1125       */
1126      SSEKMSKeyId?: SSEKMSKeyId;
1127      /**
1128       * Indicates whether the multipart upload uses an S3 Bucket Key for server-side encryption with Amazon Web Services KMS (SSE-KMS).
1129       */
1130      BucketKeyEnabled?: BucketKeyEnabled;
1131      RequestCharged?: RequestCharged;
1132    }
1133    export interface CompleteMultipartUploadRequest {
1134      /**
1135       * Name of the bucket to which the multipart upload was initiated. When using this action with an access point, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. When using this action with Amazon S3 on Outposts, you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action using S3 on Outposts through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the Outposts bucket ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about S3 on Outposts ARNs, see Using S3 on Outposts in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
1136       */
1137      Bucket: BucketName;
1138      /**
1139       * Object key for which the multipart upload was initiated.
1140       */
1141      Key: ObjectKey;
1142      /**
1143       * The container for the multipart upload request information.
1144       */
1145      MultipartUpload?: CompletedMultipartUpload;
1146      /**
1147       * ID for the initiated multipart upload.
1148       */
1149      UploadId: MultipartUploadId;
1150      RequestPayer?: RequestPayer;
1151      /**
1152       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
1153       */
1154      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
1155    }
1156    export interface CompletedMultipartUpload {
1157      /**
1158       * Array of CompletedPart data types.
1159       */
1160      Parts?: CompletedPartList;
1161    }
1162    export interface CompletedPart {
1163      /**
1164       * Entity tag returned when the part was uploaded.
1165       */
1166      ETag?: ETag;
1167      /**
1168       * Part number that identifies the part. This is a positive integer between 1 and 10,000.
1169       */
1170      PartNumber?: PartNumber;
1171    }
1172    export type CompletedPartList = CompletedPart[];
1173    export type CompressionType = "NONE"|"GZIP"|"BZIP2"|string;
1174    export interface Condition {
1175      /**
1176       * The HTTP error code when the redirect is applied. In the event of an error, if the error code equals this value, then the specified redirect is applied. Required when parent element Condition is specified and sibling KeyPrefixEquals is not specified. If both are specified, then both must be true for the redirect to be applied.
1177       */
1178      HttpErrorCodeReturnedEquals?: HttpErrorCodeReturnedEquals;
1179      /**
1180       * The object key name prefix when the redirect is applied. For example, to redirect requests for ExamplePage.html, the key prefix will be ExamplePage.html. To redirect request for all pages with the prefix docs/, the key prefix will be /docs, which identifies all objects in the docs/ folder. Required when the parent element Condition is specified and sibling HttpErrorCodeReturnedEquals is not specified. If both conditions are specified, both must be true for the redirect to be applied.  Replacement must be made for object keys containing special characters (such as carriage returns) when using XML requests. For more information, see  XML related object key constraints. 
1181       */
1182      KeyPrefixEquals?: KeyPrefixEquals;
1183    }
1184    export type ConfirmRemoveSelfBucketAccess = boolean;
1185    export type ContentDisposition = string;
1186    export type ContentEncoding = string;
1187    export type ContentLanguage = string;
1188    export type ContentLength = number;
1189    export type ContentMD5 = string;
1190    export type ContentRange = string;
1191    export type ContentType = string;
1192    export interface ContinuationEvent {
1193    }
1194    export interface CopyObjectOutput {
1195      /**
1196       * Container for all response elements.
1197       */
1198      CopyObjectResult?: CopyObjectResult;
1199      /**
1200       * If the object expiration is configured, the response includes this header.
1201       */
1202      Expiration?: Expiration;
1203      /**
1204       * Version of the copied object in the destination bucket.
1205       */
1206      CopySourceVersionId?: CopySourceVersionId;
1207      /**
1208       * Version ID of the newly created copy.
1209       */
1210      VersionId?: ObjectVersionId;
1211      /**
1212       * The server-side encryption algorithm used when storing this object in Amazon S3 (for example, AES256, aws:kms).
1213       */
1214      ServerSideEncryption?: ServerSideEncryption;
1215      /**
1216       * If server-side encryption with a customer-provided encryption key was requested, the response will include this header confirming the encryption algorithm used.
1217       */
1218      SSECustomerAlgorithm?: SSECustomerAlgorithm;
1219      /**
1220       * If server-side encryption with a customer-provided encryption key was requested, the response will include this header to provide round-trip message integrity verification of the customer-provided encryption key.
1221       */
1222      SSECustomerKeyMD5?: SSECustomerKeyMD5;
1223      /**
1224       * If present, specifies the ID of the Amazon Web Services Key Management Service (Amazon Web Services KMS) symmetric customer managed customer master key (CMK) that was used for the object.
1225       */
1226      SSEKMSKeyId?: SSEKMSKeyId;
1227      /**
1228       * If present, specifies the Amazon Web Services KMS Encryption Context to use for object encryption. The value of this header is a base64-encoded UTF-8 string holding JSON with the encryption context key-value pairs.
1229       */
1230      SSEKMSEncryptionContext?: SSEKMSEncryptionContext;
1231      /**
1232       * Indicates whether the copied object uses an S3 Bucket Key for server-side encryption with Amazon Web Services KMS (SSE-KMS).
1233       */
1234      BucketKeyEnabled?: BucketKeyEnabled;
1235      RequestCharged?: RequestCharged;
1236    }
1237    export interface CopyObjectRequest {
1238      /**
1239       * The canned ACL to apply to the object. This action is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts.
1240       */
1241      ACL?: ObjectCannedACL;
1242      /**
1243       * The name of the destination bucket. When using this action with an access point, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. When using this action with Amazon S3 on Outposts, you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action using S3 on Outposts through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the Outposts bucket ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about S3 on Outposts ARNs, see Using S3 on Outposts in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
1244       */
1245      Bucket: BucketName;
1246      /**
1247       * Specifies caching behavior along the request/reply chain.
1248       */
1249      CacheControl?: CacheControl;
1250      /**
1251       * Specifies presentational information for the object.
1252       */
1253      ContentDisposition?: ContentDisposition;
1254      /**
1255       * Specifies what content encodings have been applied to the object and thus what decoding mechanisms must be applied to obtain the media-type referenced by the Content-Type header field.
1256       */
1257      ContentEncoding?: ContentEncoding;
1258      /**
1259       * The language the content is in.
1260       */
1261      ContentLanguage?: ContentLanguage;
1262      /**
1263       * A standard MIME type describing the format of the object data.
1264       */
1265      ContentType?: ContentType;
1266      /**
1267       * Specifies the source object for the copy operation. You specify the value in one of two formats, depending on whether you want to access the source object through an access point:   For objects not accessed through an access point, specify the name of the source bucket and the key of the source object, separated by a slash (/). For example, to copy the object reports/january.pdf from the bucket awsexamplebucket, use awsexamplebucket/reports/january.pdf. The value must be URL encoded.   For objects accessed through access points, specify the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the object as accessed through the access point, in the format arn:aws:s3:&lt;Region&gt;:&lt;account-id&gt;:accesspoint/&lt;access-point-name&gt;/object/&lt;key&gt;. For example, to copy the object reports/january.pdf through access point my-access-point owned by account 123456789012 in Region us-west-2, use the URL encoding of arn:aws:s3:us-west-2:123456789012:accesspoint/my-access-point/object/reports/january.pdf. The value must be URL encoded.  Amazon S3 supports copy operations using access points only when the source and destination buckets are in the same Amazon Web Services Region.  Alternatively, for objects accessed through Amazon S3 on Outposts, specify the ARN of the object as accessed in the format arn:aws:s3-outposts:&lt;Region&gt;:&lt;account-id&gt;:outpost/&lt;outpost-id&gt;/object/&lt;key&gt;. For example, to copy the object reports/january.pdf through outpost my-outpost owned by account 123456789012 in Region us-west-2, use the URL encoding of arn:aws:s3-outposts:us-west-2:123456789012:outpost/my-outpost/object/reports/january.pdf. The value must be URL encoded.    To copy a specific version of an object, append ?versionId=&lt;version-id&gt; to the value (for example, awsexamplebucket/reports/january.pdf?versionId=QUpfdndhfd8438MNFDN93jdnJFkdmqnh893). If you don't specify a version ID, Amazon S3 copies the latest version of the source object.
1268       */
1269      CopySource: CopySource;
1270      /**
1271       * Copies the object if its entity tag (ETag) matches the specified tag.
1272       */
1273      CopySourceIfMatch?: CopySourceIfMatch;
1274      /**
1275       * Copies the object if it has been modified since the specified time.
1276       */
1277      CopySourceIfModifiedSince?: CopySourceIfModifiedSince;
1278      /**
1279       * Copies the object if its entity tag (ETag) is different than the specified ETag.
1280       */
1281      CopySourceIfNoneMatch?: CopySourceIfNoneMatch;
1282      /**
1283       * Copies the object if it hasn't been modified since the specified time.
1284       */
1285      CopySourceIfUnmodifiedSince?: CopySourceIfUnmodifiedSince;
1286      /**
1287       * The date and time at which the object is no longer cacheable.
1288       */
1289      Expires?: Expires;
1290      /**
1291       * Gives the grantee READ, READ_ACP, and WRITE_ACP permissions on the object. This action is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts.
1292       */
1293      GrantFullControl?: GrantFullControl;
1294      /**
1295       * Allows grantee to read the object data and its metadata. This action is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts.
1296       */
1297      GrantRead?: GrantRead;
1298      /**
1299       * Allows grantee to read the object ACL. This action is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts.
1300       */
1301      GrantReadACP?: GrantReadACP;
1302      /**
1303       * Allows grantee to write the ACL for the applicable object. This action is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts.
1304       */
1305      GrantWriteACP?: GrantWriteACP;
1306      /**
1307       * The key of the destination object.
1308       */
1309      Key: ObjectKey;
1310      /**
1311       * A map of metadata to store with the object in S3.
1312       */
1313      Metadata?: Metadata;
1314      /**
1315       * Specifies whether the metadata is copied from the source object or replaced with metadata provided in the request.
1316       */
1317      MetadataDirective?: MetadataDirective;
1318      /**
1319       * Specifies whether the object tag-set are copied from the source object or replaced with tag-set provided in the request.
1320       */
1321      TaggingDirective?: TaggingDirective;
1322      /**
1323       * The server-side encryption algorithm used when storing this object in Amazon S3 (for example, AES256, aws:kms).
1324       */
1325      ServerSideEncryption?: ServerSideEncryption;
1326      /**
1327       * By default, Amazon S3 uses the STANDARD Storage Class to store newly created objects. The STANDARD storage class provides high durability and high availability. Depending on performance needs, you can specify a different Storage Class. Amazon S3 on Outposts only uses the OUTPOSTS Storage Class. For more information, see Storage Classes in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
1328       */
1329      StorageClass?: StorageClass;
1330      /**
1331       * If the bucket is configured as a website, redirects requests for this object to another object in the same bucket or to an external URL. Amazon S3 stores the value of this header in the object metadata.
1332       */
1333      WebsiteRedirectLocation?: WebsiteRedirectLocation;
1334      /**
1335       * Specifies the algorithm to use to when encrypting the object (for example, AES256).
1336       */
1337      SSECustomerAlgorithm?: SSECustomerAlgorithm;
1338      /**
1339       * Specifies the customer-provided encryption key for Amazon S3 to use in encrypting data. This value is used to store the object and then it is discarded; Amazon S3 does not store the encryption key. The key must be appropriate for use with the algorithm specified in the x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-algorithm header.
1340       */
1341      SSECustomerKey?: SSECustomerKey;
1342      /**
1343       * Specifies the 128-bit MD5 digest of the encryption key according to RFC 1321. Amazon S3 uses this header for a message integrity check to ensure that the encryption key was transmitted without error.
1344       */
1345      SSECustomerKeyMD5?: SSECustomerKeyMD5;
1346      /**
1347       * Specifies the Amazon Web Services KMS key ID to use for object encryption. All GET and PUT requests for an object protected by Amazon Web Services KMS will fail if not made via SSL or using SigV4. For information about configuring using any of the officially supported Amazon Web Services SDKs and Amazon Web Services CLI, see Specifying the Signature Version in Request Authentication in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
1348       */
1349      SSEKMSKeyId?: SSEKMSKeyId;
1350      /**
1351       * Specifies the Amazon Web Services KMS Encryption Context to use for object encryption. The value of this header is a base64-encoded UTF-8 string holding JSON with the encryption context key-value pairs.
1352       */
1353      SSEKMSEncryptionContext?: SSEKMSEncryptionContext;
1354      /**
1355       * Specifies whether Amazon S3 should use an S3 Bucket Key for object encryption with server-side encryption using AWS KMS (SSE-KMS). Setting this header to true causes Amazon S3 to use an S3 Bucket Key for object encryption with SSE-KMS.  Specifying this header with a COPY action doesn’t affect bucket-level settings for S3 Bucket Key.
1356       */
1357      BucketKeyEnabled?: BucketKeyEnabled;
1358      /**
1359       * Specifies the algorithm to use when decrypting the source object (for example, AES256).
1360       */
1361      CopySourceSSECustomerAlgorithm?: CopySourceSSECustomerAlgorithm;
1362      /**
1363       * Specifies the customer-provided encryption key for Amazon S3 to use to decrypt the source object. The encryption key provided in this header must be one that was used when the source object was created.
1364       */
1365      CopySourceSSECustomerKey?: CopySourceSSECustomerKey;
1366      /**
1367       * Specifies the 128-bit MD5 digest of the encryption key according to RFC 1321. Amazon S3 uses this header for a message integrity check to ensure that the encryption key was transmitted without error.
1368       */
1369      CopySourceSSECustomerKeyMD5?: CopySourceSSECustomerKeyMD5;
1370      RequestPayer?: RequestPayer;
1371      /**
1372       * The tag-set for the object destination object this value must be used in conjunction with the TaggingDirective. The tag-set must be encoded as URL Query parameters.
1373       */
1374      Tagging?: TaggingHeader;
1375      /**
1376       * The Object Lock mode that you want to apply to the copied object.
1377       */
1378      ObjectLockMode?: ObjectLockMode;
1379      /**
1380       * The date and time when you want the copied object's Object Lock to expire.
1381       */
1382      ObjectLockRetainUntilDate?: ObjectLockRetainUntilDate;
1383      /**
1384       * Specifies whether you want to apply a Legal Hold to the copied object.
1385       */
1386      ObjectLockLegalHoldStatus?: ObjectLockLegalHoldStatus;
1387      /**
1388       * The account ID of the expected destination bucket owner. If the destination bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
1389       */
1390      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
1391      /**
1392       * The account ID of the expected source bucket owner. If the source bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
1393       */
1394      ExpectedSourceBucketOwner?: AccountId;
1395    }
1396    export interface CopyObjectResult {
1397      /**
1398       * Returns the ETag of the new object. The ETag reflects only changes to the contents of an object, not its metadata.
1399       */
1400      ETag?: ETag;
1401      /**
1402       * Creation date of the object.
1403       */
1404      LastModified?: LastModified;
1405    }
1406    export interface CopyPartResult {
1407      /**
1408       * Entity tag of the object.
1409       */
1410      ETag?: ETag;
1411      /**
1412       * Date and time at which the object was uploaded.
1413       */
1414      LastModified?: LastModified;
1415    }
1416    export type CopySource = string;
1417    export type CopySourceIfMatch = string;
1418    export type CopySourceIfModifiedSince = Date;
1419    export type CopySourceIfNoneMatch = string;
1420    export type CopySourceIfUnmodifiedSince = Date;
1421    export type CopySourceRange = string;
1422    export type CopySourceSSECustomerAlgorithm = string;
1423    export type CopySourceSSECustomerKey = Buffer|Uint8Array|Blob|string;
1424    export type CopySourceSSECustomerKeyMD5 = string;
1425    export type CopySourceVersionId = string;
1426    export interface CreateBucketConfiguration {
1427      /**
1428       * Specifies the Region where the bucket will be created. If you don't specify a Region, the bucket is created in the US East (N. Virginia) Region (us-east-1).
1429       */
1430      LocationConstraint?: BucketLocationConstraint;
1431    }
1432    export interface CreateBucketOutput {
1433      /**
1434       * Specifies the Region where the bucket will be created. If you are creating a bucket on the US East (N. Virginia) Region (us-east-1), you do not need to specify the location.
1435       */
1436      Location?: Location;
1437    }
1438    export interface CreateBucketRequest {
1439      /**
1440       * The canned ACL to apply to the bucket.
1441       */
1442      ACL?: BucketCannedACL;
1443      /**
1444       * The name of the bucket to create.
1445       */
1446      Bucket: BucketName;
1447      /**
1448       * The configuration information for the bucket.
1449       */
1450      CreateBucketConfiguration?: CreateBucketConfiguration;
1451      /**
1452       * Allows grantee the read, write, read ACP, and write ACP permissions on the bucket.
1453       */
1454      GrantFullControl?: GrantFullControl;
1455      /**
1456       * Allows grantee to list the objects in the bucket.
1457       */
1458      GrantRead?: GrantRead;
1459      /**
1460       * Allows grantee to read the bucket ACL.
1461       */
1462      GrantReadACP?: GrantReadACP;
1463      /**
1464       * Allows grantee to create new objects in the bucket. For the bucket and object owners of existing objects, also allows deletions and overwrites of those objects.
1465       */
1466      GrantWrite?: GrantWrite;
1467      /**
1468       * Allows grantee to write the ACL for the applicable bucket.
1469       */
1470      GrantWriteACP?: GrantWriteACP;
1471      /**
1472       * Specifies whether you want S3 Object Lock to be enabled for the new bucket.
1473       */
1474      ObjectLockEnabledForBucket?: ObjectLockEnabledForBucket;
1475    }
1476    export interface CreateMultipartUploadOutput {
1477      /**
1478       * If the bucket has a lifecycle rule configured with an action to abort incomplete multipart uploads and the prefix in the lifecycle rule matches the object name in the request, the response includes this header. The header indicates when the initiated multipart upload becomes eligible for an abort operation. For more information, see  Aborting Incomplete Multipart Uploads Using a Bucket Lifecycle Policy. The response also includes the x-amz-abort-rule-id header that provides the ID of the lifecycle configuration rule that defines this action.
1479       */
1480      AbortDate?: AbortDate;
1481      /**
1482       * This header is returned along with the x-amz-abort-date header. It identifies the applicable lifecycle configuration rule that defines the action to abort incomplete multipart uploads.
1483       */
1484      AbortRuleId?: AbortRuleId;
1485      /**
1486       * The name of the bucket to which the multipart upload was initiated. Does not return the access point ARN or access point alias if used. When using this action with an access point, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. When using this action with Amazon S3 on Outposts, you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action using S3 on Outposts through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the Outposts bucket ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about S3 on Outposts ARNs, see Using S3 on Outposts in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
1487       */
1488      Bucket?: BucketName;
1489      /**
1490       * Object key for which the multipart upload was initiated.
1491       */
1492      Key?: ObjectKey;
1493      /**
1494       * ID for the initiated multipart upload.
1495       */
1496      UploadId?: MultipartUploadId;
1497      /**
1498       * The server-side encryption algorithm used when storing this object in Amazon S3 (for example, AES256, aws:kms).
1499       */
1500      ServerSideEncryption?: ServerSideEncryption;
1501      /**
1502       * If server-side encryption with a customer-provided encryption key was requested, the response will include this header confirming the encryption algorithm used.
1503       */
1504      SSECustomerAlgorithm?: SSECustomerAlgorithm;
1505      /**
1506       * If server-side encryption with a customer-provided encryption key was requested, the response will include this header to provide round-trip message integrity verification of the customer-provided encryption key.
1507       */
1508      SSECustomerKeyMD5?: SSECustomerKeyMD5;
1509      /**
1510       * If present, specifies the ID of the Amazon Web Services Key Management Service (Amazon Web Services KMS) symmetric customer managed customer master key (CMK) that was used for the object.
1511       */
1512      SSEKMSKeyId?: SSEKMSKeyId;
1513      /**
1514       * If present, specifies the Amazon Web Services KMS Encryption Context to use for object encryption. The value of this header is a base64-encoded UTF-8 string holding JSON with the encryption context key-value pairs.
1515       */
1516      SSEKMSEncryptionContext?: SSEKMSEncryptionContext;
1517      /**
1518       * Indicates whether the multipart upload uses an S3 Bucket Key for server-side encryption with Amazon Web Services KMS (SSE-KMS).
1519       */
1520      BucketKeyEnabled?: BucketKeyEnabled;
1521      RequestCharged?: RequestCharged;
1522    }
1523    export interface CreateMultipartUploadRequest {
1524      /**
1525       * The canned ACL to apply to the object. This action is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts.
1526       */
1527      ACL?: ObjectCannedACL;
1528      /**
1529       * The name of the bucket to which to initiate the upload When using this action with an access point, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. When using this action with Amazon S3 on Outposts, you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action using S3 on Outposts through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the Outposts bucket ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about S3 on Outposts ARNs, see Using S3 on Outposts in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
1530       */
1531      Bucket: BucketName;
1532      /**
1533       * Specifies caching behavior along the request/reply chain.
1534       */
1535      CacheControl?: CacheControl;
1536      /**
1537       * Specifies presentational information for the object.
1538       */
1539      ContentDisposition?: ContentDisposition;
1540      /**
1541       * Specifies what content encodings have been applied to the object and thus what decoding mechanisms must be applied to obtain the media-type referenced by the Content-Type header field.
1542       */
1543      ContentEncoding?: ContentEncoding;
1544      /**
1545       * The language the content is in.
1546       */
1547      ContentLanguage?: ContentLanguage;
1548      /**
1549       * A standard MIME type describing the format of the object data.
1550       */
1551      ContentType?: ContentType;
1552      /**
1553       * The date and time at which the object is no longer cacheable.
1554       */
1555      Expires?: Expires;
1556      /**
1557       * Gives the grantee READ, READ_ACP, and WRITE_ACP permissions on the object. This action is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts.
1558       */
1559      GrantFullControl?: GrantFullControl;
1560      /**
1561       * Allows grantee to read the object data and its metadata. This action is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts.
1562       */
1563      GrantRead?: GrantRead;
1564      /**
1565       * Allows grantee to read the object ACL. This action is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts.
1566       */
1567      GrantReadACP?: GrantReadACP;
1568      /**
1569       * Allows grantee to write the ACL for the applicable object. This action is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts.
1570       */
1571      GrantWriteACP?: GrantWriteACP;
1572      /**
1573       * Object key for which the multipart upload is to be initiated.
1574       */
1575      Key: ObjectKey;
1576      /**
1577       * A map of metadata to store with the object in S3.
1578       */
1579      Metadata?: Metadata;
1580      /**
1581       * The server-side encryption algorithm used when storing this object in Amazon S3 (for example, AES256, aws:kms).
1582       */
1583      ServerSideEncryption?: ServerSideEncryption;
1584      /**
1585       * By default, Amazon S3 uses the STANDARD Storage Class to store newly created objects. The STANDARD storage class provides high durability and high availability. Depending on performance needs, you can specify a different Storage Class. Amazon S3 on Outposts only uses the OUTPOSTS Storage Class. For more information, see Storage Classes in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
1586       */
1587      StorageClass?: StorageClass;
1588      /**
1589       * If the bucket is configured as a website, redirects requests for this object to another object in the same bucket or to an external URL. Amazon S3 stores the value of this header in the object metadata.
1590       */
1591      WebsiteRedirectLocation?: WebsiteRedirectLocation;
1592      /**
1593       * Specifies the algorithm to use to when encrypting the object (for example, AES256).
1594       */
1595      SSECustomerAlgorithm?: SSECustomerAlgorithm;
1596      /**
1597       * Specifies the customer-provided encryption key for Amazon S3 to use in encrypting data. This value is used to store the object and then it is discarded; Amazon S3 does not store the encryption key. The key must be appropriate for use with the algorithm specified in the x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-algorithm header.
1598       */
1599      SSECustomerKey?: SSECustomerKey;
1600      /**
1601       * Specifies the 128-bit MD5 digest of the encryption key according to RFC 1321. Amazon S3 uses this header for a message integrity check to ensure that the encryption key was transmitted without error.
1602       */
1603      SSECustomerKeyMD5?: SSECustomerKeyMD5;
1604      /**
1605       * Specifies the ID of the symmetric customer managed Amazon Web Services KMS CMK to use for object encryption. All GET and PUT requests for an object protected by Amazon Web Services KMS will fail if not made via SSL or using SigV4. For information about configuring using any of the officially supported Amazon Web Services SDKs and Amazon Web Services CLI, see Specifying the Signature Version in Request Authentication in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
1606       */
1607      SSEKMSKeyId?: SSEKMSKeyId;
1608      /**
1609       * Specifies the Amazon Web Services KMS Encryption Context to use for object encryption. The value of this header is a base64-encoded UTF-8 string holding JSON with the encryption context key-value pairs.
1610       */
1611      SSEKMSEncryptionContext?: SSEKMSEncryptionContext;
1612      /**
1613       * Specifies whether Amazon S3 should use an S3 Bucket Key for object encryption with server-side encryption using AWS KMS (SSE-KMS). Setting this header to true causes Amazon S3 to use an S3 Bucket Key for object encryption with SSE-KMS. Specifying this header with an object action doesn’t affect bucket-level settings for S3 Bucket Key.
1614       */
1615      BucketKeyEnabled?: BucketKeyEnabled;
1616      RequestPayer?: RequestPayer;
1617      /**
1618       * The tag-set for the object. The tag-set must be encoded as URL Query parameters.
1619       */
1620      Tagging?: TaggingHeader;
1621      /**
1622       * Specifies the Object Lock mode that you want to apply to the uploaded object.
1623       */
1624      ObjectLockMode?: ObjectLockMode;
1625      /**
1626       * Specifies the date and time when you want the Object Lock to expire.
1627       */
1628      ObjectLockRetainUntilDate?: ObjectLockRetainUntilDate;
1629      /**
1630       * Specifies whether you want to apply a Legal Hold to the uploaded object.
1631       */
1632      ObjectLockLegalHoldStatus?: ObjectLockLegalHoldStatus;
1633      /**
1634       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
1635       */
1636      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
1637    }
1638    export type CreationDate = Date;
1639    export type _Date = Date;
1640    export type Days = number;
1641    export type DaysAfterInitiation = number;
1642    export interface DefaultRetention {
1643      /**
1644       * The default Object Lock retention mode you want to apply to new objects placed in the specified bucket. Must be used with either Days or Years.
1645       */
1646      Mode?: ObjectLockRetentionMode;
1647      /**
1648       * The number of days that you want to specify for the default retention period. Must be used with Mode.
1649       */
1650      Days?: Days;
1651      /**
1652       * The number of years that you want to specify for the default retention period. Must be used with Mode.
1653       */
1654      Years?: Years;
1655    }
1656    export interface Delete {
1657      /**
1658       * The objects to delete.
1659       */
1660      Objects: ObjectIdentifierList;
1661      /**
1662       * Element to enable quiet mode for the request. When you add this element, you must set its value to true.
1663       */
1664      Quiet?: Quiet;
1665    }
1666    export interface DeleteBucketAnalyticsConfigurationRequest {
1667      /**
1668       * The name of the bucket from which an analytics configuration is deleted.
1669       */
1670      Bucket: BucketName;
1671      /**
1672       * The ID that identifies the analytics configuration.
1673       */
1674      Id: AnalyticsId;
1675      /**
1676       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
1677       */
1678      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
1679    }
1680    export interface DeleteBucketCorsRequest {
1681      /**
1682       * Specifies the bucket whose cors configuration is being deleted.
1683       */
1684      Bucket: BucketName;
1685      /**
1686       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
1687       */
1688      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
1689    }
1690    export interface DeleteBucketEncryptionRequest {
1691      /**
1692       * The name of the bucket containing the server-side encryption configuration to delete.
1693       */
1694      Bucket: BucketName;
1695      /**
1696       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
1697       */
1698      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
1699    }
1700    export interface DeleteBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurationRequest {
1701      /**
1702       * The name of the Amazon S3 bucket whose configuration you want to modify or retrieve.
1703       */
1704      Bucket: BucketName;
1705      /**
1706       * The ID used to identify the S3 Intelligent-Tiering configuration.
1707       */
1708      Id: IntelligentTieringId;
1709    }
1710    export interface DeleteBucketInventoryConfigurationRequest {
1711      /**
1712       * The name of the bucket containing the inventory configuration to delete.
1713       */
1714      Bucket: BucketName;
1715      /**
1716       * The ID used to identify the inventory configuration.
1717       */
1718      Id: InventoryId;
1719      /**
1720       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
1721       */
1722      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
1723    }
1724    export interface DeleteBucketLifecycleRequest {
1725      /**
1726       * The bucket name of the lifecycle to delete.
1727       */
1728      Bucket: BucketName;
1729      /**
1730       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
1731       */
1732      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
1733    }
1734    export interface DeleteBucketMetricsConfigurationRequest {
1735      /**
1736       * The name of the bucket containing the metrics configuration to delete.
1737       */
1738      Bucket: BucketName;
1739      /**
1740       * The ID used to identify the metrics configuration.
1741       */
1742      Id: MetricsId;
1743      /**
1744       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
1745       */
1746      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
1747    }
1748    export interface DeleteBucketOwnershipControlsRequest {
1749      /**
1750       * The Amazon S3 bucket whose OwnershipControls you want to delete. 
1751       */
1752      Bucket: BucketName;
1753      /**
1754       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
1755       */
1756      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
1757    }
1758    export interface DeleteBucketPolicyRequest {
1759      /**
1760       * The bucket name.
1761       */
1762      Bucket: BucketName;
1763      /**
1764       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
1765       */
1766      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
1767    }
1768    export interface DeleteBucketReplicationRequest {
1769      /**
1770       *  The bucket name. 
1771       */
1772      Bucket: BucketName;
1773      /**
1774       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
1775       */
1776      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
1777    }
1778    export interface DeleteBucketRequest {
1779      /**
1780       * Specifies the bucket being deleted.
1781       */
1782      Bucket: BucketName;
1783      /**
1784       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
1785       */
1786      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
1787    }
1788    export interface DeleteBucketTaggingRequest {
1789      /**
1790       * The bucket that has the tag set to be removed.
1791       */
1792      Bucket: BucketName;
1793      /**
1794       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
1795       */
1796      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
1797    }
1798    export interface DeleteBucketWebsiteRequest {
1799      /**
1800       * The bucket name for which you want to remove the website configuration. 
1801       */
1802      Bucket: BucketName;
1803      /**
1804       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
1805       */
1806      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
1807    }
1808    export type DeleteMarker = boolean;
1809    export interface DeleteMarkerEntry {
1810      /**
1811       * The account that created the delete marker.&gt;
1812       */
1813      Owner?: Owner;
1814      /**
1815       * The object key.
1816       */
1817      Key?: ObjectKey;
1818      /**
1819       * Version ID of an object.
1820       */
1821      VersionId?: ObjectVersionId;
1822      /**
1823       * Specifies whether the object is (true) or is not (false) the latest version of an object.
1824       */
1825      IsLatest?: IsLatest;
1826      /**
1827       * Date and time the object was last modified.
1828       */
1829      LastModified?: LastModified;
1830    }
1831    export interface DeleteMarkerReplication {
1832      /**
1833       * Indicates whether to replicate delete markers.  Indicates whether to replicate delete markers. 
1834       */
1835      Status?: DeleteMarkerReplicationStatus;
1836    }
1837    export type DeleteMarkerReplicationStatus = "Enabled"|"Disabled"|string;
1838    export type DeleteMarkerVersionId = string;
1839    export type DeleteMarkers = DeleteMarkerEntry[];
1840    export interface DeleteObjectOutput {
1841      /**
1842       * Specifies whether the versioned object that was permanently deleted was (true) or was not (false) a delete marker.
1843       */
1844      DeleteMarker?: DeleteMarker;
1845      /**
1846       * Returns the version ID of the delete marker created as a result of the DELETE operation.
1847       */
1848      VersionId?: ObjectVersionId;
1849      RequestCharged?: RequestCharged;
1850    }
1851    export interface DeleteObjectRequest {
1852      /**
1853       * The bucket name of the bucket containing the object.  When using this action with an access point, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. When using this action with Amazon S3 on Outposts, you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action using S3 on Outposts through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the Outposts bucket ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about S3 on Outposts ARNs, see Using S3 on Outposts in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
1854       */
1855      Bucket: BucketName;
1856      /**
1857       * Key name of the object to delete.
1858       */
1859      Key: ObjectKey;
1860      /**
1861       * The concatenation of the authentication device's serial number, a space, and the value that is displayed on your authentication device. Required to permanently delete a versioned object if versioning is configured with MFA delete enabled.
1862       */
1863      MFA?: MFA;
1864      /**
1865       * VersionId used to reference a specific version of the object.
1866       */
1867      VersionId?: ObjectVersionId;
1868      RequestPayer?: RequestPayer;
1869      /**
1870       * Indicates whether S3 Object Lock should bypass Governance-mode restrictions to process this operation. To use this header, you must have the s3:PutBucketPublicAccessBlock permission.
1871       */
1872      BypassGovernanceRetention?: BypassGovernanceRetention;
1873      /**
1874       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
1875       */
1876      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
1877    }
1878    export interface DeleteObjectTaggingOutput {
1879      /**
1880       * The versionId of the object the tag-set was removed from.
1881       */
1882      VersionId?: ObjectVersionId;
1883    }
1884    export interface DeleteObjectTaggingRequest {
1885      /**
1886       * The bucket name containing the objects from which to remove the tags.  When using this action with an access point, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. When using this action with Amazon S3 on Outposts, you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action using S3 on Outposts through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the Outposts bucket ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about S3 on Outposts ARNs, see Using S3 on Outposts in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
1887       */
1888      Bucket: BucketName;
1889      /**
1890       * The key that identifies the object in the bucket from which to remove all tags.
1891       */
1892      Key: ObjectKey;
1893      /**
1894       * The versionId of the object that the tag-set will be removed from.
1895       */
1896      VersionId?: ObjectVersionId;
1897      /**
1898       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
1899       */
1900      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
1901    }
1902    export interface DeleteObjectsOutput {
1903      /**
1904       * Container element for a successful delete. It identifies the object that was successfully deleted.
1905       */
1906      Deleted?: DeletedObjects;
1907      RequestCharged?: RequestCharged;
1908      /**
1909       * Container for a failed delete action that describes the object that Amazon S3 attempted to delete and the error it encountered.
1910       */
1911      Errors?: Errors;
1912    }
1913    export interface DeleteObjectsRequest {
1914      /**
1915       * The bucket name containing the objects to delete.  When using this action with an access point, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. When using this action with Amazon S3 on Outposts, you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action using S3 on Outposts through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the Outposts bucket ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about S3 on Outposts ARNs, see Using S3 on Outposts in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
1916       */
1917      Bucket: BucketName;
1918      /**
1919       * Container for the request.
1920       */
1921      Delete: Delete;
1922      /**
1923       * The concatenation of the authentication device's serial number, a space, and the value that is displayed on your authentication device. Required to permanently delete a versioned object if versioning is configured with MFA delete enabled.
1924       */
1925      MFA?: MFA;
1926      RequestPayer?: RequestPayer;
1927      /**
1928       * Specifies whether you want to delete this object even if it has a Governance-type Object Lock in place. To use this header, you must have the s3:PutBucketPublicAccessBlock permission.
1929       */
1930      BypassGovernanceRetention?: BypassGovernanceRetention;
1931      /**
1932       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
1933       */
1934      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
1935    }
1936    export interface DeletePublicAccessBlockRequest {
1937      /**
1938       * The Amazon S3 bucket whose PublicAccessBlock configuration you want to delete. 
1939       */
1940      Bucket: BucketName;
1941      /**
1942       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
1943       */
1944      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
1945    }
1946    export interface DeletedObject {
1947      /**
1948       * The name of the deleted object.
1949       */
1950      Key?: ObjectKey;
1951      /**
1952       * The version ID of the deleted object.
1953       */
1954      VersionId?: ObjectVersionId;
1955      /**
1956       * Specifies whether the versioned object that was permanently deleted was (true) or was not (false) a delete marker. In a simple DELETE, this header indicates whether (true) or not (false) a delete marker was created.
1957       */
1958      DeleteMarker?: DeleteMarker;
1959      /**
1960       * The version ID of the delete marker created as a result of the DELETE operation. If you delete a specific object version, the value returned by this header is the version ID of the object version deleted.
1961       */
1962      DeleteMarkerVersionId?: DeleteMarkerVersionId;
1963    }
1964    export type DeletedObjects = DeletedObject[];
1965    export type Delimiter = string;
1966    export type Description = string;
1967    export interface Destination {
1968      /**
1969       *  The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the bucket where you want Amazon S3 to store the results.
1970       */
1971      Bucket: BucketName;
1972      /**
1973       * Destination bucket owner account ID. In a cross-account scenario, if you direct Amazon S3 to change replica ownership to the Amazon Web Services account that owns the destination bucket by specifying the AccessControlTranslation property, this is the account ID of the destination bucket owner. For more information, see Replication Additional Configuration: Changing the Replica Owner in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
1974       */
1975      Account?: AccountId;
1976      /**
1977       *  The storage class to use when replicating objects, such as S3 Standard or reduced redundancy. By default, Amazon S3 uses the storage class of the source object to create the object replica.  For valid values, see the StorageClass element of the PUT Bucket replication action in the Amazon S3 API Reference.
1978       */
1979      StorageClass?: StorageClass;
1980      /**
1981       * Specify this only in a cross-account scenario (where source and destination bucket owners are not the same), and you want to change replica ownership to the Amazon Web Services account that owns the destination bucket. If this is not specified in the replication configuration, the replicas are owned by same Amazon Web Services account that owns the source object.
1982       */
1983      AccessControlTranslation?: AccessControlTranslation;
1984      /**
1985       * A container that provides information about encryption. If SourceSelectionCriteria is specified, you must specify this element.
1986       */
1987      EncryptionConfiguration?: EncryptionConfiguration;
1988      /**
1989       *  A container specifying S3 Replication Time Control (S3 RTC), including whether S3 RTC is enabled and the time when all objects and operations on objects must be replicated. Must be specified together with a Metrics block. 
1990       */
1991      ReplicationTime?: ReplicationTime;
1992      /**
1993       *  A container specifying replication metrics-related settings enabling replication metrics and events. 
1994       */
1995      Metrics?: Metrics;
1996    }
1997    export type DisplayName = string;
1998    export type ETag = string;
1999    export type EmailAddress = string;
2000    export type EnableRequestProgress = boolean;
2001    export type EncodingType = "url"|string;
2002    export interface Encryption {
2003      /**
2004       * The server-side encryption algorithm used when storing job results in Amazon S3 (for example, AES256, aws:kms).
2005       */
2006      EncryptionType: ServerSideEncryption;
2007      /**
2008       * If the encryption type is aws:kms, this optional value specifies the ID of the symmetric customer managed Amazon Web Services KMS CMK to use for encryption of job results. Amazon S3 only supports symmetric CMKs. For more information, see Using symmetric and asymmetric keys in the Amazon Web Services Key Management Service Developer Guide.
2009       */
2010      KMSKeyId?: SSEKMSKeyId;
2011      /**
2012       * If the encryption type is aws:kms, this optional value can be used to specify the encryption context for the restore results.
2013       */
2014      KMSContext?: KMSContext;
2015    }
2016    export interface EncryptionConfiguration {
2017      /**
2018       * Specifies the ID (Key ARN or Alias ARN) of the customer managed Amazon Web Services KMS key stored in Amazon Web Services Key Management Service (KMS) for the destination bucket. Amazon S3 uses this key to encrypt replica objects. Amazon S3 only supports symmetric, customer managed KMS keys. For more information, see Using symmetric and asymmetric keys in the Amazon Web Services Key Management Service Developer Guide.
2019       */
2020      ReplicaKmsKeyID?: ReplicaKmsKeyID;
2021    }
2022    export type End = number;
2023    export interface EndEvent {
2024    }
2025    export interface Error {
2026      /**
2027       * The error key.
2028       */
2029      Key?: ObjectKey;
2030      /**
2031       * The version ID of the error.
2032       */
2033      VersionId?: ObjectVersionId;
2034      /**
2035       * The error code is a string that uniquely identifies an error condition. It is meant to be read and understood by programs that detect and handle errors by type.   Amazon S3 error codes       Code: AccessDenied     Description: Access Denied    HTTP Status Code: 403 Forbidden    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: AccountProblem    Description: There is a problem with your Amazon Web Services account that prevents the action from completing successfully. Contact Amazon Web Services Support for further assistance.    HTTP Status Code: 403 Forbidden    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: AllAccessDisabled    Description: All access to this Amazon S3 resource has been disabled. Contact Amazon Web Services Support for further assistance.    HTTP Status Code: 403 Forbidden    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: AmbiguousGrantByEmailAddress    Description: The email address you provided is associated with more than one account.    HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: AuthorizationHeaderMalformed    Description: The authorization header you provided is invalid.    HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request    HTTP Status Code: N/A        Code: BadDigest    Description: The Content-MD5 you specified did not match what we received.    HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: BucketAlreadyExists    Description: The requested bucket name is not available. The bucket namespace is shared by all users of the system. Please select a different name and try again.    HTTP Status Code: 409 Conflict    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: BucketAlreadyOwnedByYou    Description: The bucket you tried to create already exists, and you own it. Amazon S3 returns this error in all Amazon Web Services Regions except in the North Virginia Region. For legacy compatibility, if you re-create an existing bucket that you already own in the North Virginia Region, Amazon S3 returns 200 OK and resets the bucket access control lists (ACLs).    Code: 409 Conflict (in all Regions except the North Virginia Region)     SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: BucketNotEmpty    Description: The bucket you tried to delete is not empty.    HTTP Status Code: 409 Conflict    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: CredentialsNotSupported    Description: This request does not support credentials.    HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: CrossLocationLoggingProhibited    Description: Cross-location logging not allowed. Buckets in one geographic location cannot log information to a bucket in another location.    HTTP Status Code: 403 Forbidden    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: EntityTooSmall    Description: Your proposed upload is smaller than the minimum allowed object size.    HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: EntityTooLarge    Description: Your proposed upload exceeds the maximum allowed object size.    HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: ExpiredToken    Description: The provided token has expired.    HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: IllegalVersioningConfigurationException     Description: Indicates that the versioning configuration specified in the request is invalid.    HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: IncompleteBody    Description: You did not provide the number of bytes specified by the Content-Length HTTP header    HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: IncorrectNumberOfFilesInPostRequest    Description: POST requires exactly one file upload per request.    HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: InlineDataTooLarge    Description: Inline data exceeds the maximum allowed size.    HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: InternalError    Description: We encountered an internal error. Please try again.    HTTP Status Code: 500 Internal Server Error    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Server        Code: InvalidAccessKeyId    Description: The Amazon Web Services access key ID you provided does not exist in our records.    HTTP Status Code: 403 Forbidden    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: InvalidAddressingHeader    Description: You must specify the Anonymous role.    HTTP Status Code: N/A    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: InvalidArgument    Description: Invalid Argument    HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: InvalidBucketName    Description: The specified bucket is not valid.    HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: InvalidBucketState    Description: The request is not valid with the current state of the bucket.    HTTP Status Code: 409 Conflict    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: InvalidDigest    Description: The Content-MD5 you specified is not valid.    HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: InvalidEncryptionAlgorithmError    Description: The encryption request you specified is not valid. The valid value is AES256.    HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: InvalidLocationConstraint    Description: The specified location constraint is not valid. For more information about Regions, see How to Select a Region for Your Buckets.     HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: InvalidObjectState    Description: The action is not valid for the current state of the object.    HTTP Status Code: 403 Forbidden    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: InvalidPart    Description: One or more of the specified parts could not be found. The part might not have been uploaded, or the specified entity tag might not have matched the part's entity tag.    HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: InvalidPartOrder    Description: The list of parts was not in ascending order. Parts list must be specified in order by part number.    HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: InvalidPayer    Description: All access to this object has been disabled. Please contact Amazon Web Services Support for further assistance.    HTTP Status Code: 403 Forbidden    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: InvalidPolicyDocument    Description: The content of the form does not meet the conditions specified in the policy document.    HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: InvalidRange    Description: The requested range cannot be satisfied.    HTTP Status Code: 416 Requested Range Not Satisfiable    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: InvalidRequest    Description: Please use AWS4-HMAC-SHA256.    HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request    Code: N/A        Code: InvalidRequest    Description: SOAP requests must be made over an HTTPS connection.    HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: InvalidRequest    Description: Amazon S3 Transfer Acceleration is not supported for buckets with non-DNS compliant names.    HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request    Code: N/A        Code: InvalidRequest    Description: Amazon S3 Transfer Acceleration is not supported for buckets with periods (.) in their names.    HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request    Code: N/A        Code: InvalidRequest    Description: Amazon S3 Transfer Accelerate endpoint only supports virtual style requests.    HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request    Code: N/A        Code: InvalidRequest    Description: Amazon S3 Transfer Accelerate is not configured on this bucket.    HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request    Code: N/A        Code: InvalidRequest    Description: Amazon S3 Transfer Accelerate is disabled on this bucket.    HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request    Code: N/A        Code: InvalidRequest    Description: Amazon S3 Transfer Acceleration is not supported on this bucket. Contact Amazon Web Services Support for more information.    HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request    Code: N/A        Code: InvalidRequest    Description: Amazon S3 Transfer Acceleration cannot be enabled on this bucket. Contact Amazon Web Services Support for more information.    HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request    Code: N/A        Code: InvalidSecurity    Description: The provided security credentials are not valid.    HTTP Status Code: 403 Forbidden    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: InvalidSOAPRequest    Description: The SOAP request body is invalid.    HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: InvalidStorageClass    Description: The storage class you specified is not valid.    HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: InvalidTargetBucketForLogging    Description: The target bucket for logging does not exist, is not owned by you, or does not have the appropriate grants for the log-delivery group.     HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: InvalidToken    Description: The provided token is malformed or otherwise invalid.    HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: InvalidURI    Description: Couldn't parse the specified URI.    HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: KeyTooLongError    Description: Your key is too long.    HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: MalformedACLError    Description: The XML you provided was not well-formed or did not validate against our published schema.    HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: MalformedPOSTRequest     Description: The body of your POST request is not well-formed multipart/form-data.    HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: MalformedXML    Description: This happens when the user sends malformed XML (XML that doesn't conform to the published XSD) for the configuration. The error message is, "The XML you provided was not well-formed or did not validate against our published schema."     HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: MaxMessageLengthExceeded    Description: Your request was too big.    HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: MaxPostPreDataLengthExceededError    Description: Your POST request fields preceding the upload file were too large.    HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: MetadataTooLarge    Description: Your metadata headers exceed the maximum allowed metadata size.    HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: MethodNotAllowed    Description: The specified method is not allowed against this resource.    HTTP Status Code: 405 Method Not Allowed    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: MissingAttachment    Description: A SOAP attachment was expected, but none were found.    HTTP Status Code: N/A    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: MissingContentLength    Description: You must provide the Content-Length HTTP header.    HTTP Status Code: 411 Length Required    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: MissingRequestBodyError    Description: This happens when the user sends an empty XML document as a request. The error message is, "Request body is empty."     HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: MissingSecurityElement    Description: The SOAP 1.1 request is missing a security element.    HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: MissingSecurityHeader    Description: Your request is missing a required header.    HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: NoLoggingStatusForKey    Description: There is no such thing as a logging status subresource for a key.    HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: NoSuchBucket    Description: The specified bucket does not exist.    HTTP Status Code: 404 Not Found    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: NoSuchBucketPolicy    Description: The specified bucket does not have a bucket policy.    HTTP Status Code: 404 Not Found    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: NoSuchKey    Description: The specified key does not exist.    HTTP Status Code: 404 Not Found    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: NoSuchLifecycleConfiguration    Description: The lifecycle configuration does not exist.     HTTP Status Code: 404 Not Found    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: NoSuchUpload    Description: The specified multipart upload does not exist. The upload ID might be invalid, or the multipart upload might have been aborted or completed.    HTTP Status Code: 404 Not Found    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: NoSuchVersion     Description: Indicates that the version ID specified in the request does not match an existing version.    HTTP Status Code: 404 Not Found    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: NotImplemented    Description: A header you provided implies functionality that is not implemented.    HTTP Status Code: 501 Not Implemented    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Server        Code: NotSignedUp    Description: Your account is not signed up for the Amazon S3 service. You must sign up before you can use Amazon S3. You can sign up at the following URL: Amazon S3     HTTP Status Code: 403 Forbidden    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: OperationAborted    Description: A conflicting conditional action is currently in progress against this resource. Try again.    HTTP Status Code: 409 Conflict    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: PermanentRedirect    Description: The bucket you are attempting to access must be addressed using the specified endpoint. Send all future requests to this endpoint.    HTTP Status Code: 301 Moved Permanently    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: PreconditionFailed    Description: At least one of the preconditions you specified did not hold.    HTTP Status Code: 412 Precondition Failed    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: Redirect    Description: Temporary redirect.    HTTP Status Code: 307 Moved Temporarily    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: RestoreAlreadyInProgress    Description: Object restore is already in progress.    HTTP Status Code: 409 Conflict    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: RequestIsNotMultiPartContent    Description: Bucket POST must be of the enclosure-type multipart/form-data.    HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: RequestTimeout    Description: Your socket connection to the server was not read from or written to within the timeout period.    HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: RequestTimeTooSkewed    Description: The difference between the request time and the server's time is too large.    HTTP Status Code: 403 Forbidden    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: RequestTorrentOfBucketError    Description: Requesting the torrent file of a bucket is not permitted.    HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: SignatureDoesNotMatch    Description: The request signature we calculated does not match the signature you provided. Check your Amazon Web Services secret access key and signing method. For more information, see REST Authentication and SOAP Authentication for details.    HTTP Status Code: 403 Forbidden    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: ServiceUnavailable    Description: Reduce your request rate.    HTTP Status Code: 503 Service Unavailable    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Server        Code: SlowDown    Description: Reduce your request rate.    HTTP Status Code: 503 Slow Down    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Server        Code: TemporaryRedirect    Description: You are being redirected to the bucket while DNS updates.    HTTP Status Code: 307 Moved Temporarily    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: TokenRefreshRequired    Description: The provided token must be refreshed.    HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: TooManyBuckets    Description: You have attempted to create more buckets than allowed.    HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: UnexpectedContent    Description: This request does not support content.    HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: UnresolvableGrantByEmailAddress    Description: The email address you provided does not match any account on record.    HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client        Code: UserKeyMustBeSpecified    Description: The bucket POST must contain the specified field name. If it is specified, check the order of the fields.    HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request    SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client     
2036       */
2037      Code?: Code;
2038      /**
2039       * The error message contains a generic description of the error condition in English. It is intended for a human audience. Simple programs display the message directly to the end user if they encounter an error condition they don't know how or don't care to handle. Sophisticated programs with more exhaustive error handling and proper internationalization are more likely to ignore the error message.
2040       */
2041      Message?: Message;
2042    }
2043    export type ErrorCode = string;
2044    export interface ErrorDocument {
2045      /**
2046       * The object key name to use when a 4XX class error occurs.  Replacement must be made for object keys containing special characters (such as carriage returns) when using XML requests. For more information, see  XML related object key constraints. 
2047       */
2048      Key: ObjectKey;
2049    }
2050    export type ErrorMessage = string;
2051    export type Errors = Error[];
2052    export type Event = "s3:ReducedRedundancyLostObject"|"s3:ObjectCreated:*"|"s3:ObjectCreated:Put"|"s3:ObjectCreated:Post"|"s3:ObjectCreated:Copy"|"s3:ObjectCreated:CompleteMultipartUpload"|"s3:ObjectRemoved:*"|"s3:ObjectRemoved:Delete"|"s3:ObjectRemoved:DeleteMarkerCreated"|"s3:ObjectRestore:*"|"s3:ObjectRestore:Post"|"s3:ObjectRestore:Completed"|"s3:Replication:*"|"s3:Replication:OperationFailedReplication"|"s3:Replication:OperationNotTracked"|"s3:Replication:OperationMissedThreshold"|"s3:Replication:OperationReplicatedAfterThreshold"|string;
2053    export type EventList = Event[];
2054    export interface ExistingObjectReplication {
2055      /**
2056       * 
2057       */
2058      Status: ExistingObjectReplicationStatus;
2059    }
2060    export type ExistingObjectReplicationStatus = "Enabled"|"Disabled"|string;
2061    export type Expiration = string;
2062    export type ExpirationStatus = "Enabled"|"Disabled"|string;
2063    export type ExpiredObjectDeleteMarker = boolean;
2064    export type Expires = Date;
2065    export type ExposeHeader = string;
2066    export type ExposeHeaders = ExposeHeader[];
2067    export type Expression = string;
2068    export type ExpressionType = "SQL"|string;
2069    export type FetchOwner = boolean;
2070    export type FieldDelimiter = string;
2071    export type FileHeaderInfo = "USE"|"IGNORE"|"NONE"|string;
2072    export interface FilterRule {
2073      /**
2074       * The object key name prefix or suffix identifying one or more objects to which the filtering rule applies. The maximum length is 1,024 characters. Overlapping prefixes and suffixes are not supported. For more information, see Configuring Event Notifications in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
2075       */
2076      Name?: FilterRuleName;
2077      /**
2078       * The value that the filter searches for in object key names.
2079       */
2080      Value?: FilterRuleValue;
2081    }
2082    export type FilterRuleList = FilterRule[];
2083    export type FilterRuleName = "prefix"|"suffix"|string;
2084    export type FilterRuleValue = string;
2085    export interface GetBucketAccelerateConfigurationOutput {
2086      /**
2087       * The accelerate configuration of the bucket.
2088       */
2089      Status?: BucketAccelerateStatus;
2090    }
2091    export interface GetBucketAccelerateConfigurationRequest {
2092      /**
2093       * The name of the bucket for which the accelerate configuration is retrieved.
2094       */
2095      Bucket: BucketName;
2096      /**
2097       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
2098       */
2099      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
2100    }
2101    export interface GetBucketAclOutput {
2102      /**
2103       * Container for the bucket owner's display name and ID.
2104       */
2105      Owner?: Owner;
2106      /**
2107       * A list of grants.
2108       */
2109      Grants?: Grants;
2110    }
2111    export interface GetBucketAclRequest {
2112      /**
2113       * Specifies the S3 bucket whose ACL is being requested.
2114       */
2115      Bucket: BucketName;
2116      /**
2117       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
2118       */
2119      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
2120    }
2121    export interface GetBucketAnalyticsConfigurationOutput {
2122      /**
2123       * The configuration and any analyses for the analytics filter.
2124       */
2125      AnalyticsConfiguration?: AnalyticsConfiguration;
2126    }
2127    export interface GetBucketAnalyticsConfigurationRequest {
2128      /**
2129       * The name of the bucket from which an analytics configuration is retrieved.
2130       */
2131      Bucket: BucketName;
2132      /**
2133       * The ID that identifies the analytics configuration.
2134       */
2135      Id: AnalyticsId;
2136      /**
2137       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
2138       */
2139      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
2140    }
2141    export interface GetBucketCorsOutput {
2142      /**
2143       * A set of origins and methods (cross-origin access that you want to allow). You can add up to 100 rules to the configuration.
2144       */
2145      CORSRules?: CORSRules;
2146    }
2147    export interface GetBucketCorsRequest {
2148      /**
2149       * The bucket name for which to get the cors configuration.
2150       */
2151      Bucket: BucketName;
2152      /**
2153       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
2154       */
2155      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
2156    }
2157    export interface GetBucketEncryptionOutput {
2158      ServerSideEncryptionConfiguration?: ServerSideEncryptionConfiguration;
2159    }
2160    export interface GetBucketEncryptionRequest {
2161      /**
2162       * The name of the bucket from which the server-side encryption configuration is retrieved.
2163       */
2164      Bucket: BucketName;
2165      /**
2166       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
2167       */
2168      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
2169    }
2170    export interface GetBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurationOutput {
2171      /**
2172       * Container for S3 Intelligent-Tiering configuration.
2173       */
2174      IntelligentTieringConfiguration?: IntelligentTieringConfiguration;
2175    }
2176    export interface GetBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurationRequest {
2177      /**
2178       * The name of the Amazon S3 bucket whose configuration you want to modify or retrieve.
2179       */
2180      Bucket: BucketName;
2181      /**
2182       * The ID used to identify the S3 Intelligent-Tiering configuration.
2183       */
2184      Id: IntelligentTieringId;
2185    }
2186    export interface GetBucketInventoryConfigurationOutput {
2187      /**
2188       * Specifies the inventory configuration.
2189       */
2190      InventoryConfiguration?: InventoryConfiguration;
2191    }
2192    export interface GetBucketInventoryConfigurationRequest {
2193      /**
2194       * The name of the bucket containing the inventory configuration to retrieve.
2195       */
2196      Bucket: BucketName;
2197      /**
2198       * The ID used to identify the inventory configuration.
2199       */
2200      Id: InventoryId;
2201      /**
2202       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
2203       */
2204      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
2205    }
2206    export interface GetBucketLifecycleConfigurationOutput {
2207      /**
2208       * Container for a lifecycle rule.
2209       */
2210      Rules?: LifecycleRules;
2211    }
2212    export interface GetBucketLifecycleConfigurationRequest {
2213      /**
2214       * The name of the bucket for which to get the lifecycle information.
2215       */
2216      Bucket: BucketName;
2217      /**
2218       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
2219       */
2220      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
2221    }
2222    export interface GetBucketLifecycleOutput {
2223      /**
2224       * Container for a lifecycle rule.
2225       */
2226      Rules?: Rules;
2227    }
2228    export interface GetBucketLifecycleRequest {
2229      /**
2230       * The name of the bucket for which to get the lifecycle information.
2231       */
2232      Bucket: BucketName;
2233      /**
2234       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
2235       */
2236      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
2237    }
2238    export interface GetBucketLocationOutput {
2239      /**
2240       * Specifies the Region where the bucket resides. For a list of all the Amazon S3 supported location constraints by Region, see Regions and Endpoints. Buckets in Region us-east-1 have a LocationConstraint of null.
2241       */
2242      LocationConstraint?: BucketLocationConstraint;
2243    }
2244    export interface GetBucketLocationRequest {
2245      /**
2246       * The name of the bucket for which to get the location.
2247       */
2248      Bucket: BucketName;
2249      /**
2250       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
2251       */
2252      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
2253    }
2254    export interface GetBucketLoggingOutput {
2255      LoggingEnabled?: LoggingEnabled;
2256    }
2257    export interface GetBucketLoggingRequest {
2258      /**
2259       * The bucket name for which to get the logging information.
2260       */
2261      Bucket: BucketName;
2262      /**
2263       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
2264       */
2265      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
2266    }
2267    export interface GetBucketMetricsConfigurationOutput {
2268      /**
2269       * Specifies the metrics configuration.
2270       */
2271      MetricsConfiguration?: MetricsConfiguration;
2272    }
2273    export interface GetBucketMetricsConfigurationRequest {
2274      /**
2275       * The name of the bucket containing the metrics configuration to retrieve.
2276       */
2277      Bucket: BucketName;
2278      /**
2279       * The ID used to identify the metrics configuration.
2280       */
2281      Id: MetricsId;
2282      /**
2283       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
2284       */
2285      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
2286    }
2287    export interface GetBucketNotificationConfigurationRequest {
2288      /**
2289       * The name of the bucket for which to get the notification configuration.
2290       */
2291      Bucket: BucketName;
2292      /**
2293       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
2294       */
2295      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
2296    }
2297    export interface GetBucketOwnershipControlsOutput {
2298      /**
2299       * The OwnershipControls (BucketOwnerPreferred or ObjectWriter) currently in effect for this Amazon S3 bucket.
2300       */
2301      OwnershipControls?: OwnershipControls;
2302    }
2303    export interface GetBucketOwnershipControlsRequest {
2304      /**
2305       * The name of the Amazon S3 bucket whose OwnershipControls you want to retrieve. 
2306       */
2307      Bucket: BucketName;
2308      /**
2309       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
2310       */
2311      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
2312    }
2313    export interface GetBucketPolicyOutput {
2314      /**
2315       * The bucket policy as a JSON document.
2316       */
2317      Policy?: Policy;
2318    }
2319    export interface GetBucketPolicyRequest {
2320      /**
2321       * The bucket name for which to get the bucket policy.
2322       */
2323      Bucket: BucketName;
2324      /**
2325       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
2326       */
2327      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
2328    }
2329    export interface GetBucketPolicyStatusOutput {
2330      /**
2331       * The policy status for the specified bucket.
2332       */
2333      PolicyStatus?: PolicyStatus;
2334    }
2335    export interface GetBucketPolicyStatusRequest {
2336      /**
2337       * The name of the Amazon S3 bucket whose policy status you want to retrieve.
2338       */
2339      Bucket: BucketName;
2340      /**
2341       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
2342       */
2343      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
2344    }
2345    export interface GetBucketReplicationOutput {
2346      ReplicationConfiguration?: ReplicationConfiguration;
2347    }
2348    export interface GetBucketReplicationRequest {
2349      /**
2350       * The bucket name for which to get the replication information.
2351       */
2352      Bucket: BucketName;
2353      /**
2354       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
2355       */
2356      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
2357    }
2358    export interface GetBucketRequestPaymentOutput {
2359      /**
2360       * Specifies who pays for the download and request fees.
2361       */
2362      Payer?: Payer;
2363    }
2364    export interface GetBucketRequestPaymentRequest {
2365      /**
2366       * The name of the bucket for which to get the payment request configuration
2367       */
2368      Bucket: BucketName;
2369      /**
2370       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
2371       */
2372      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
2373    }
2374    export interface GetBucketTaggingOutput {
2375      /**
2376       * Contains the tag set.
2377       */
2378      TagSet: TagSet;
2379    }
2380    export interface GetBucketTaggingRequest {
2381      /**
2382       * The name of the bucket for which to get the tagging information.
2383       */
2384      Bucket: BucketName;
2385      /**
2386       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
2387       */
2388      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
2389    }
2390    export interface GetBucketVersioningOutput {
2391      /**
2392       * The versioning state of the bucket.
2393       */
2394      Status?: BucketVersioningStatus;
2395      /**
2396       * Specifies whether MFA delete is enabled in the bucket versioning configuration. This element is only returned if the bucket has been configured with MFA delete. If the bucket has never been so configured, this element is not returned.
2397       */
2398      MFADelete?: MFADeleteStatus;
2399    }
2400    export interface GetBucketVersioningRequest {
2401      /**
2402       * The name of the bucket for which to get the versioning information.
2403       */
2404      Bucket: BucketName;
2405      /**
2406       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
2407       */
2408      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
2409    }
2410    export interface GetBucketWebsiteOutput {
2411      /**
2412       * Specifies the redirect behavior of all requests to a website endpoint of an Amazon S3 bucket.
2413       */
2414      RedirectAllRequestsTo?: RedirectAllRequestsTo;
2415      /**
2416       * The name of the index document for the website (for example index.html).
2417       */
2418      IndexDocument?: IndexDocument;
2419      /**
2420       * The object key name of the website error document to use for 4XX class errors.
2421       */
2422      ErrorDocument?: ErrorDocument;
2423      /**
2424       * Rules that define when a redirect is applied and the redirect behavior.
2425       */
2426      RoutingRules?: RoutingRules;
2427    }
2428    export interface GetBucketWebsiteRequest {
2429      /**
2430       * The bucket name for which to get the website configuration.
2431       */
2432      Bucket: BucketName;
2433      /**
2434       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
2435       */
2436      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
2437    }
2438    export interface GetObjectAclOutput {
2439      /**
2440       *  Container for the bucket owner's display name and ID.
2441       */
2442      Owner?: Owner;
2443      /**
2444       * A list of grants.
2445       */
2446      Grants?: Grants;
2447      RequestCharged?: RequestCharged;
2448    }
2449    export interface GetObjectAclRequest {
2450      /**
2451       * The bucket name that contains the object for which to get the ACL information.  When using this action with an access point, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
2452       */
2453      Bucket: BucketName;
2454      /**
2455       * The key of the object for which to get the ACL information.
2456       */
2457      Key: ObjectKey;
2458      /**
2459       * VersionId used to reference a specific version of the object.
2460       */
2461      VersionId?: ObjectVersionId;
2462      RequestPayer?: RequestPayer;
2463      /**
2464       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
2465       */
2466      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
2467    }
2468    export interface GetObjectLegalHoldOutput {
2469      /**
2470       * The current Legal Hold status for the specified object.
2471       */
2472      LegalHold?: ObjectLockLegalHold;
2473    }
2474    export interface GetObjectLegalHoldRequest {
2475      /**
2476       * The bucket name containing the object whose Legal Hold status you want to retrieve.  When using this action with an access point, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
2477       */
2478      Bucket: BucketName;
2479      /**
2480       * The key name for the object whose Legal Hold status you want to retrieve.
2481       */
2482      Key: ObjectKey;
2483      /**
2484       * The version ID of the object whose Legal Hold status you want to retrieve.
2485       */
2486      VersionId?: ObjectVersionId;
2487      RequestPayer?: RequestPayer;
2488      /**
2489       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
2490       */
2491      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
2492    }
2493    export interface GetObjectLockConfigurationOutput {
2494      /**
2495       * The specified bucket's Object Lock configuration.
2496       */
2497      ObjectLockConfiguration?: ObjectLockConfiguration;
2498    }
2499    export interface GetObjectLockConfigurationRequest {
2500      /**
2501       * The bucket whose Object Lock configuration you want to retrieve. When using this action with an access point, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
2502       */
2503      Bucket: BucketName;
2504      /**
2505       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
2506       */
2507      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
2508    }
2509    export interface GetObjectOutput {
2510      /**
2511       * Object data.
2512       */
2513      Body?: Body;
2514      /**
2515       * Specifies whether the object retrieved was (true) or was not (false) a Delete Marker. If false, this response header does not appear in the response.
2516       */
2517      DeleteMarker?: DeleteMarker;
2518      /**
2519       * Indicates that a range of bytes was specified.
2520       */
2521      AcceptRanges?: AcceptRanges;
2522      /**
2523       * If the object expiration is configured (see PUT Bucket lifecycle), the response includes this header. It includes the expiry-date and rule-id key-value pairs providing object expiration information. The value of the rule-id is URL encoded.
2524       */
2525      Expiration?: Expiration;
2526      /**
2527       * Provides information about object restoration action and expiration time of the restored object copy.
2528       */
2529      Restore?: Restore;
2530      /**
2531       * Creation date of the object.
2532       */
2533      LastModified?: LastModified;
2534      /**
2535       * Size of the body in bytes.
2536       */
2537      ContentLength?: ContentLength;
2538      /**
2539       * An ETag is an opaque identifier assigned by a web server to a specific version of a resource found at a URL.
2540       */
2541      ETag?: ETag;
2542      /**
2543       * This is set to the number of metadata entries not returned in x-amz-meta headers. This can happen if you create metadata using an API like SOAP that supports more flexible metadata than the REST API. For example, using SOAP, you can create metadata whose values are not legal HTTP headers.
2544       */
2545      MissingMeta?: MissingMeta;
2546      /**
2547       * Version of the object.
2548       */
2549      VersionId?: ObjectVersionId;
2550      /**
2551       * Specifies caching behavior along the request/reply chain.
2552       */
2553      CacheControl?: CacheControl;
2554      /**
2555       * Specifies presentational information for the object.
2556       */
2557      ContentDisposition?: ContentDisposition;
2558      /**
2559       * Specifies what content encodings have been applied to the object and thus what decoding mechanisms must be applied to obtain the media-type referenced by the Content-Type header field.
2560       */
2561      ContentEncoding?: ContentEncoding;
2562      /**
2563       * The language the content is in.
2564       */
2565      ContentLanguage?: ContentLanguage;
2566      /**
2567       * The portion of the object returned in the response.
2568       */
2569      ContentRange?: ContentRange;
2570      /**
2571       * A standard MIME type describing the format of the object data.
2572       */
2573      ContentType?: ContentType;
2574      /**
2575       * The date and time at which the object is no longer cacheable.
2576       */
2577      Expires?: Expires;
2578      /**
2579       * If the bucket is configured as a website, redirects requests for this object to another object in the same bucket or to an external URL. Amazon S3 stores the value of this header in the object metadata.
2580       */
2581      WebsiteRedirectLocation?: WebsiteRedirectLocation;
2582      /**
2583       * The server-side encryption algorithm used when storing this object in Amazon S3 (for example, AES256, aws:kms).
2584       */
2585      ServerSideEncryption?: ServerSideEncryption;
2586      /**
2587       * A map of metadata to store with the object in S3.
2588       */
2589      Metadata?: Metadata;
2590      /**
2591       * If server-side encryption with a customer-provided encryption key was requested, the response will include this header confirming the encryption algorithm used.
2592       */
2593      SSECustomerAlgorithm?: SSECustomerAlgorithm;
2594      /**
2595       * If server-side encryption with a customer-provided encryption key was requested, the response will include this header to provide round-trip message integrity verification of the customer-provided encryption key.
2596       */
2597      SSECustomerKeyMD5?: SSECustomerKeyMD5;
2598      /**
2599       * If present, specifies the ID of the Amazon Web Services Key Management Service (Amazon Web Services KMS) symmetric customer managed customer master key (CMK) that was used for the object.
2600       */
2601      SSEKMSKeyId?: SSEKMSKeyId;
2602      /**
2603       * Indicates whether the object uses an S3 Bucket Key for server-side encryption with Amazon Web Services KMS (SSE-KMS).
2604       */
2605      BucketKeyEnabled?: BucketKeyEnabled;
2606      /**
2607       * Provides storage class information of the object. Amazon S3 returns this header for all objects except for S3 Standard storage class objects.
2608       */
2609      StorageClass?: StorageClass;
2610      RequestCharged?: RequestCharged;
2611      /**
2612       * Amazon S3 can return this if your request involves a bucket that is either a source or destination in a replication rule.
2613       */
2614      ReplicationStatus?: ReplicationStatus;
2615      /**
2616       * The count of parts this object has.
2617       */
2618      PartsCount?: PartsCount;
2619      /**
2620       * The number of tags, if any, on the object.
2621       */
2622      TagCount?: TagCount;
2623      /**
2624       * The Object Lock mode currently in place for this object.
2625       */
2626      ObjectLockMode?: ObjectLockMode;
2627      /**
2628       * The date and time when this object's Object Lock will expire.
2629       */
2630      ObjectLockRetainUntilDate?: ObjectLockRetainUntilDate;
2631      /**
2632       * Indicates whether this object has an active legal hold. This field is only returned if you have permission to view an object's legal hold status. 
2633       */
2634      ObjectLockLegalHoldStatus?: ObjectLockLegalHoldStatus;
2635    }
2636    export interface GetObjectRequest {
2637      /**
2638       * The bucket name containing the object.  When using this action with an access point, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. When using this action with Amazon S3 on Outposts, you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action using S3 on Outposts through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the Outposts bucket ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about S3 on Outposts ARNs, see Using S3 on Outposts in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
2639       */
2640      Bucket: BucketName;
2641      /**
2642       * Return the object only if its entity tag (ETag) is the same as the one specified, otherwise return a 412 (precondition failed).
2643       */
2644      IfMatch?: IfMatch;
2645      /**
2646       * Return the object only if it has been modified since the specified time, otherwise return a 304 (not modified).
2647       */
2648      IfModifiedSince?: IfModifiedSince;
2649      /**
2650       * Return the object only if its entity tag (ETag) is different from the one specified, otherwise return a 304 (not modified).
2651       */
2652      IfNoneMatch?: IfNoneMatch;
2653      /**
2654       * Return the object only if it has not been modified since the specified time, otherwise return a 412 (precondition failed).
2655       */
2656      IfUnmodifiedSince?: IfUnmodifiedSince;
2657      /**
2658       * Key of the object to get.
2659       */
2660      Key: ObjectKey;
2661      /**
2662       * Downloads the specified range bytes of an object. For more information about the HTTP Range header, see https://www.w3.org/Protocols/rfc2616/rfc2616-sec14.html#sec14.35.  Amazon S3 doesn't support retrieving multiple ranges of data per GET request. 
2663       */
2664      Range?: Range;
2665      /**
2666       * Sets the Cache-Control header of the response.
2667       */
2668      ResponseCacheControl?: ResponseCacheControl;
2669      /**
2670       * Sets the Content-Disposition header of the response
2671       */
2672      ResponseContentDisposition?: ResponseContentDisposition;
2673      /**
2674       * Sets the Content-Encoding header of the response.
2675       */
2676      ResponseContentEncoding?: ResponseContentEncoding;
2677      /**
2678       * Sets the Content-Language header of the response.
2679       */
2680      ResponseContentLanguage?: ResponseContentLanguage;
2681      /**
2682       * Sets the Content-Type header of the response.
2683       */
2684      ResponseContentType?: ResponseContentType;
2685      /**
2686       * Sets the Expires header of the response.
2687       */
2688      ResponseExpires?: ResponseExpires;
2689      /**
2690       * VersionId used to reference a specific version of the object.
2691       */
2692      VersionId?: ObjectVersionId;
2693      /**
2694       * Specifies the algorithm to use to when decrypting the object (for example, AES256).
2695       */
2696      SSECustomerAlgorithm?: SSECustomerAlgorithm;
2697      /**
2698       * Specifies the customer-provided encryption key for Amazon S3 used to encrypt the data. This value is used to decrypt the object when recovering it and must match the one used when storing the data. The key must be appropriate for use with the algorithm specified in the x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-algorithm header.
2699       */
2700      SSECustomerKey?: SSECustomerKey;
2701      /**
2702       * Specifies the 128-bit MD5 digest of the encryption key according to RFC 1321. Amazon S3 uses this header for a message integrity check to ensure that the encryption key was transmitted without error.
2703       */
2704      SSECustomerKeyMD5?: SSECustomerKeyMD5;
2705      RequestPayer?: RequestPayer;
2706      /**
2707       * Part number of the object being read. This is a positive integer between 1 and 10,000. Effectively performs a 'ranged' GET request for the part specified. Useful for downloading just a part of an object.
2708       */
2709      PartNumber?: PartNumber;
2710      /**
2711       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
2712       */
2713      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
2714    }
2715    export type GetObjectResponseStatusCode = number;
2716    export interface GetObjectRetentionOutput {
2717      /**
2718       * The container element for an object's retention settings.
2719       */
2720      Retention?: ObjectLockRetention;
2721    }
2722    export interface GetObjectRetentionRequest {
2723      /**
2724       * The bucket name containing the object whose retention settings you want to retrieve.  When using this action with an access point, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
2725       */
2726      Bucket: BucketName;
2727      /**
2728       * The key name for the object whose retention settings you want to retrieve.
2729       */
2730      Key: ObjectKey;
2731      /**
2732       * The version ID for the object whose retention settings you want to retrieve.
2733       */
2734      VersionId?: ObjectVersionId;
2735      RequestPayer?: RequestPayer;
2736      /**
2737       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
2738       */
2739      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
2740    }
2741    export interface GetObjectTaggingOutput {
2742      /**
2743       * The versionId of the object for which you got the tagging information.
2744       */
2745      VersionId?: ObjectVersionId;
2746      /**
2747       * Contains the tag set.
2748       */
2749      TagSet: TagSet;
2750    }
2751    export interface GetObjectTaggingRequest {
2752      /**
2753       * The bucket name containing the object for which to get the tagging information.  When using this action with an access point, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. When using this action with Amazon S3 on Outposts, you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action using S3 on Outposts through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the Outposts bucket ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about S3 on Outposts ARNs, see Using S3 on Outposts in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
2754       */
2755      Bucket: BucketName;
2756      /**
2757       * Object key for which to get the tagging information.
2758       */
2759      Key: ObjectKey;
2760      /**
2761       * The versionId of the object for which to get the tagging information.
2762       */
2763      VersionId?: ObjectVersionId;
2764      /**
2765       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
2766       */
2767      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
2768      RequestPayer?: RequestPayer;
2769    }
2770    export interface GetObjectTorrentOutput {
2771      /**
2772       * A Bencoded dictionary as defined by the BitTorrent specification
2773       */
2774      Body?: Body;
2775      RequestCharged?: RequestCharged;
2776    }
2777    export interface GetObjectTorrentRequest {
2778      /**
2779       * The name of the bucket containing the object for which to get the torrent files.
2780       */
2781      Bucket: BucketName;
2782      /**
2783       * The object key for which to get the information.
2784       */
2785      Key: ObjectKey;
2786      RequestPayer?: RequestPayer;
2787      /**
2788       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
2789       */
2790      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
2791    }
2792    export interface GetPublicAccessBlockOutput {
2793      /**
2794       * The PublicAccessBlock configuration currently in effect for this Amazon S3 bucket.
2795       */
2796      PublicAccessBlockConfiguration?: PublicAccessBlockConfiguration;
2797    }
2798    export interface GetPublicAccessBlockRequest {
2799      /**
2800       * The name of the Amazon S3 bucket whose PublicAccessBlock configuration you want to retrieve. 
2801       */
2802      Bucket: BucketName;
2803      /**
2804       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
2805       */
2806      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
2807    }
2808    export interface GlacierJobParameters {
2809      /**
2810       * Retrieval tier at which the restore will be processed.
2811       */
2812      Tier: Tier;
2813    }
2814    export interface Grant {
2815      /**
2816       * The person being granted permissions.
2817       */
2818      Grantee?: Grantee;
2819      /**
2820       * Specifies the permission given to the grantee.
2821       */
2822      Permission?: Permission;
2823    }
2824    export type GrantFullControl = string;
2825    export type GrantRead = string;
2826    export type GrantReadACP = string;
2827    export type GrantWrite = string;
2828    export type GrantWriteACP = string;
2829    export interface Grantee {
2830      /**
2831       * Screen name of the grantee.
2832       */
2833      DisplayName?: DisplayName;
2834      /**
2835       * Email address of the grantee.  Using email addresses to specify a grantee is only supported in the following Amazon Web Services Regions:    US East (N. Virginia)   US West (N. California)    US West (Oregon)    Asia Pacific (Singapore)   Asia Pacific (Sydney)   Asia Pacific (Tokyo)   Europe (Ireland)   South America (São Paulo)   For a list of all the Amazon S3 supported Regions and endpoints, see Regions and Endpoints in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. 
2836       */
2837      EmailAddress?: EmailAddress;
2838      /**
2839       * The canonical user ID of the grantee.
2840       */
2841      ID?: ID;
2842      /**
2843       * Type of grantee
2844       */
2845      Type: Type;
2846      /**
2847       * URI of the grantee group.
2848       */
2849      URI?: URI;
2850    }
2851    export type Grants = Grant[];
2852    export interface HeadBucketRequest {
2853      /**
2854       * The bucket name. When using this action with an access point, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. When using this action with Amazon S3 on Outposts, you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action using S3 on Outposts through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the Outposts bucket ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about S3 on Outposts ARNs, see Using S3 on Outposts in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
2855       */
2856      Bucket: BucketName;
2857      /**
2858       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
2859       */
2860      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
2861    }
2862    export interface HeadObjectOutput {
2863      /**
2864       * Specifies whether the object retrieved was (true) or was not (false) a Delete Marker. If false, this response header does not appear in the response.
2865       */
2866      DeleteMarker?: DeleteMarker;
2867      /**
2868       * Indicates that a range of bytes was specified.
2869       */
2870      AcceptRanges?: AcceptRanges;
2871      /**
2872       * If the object expiration is configured (see PUT Bucket lifecycle), the response includes this header. It includes the expiry-date and rule-id key-value pairs providing object expiration information. The value of the rule-id is URL encoded.
2873       */
2874      Expiration?: Expiration;
2875      /**
2876       * If the object is an archived object (an object whose storage class is GLACIER), the response includes this header if either the archive restoration is in progress (see RestoreObject or an archive copy is already restored.  If an archive copy is already restored, the header value indicates when Amazon S3 is scheduled to delete the object copy. For example:  x-amz-restore: ongoing-request="false", expiry-date="Fri, 21 Dec 2012 00:00:00 GMT"  If the object restoration is in progress, the header returns the value ongoing-request="true". For more information about archiving objects, see Transitioning Objects: General Considerations.
2877       */
2878      Restore?: Restore;
2879      /**
2880       * The archive state of the head object.
2881       */
2882      ArchiveStatus?: ArchiveStatus;
2883      /**
2884       * Creation date of the object.
2885       */
2886      LastModified?: LastModified;
2887      /**
2888       * Size of the body in bytes.
2889       */
2890      ContentLength?: ContentLength;
2891      /**
2892       * An ETag is an opaque identifier assigned by a web server to a specific version of a resource found at a URL.
2893       */
2894      ETag?: ETag;
2895      /**
2896       * This is set to the number of metadata entries not returned in x-amz-meta headers. This can happen if you create metadata using an API like SOAP that supports more flexible metadata than the REST API. For example, using SOAP, you can create metadata whose values are not legal HTTP headers.
2897       */
2898      MissingMeta?: MissingMeta;
2899      /**
2900       * Version of the object.
2901       */
2902      VersionId?: ObjectVersionId;
2903      /**
2904       * Specifies caching behavior along the request/reply chain.
2905       */
2906      CacheControl?: CacheControl;
2907      /**
2908       * Specifies presentational information for the object.
2909       */
2910      ContentDisposition?: ContentDisposition;
2911      /**
2912       * Specifies what content encodings have been applied to the object and thus what decoding mechanisms must be applied to obtain the media-type referenced by the Content-Type header field.
2913       */
2914      ContentEncoding?: ContentEncoding;
2915      /**
2916       * The language the content is in.
2917       */
2918      ContentLanguage?: ContentLanguage;
2919      /**
2920       * A standard MIME type describing the format of the object data.
2921       */
2922      ContentType?: ContentType;
2923      /**
2924       * The date and time at which the object is no longer cacheable.
2925       */
2926      Expires?: Expires;
2927      /**
2928       * If the bucket is configured as a website, redirects requests for this object to another object in the same bucket or to an external URL. Amazon S3 stores the value of this header in the object metadata.
2929       */
2930      WebsiteRedirectLocation?: WebsiteRedirectLocation;
2931      /**
2932       * If the object is stored using server-side encryption either with an Amazon Web Services KMS customer master key (CMK) or an Amazon S3-managed encryption key, the response includes this header with the value of the server-side encryption algorithm used when storing this object in Amazon S3 (for example, AES256, aws:kms).
2933       */
2934      ServerSideEncryption?: ServerSideEncryption;
2935      /**
2936       * A map of metadata to store with the object in S3.
2937       */
2938      Metadata?: Metadata;
2939      /**
2940       * If server-side encryption with a customer-provided encryption key was requested, the response will include this header confirming the encryption algorithm used.
2941       */
2942      SSECustomerAlgorithm?: SSECustomerAlgorithm;
2943      /**
2944       * If server-side encryption with a customer-provided encryption key was requested, the response will include this header to provide round-trip message integrity verification of the customer-provided encryption key.
2945       */
2946      SSECustomerKeyMD5?: SSECustomerKeyMD5;
2947      /**
2948       * If present, specifies the ID of the Amazon Web Services Key Management Service (Amazon Web Services KMS) symmetric customer managed customer master key (CMK) that was used for the object.
2949       */
2950      SSEKMSKeyId?: SSEKMSKeyId;
2951      /**
2952       * Indicates whether the object uses an S3 Bucket Key for server-side encryption with Amazon Web Services KMS (SSE-KMS).
2953       */
2954      BucketKeyEnabled?: BucketKeyEnabled;
2955      /**
2956       * Provides storage class information of the object. Amazon S3 returns this header for all objects except for S3 Standard storage class objects. For more information, see Storage Classes.
2957       */
2958      StorageClass?: StorageClass;
2959      RequestCharged?: RequestCharged;
2960      /**
2961       * Amazon S3 can return this header if your request involves a bucket that is either a source or a destination in a replication rule. In replication, you have a source bucket on which you configure replication and destination bucket or buckets where Amazon S3 stores object replicas. When you request an object (GetObject) or object metadata (HeadObject) from these buckets, Amazon S3 will return the x-amz-replication-status header in the response as follows:   If requesting an object from the source bucket — Amazon S3 will return the x-amz-replication-status header if the object in your request is eligible for replication.  For example, suppose that in your replication configuration, you specify object prefix TaxDocs requesting Amazon S3 to replicate objects with key prefix TaxDocs. Any objects you upload with this key name prefix, for example TaxDocs/document1.pdf, are eligible for replication. For any object request with this key name prefix, Amazon S3 will return the x-amz-replication-status header with value PENDING, COMPLETED or FAILED indicating object replication status.   If requesting an object from a destination bucket — Amazon S3 will return the x-amz-replication-status header with value REPLICA if the object in your request is a replica that Amazon S3 created and there is no replica modification replication in progress.   When replicating objects to multiple destination buckets the x-amz-replication-status header acts differently. The header of the source object will only return a value of COMPLETED when replication is successful to all destinations. The header will remain at value PENDING until replication has completed for all destinations. If one or more destinations fails replication the header will return FAILED.    For more information, see Replication.
2962       */
2963      ReplicationStatus?: ReplicationStatus;
2964      /**
2965       * The count of parts this object has.
2966       */
2967      PartsCount?: PartsCount;
2968      /**
2969       * The Object Lock mode, if any, that's in effect for this object. This header is only returned if the requester has the s3:GetObjectRetention permission. For more information about S3 Object Lock, see Object Lock. 
2970       */
2971      ObjectLockMode?: ObjectLockMode;
2972      /**
2973       * The date and time when the Object Lock retention period expires. This header is only returned if the requester has the s3:GetObjectRetention permission.
2974       */
2975      ObjectLockRetainUntilDate?: ObjectLockRetainUntilDate;
2976      /**
2977       * Specifies whether a legal hold is in effect for this object. This header is only returned if the requester has the s3:GetObjectLegalHold permission. This header is not returned if the specified version of this object has never had a legal hold applied. For more information about S3 Object Lock, see Object Lock.
2978       */
2979      ObjectLockLegalHoldStatus?: ObjectLockLegalHoldStatus;
2980    }
2981    export interface HeadObjectRequest {
2982      /**
2983       * The name of the bucket containing the object. When using this action with an access point, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. When using this action with Amazon S3 on Outposts, you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action using S3 on Outposts through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the Outposts bucket ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about S3 on Outposts ARNs, see Using S3 on Outposts in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
2984       */
2985      Bucket: BucketName;
2986      /**
2987       * Return the object only if its entity tag (ETag) is the same as the one specified, otherwise return a 412 (precondition failed).
2988       */
2989      IfMatch?: IfMatch;
2990      /**
2991       * Return the object only if it has been modified since the specified time, otherwise return a 304 (not modified).
2992       */
2993      IfModifiedSince?: IfModifiedSince;
2994      /**
2995       * Return the object only if its entity tag (ETag) is different from the one specified, otherwise return a 304 (not modified).
2996       */
2997      IfNoneMatch?: IfNoneMatch;
2998      /**
2999       * Return the object only if it has not been modified since the specified time, otherwise return a 412 (precondition failed).
3000       */
3001      IfUnmodifiedSince?: IfUnmodifiedSince;
3002      /**
3003       * The object key.
3004       */
3005      Key: ObjectKey;
3006      /**
3007       * Downloads the specified range bytes of an object. For more information about the HTTP Range header, see http://www.w3.org/Protocols/rfc2616/rfc2616-sec14.html#sec14.35.  Amazon S3 doesn't support retrieving multiple ranges of data per GET request. 
3008       */
3009      Range?: Range;
3010      /**
3011       * VersionId used to reference a specific version of the object.
3012       */
3013      VersionId?: ObjectVersionId;
3014      /**
3015       * Specifies the algorithm to use to when encrypting the object (for example, AES256).
3016       */
3017      SSECustomerAlgorithm?: SSECustomerAlgorithm;
3018      /**
3019       * Specifies the customer-provided encryption key for Amazon S3 to use in encrypting data. This value is used to store the object and then it is discarded; Amazon S3 does not store the encryption key. The key must be appropriate for use with the algorithm specified in the x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-algorithm header.
3020       */
3021      SSECustomerKey?: SSECustomerKey;
3022      /**
3023       * Specifies the 128-bit MD5 digest of the encryption key according to RFC 1321. Amazon S3 uses this header for a message integrity check to ensure that the encryption key was transmitted without error.
3024       */
3025      SSECustomerKeyMD5?: SSECustomerKeyMD5;
3026      RequestPayer?: RequestPayer;
3027      /**
3028       * Part number of the object being read. This is a positive integer between 1 and 10,000. Effectively performs a 'ranged' HEAD request for the part specified. Useful querying about the size of the part and the number of parts in this object.
3029       */
3030      PartNumber?: PartNumber;
3031      /**
3032       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
3033       */
3034      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
3035    }
3036    export type HostName = string;
3037    export type HttpErrorCodeReturnedEquals = string;
3038    export type HttpRedirectCode = string;
3039    export type ID = string;
3040    export type IfMatch = string;
3041    export type IfModifiedSince = Date;
3042    export type IfNoneMatch = string;
3043    export type IfUnmodifiedSince = Date;
3044    export interface IndexDocument {
3045      /**
3046       * A suffix that is appended to a request that is for a directory on the website endpoint (for example,if the suffix is index.html and you make a request to samplebucket/images/ the data that is returned will be for the object with the key name images/index.html) The suffix must not be empty and must not include a slash character.  Replacement must be made for object keys containing special characters (such as carriage returns) when using XML requests. For more information, see  XML related object key constraints. 
3047       */
3048      Suffix: Suffix;
3049    }
3050    export type Initiated = Date;
3051    export interface Initiator {
3052      /**
3053       * If the principal is an Amazon Web Services account, it provides the Canonical User ID. If the principal is an IAM User, it provides a user ARN value.
3054       */
3055      ID?: ID;
3056      /**
3057       * Name of the Principal.
3058       */
3059      DisplayName?: DisplayName;
3060    }
3061    export interface InputSerialization {
3062      /**
3063       * Describes the serialization of a CSV-encoded object.
3064       */
3065      CSV?: CSVInput;
3066      /**
3067       * Specifies object's compression format. Valid values: NONE, GZIP, BZIP2. Default Value: NONE.
3068       */
3069      CompressionType?: CompressionType;
3070      /**
3071       * Specifies JSON as object's input serialization format.
3072       */
3073      JSON?: JSONInput;
3074      /**
3075       * Specifies Parquet as object's input serialization format.
3076       */
3077      Parquet?: ParquetInput;
3078    }
3079    export type IntelligentTieringAccessTier = "ARCHIVE_ACCESS"|"DEEP_ARCHIVE_ACCESS"|string;
3080    export interface IntelligentTieringAndOperator {
3081      /**
3082       * An object key name prefix that identifies the subset of objects to which the configuration applies.
3083       */
3084      Prefix?: Prefix;
3085      /**
3086       * All of these tags must exist in the object's tag set in order for the configuration to apply.
3087       */
3088      Tags?: TagSet;
3089    }
3090    export interface IntelligentTieringConfiguration {
3091      /**
3092       * The ID used to identify the S3 Intelligent-Tiering configuration.
3093       */
3094      Id: IntelligentTieringId;
3095      /**
3096       * Specifies a bucket filter. The configuration only includes objects that meet the filter's criteria.
3097       */
3098      Filter?: IntelligentTieringFilter;
3099      /**
3100       * Specifies the status of the configuration.
3101       */
3102      Status: IntelligentTieringStatus;
3103      /**
3104       * Specifies the S3 Intelligent-Tiering storage class tier of the configuration.
3105       */
3106      Tierings: TieringList;
3107    }
3108    export type IntelligentTieringConfigurationList = IntelligentTieringConfiguration[];
3109    export type IntelligentTieringDays = number;
3110    export interface IntelligentTieringFilter {
3111      /**
3112       * An object key name prefix that identifies the subset of objects to which the rule applies.  Replacement must be made for object keys containing special characters (such as carriage returns) when using XML requests. For more information, see  XML related object key constraints. 
3113       */
3114      Prefix?: Prefix;
3115      Tag?: Tag;
3116      /**
3117       * A conjunction (logical AND) of predicates, which is used in evaluating a metrics filter. The operator must have at least two predicates, and an object must match all of the predicates in order for the filter to apply.
3118       */
3119      And?: IntelligentTieringAndOperator;
3120    }
3121    export type IntelligentTieringId = string;
3122    export type IntelligentTieringStatus = "Enabled"|"Disabled"|string;
3123    export interface InventoryConfiguration {
3124      /**
3125       * Contains information about where to publish the inventory results.
3126       */
3127      Destination: InventoryDestination;
3128      /**
3129       * Specifies whether the inventory is enabled or disabled. If set to True, an inventory list is generated. If set to False, no inventory list is generated.
3130       */
3131      IsEnabled: IsEnabled;
3132      /**
3133       * Specifies an inventory filter. The inventory only includes objects that meet the filter's criteria.
3134       */
3135      Filter?: InventoryFilter;
3136      /**
3137       * The ID used to identify the inventory configuration.
3138       */
3139      Id: InventoryId;
3140      /**
3141       * Object versions to include in the inventory list. If set to All, the list includes all the object versions, which adds the version-related fields VersionId, IsLatest, and DeleteMarker to the list. If set to Current, the list does not contain these version-related fields.
3142       */
3143      IncludedObjectVersions: InventoryIncludedObjectVersions;
3144      /**
3145       * Contains the optional fields that are included in the inventory results.
3146       */
3147      OptionalFields?: InventoryOptionalFields;
3148      /**
3149       * Specifies the schedule for generating inventory results.
3150       */
3151      Schedule: InventorySchedule;
3152    }
3153    export type InventoryConfigurationList = InventoryConfiguration[];
3154    export interface InventoryDestination {
3155      /**
3156       * Contains the bucket name, file format, bucket owner (optional), and prefix (optional) where inventory results are published.
3157       */
3158      S3BucketDestination: InventoryS3BucketDestination;
3159    }
3160    export interface InventoryEncryption {
3161      /**
3162       * Specifies the use of SSE-S3 to encrypt delivered inventory reports.
3163       */
3164      SSES3?: SSES3;
3165      /**
3166       * Specifies the use of SSE-KMS to encrypt delivered inventory reports.
3167       */
3168      SSEKMS?: SSEKMS;
3169    }
3170    export interface InventoryFilter {
3171      /**
3172       * The prefix that an object must have to be included in the inventory results.
3173       */
3174      Prefix: Prefix;
3175    }
3176    export type InventoryFormat = "CSV"|"ORC"|"Parquet"|string;
3177    export type InventoryFrequency = "Daily"|"Weekly"|string;
3178    export type InventoryId = string;
3179    export type InventoryIncludedObjectVersions = "All"|"Current"|string;
3180    export type InventoryOptionalField = "Size"|"LastModifiedDate"|"StorageClass"|"ETag"|"IsMultipartUploaded"|"ReplicationStatus"|"EncryptionStatus"|"ObjectLockRetainUntilDate"|"ObjectLockMode"|"ObjectLockLegalHoldStatus"|"IntelligentTieringAccessTier"|"BucketKeyStatus"|string;
3181    export type InventoryOptionalFields = InventoryOptionalField[];
3182    export interface InventoryS3BucketDestination {
3183      /**
3184       * The account ID that owns the destination S3 bucket. If no account ID is provided, the owner is not validated before exporting data.    Although this value is optional, we strongly recommend that you set it to help prevent problems if the destination bucket ownership changes.  
3185       */
3186      AccountId?: AccountId;
3187      /**
3188       * The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the bucket where inventory results will be published.
3189       */
3190      Bucket: BucketName;
3191      /**
3192       * Specifies the output format of the inventory results.
3193       */
3194      Format: InventoryFormat;
3195      /**
3196       * The prefix that is prepended to all inventory results.
3197       */
3198      Prefix?: Prefix;
3199      /**
3200       * Contains the type of server-side encryption used to encrypt the inventory results.
3201       */
3202      Encryption?: InventoryEncryption;
3203    }
3204    export interface InventorySchedule {
3205      /**
3206       * Specifies how frequently inventory results are produced.
3207       */
3208      Frequency: InventoryFrequency;
3209    }
3210    export type IsEnabled = boolean;
3211    export type IsLatest = boolean;
3212    export type IsPublic = boolean;
3213    export type IsTruncated = boolean;
3214    export interface JSONInput {
3215      /**
3216       * The type of JSON. Valid values: Document, Lines.
3217       */
3218      Type?: JSONType;
3219    }
3220    export interface JSONOutput {
3221      /**
3222       * The value used to separate individual records in the output. If no value is specified, Amazon S3 uses a newline character ('\n').
3223       */
3224      RecordDelimiter?: RecordDelimiter;
3225    }
3226    export type JSONType = "DOCUMENT"|"LINES"|string;
3227    export type KMSContext = string;
3228    export type KeyCount = number;
3229    export type KeyMarker = string;
3230    export type KeyPrefixEquals = string;
3231    export type LambdaFunctionArn = string;
3232    export interface LambdaFunctionConfiguration {
3233      Id?: NotificationId;
3234      /**
3235       * The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Lambda function that Amazon S3 invokes when the specified event type occurs.
3236       */
3237      LambdaFunctionArn: LambdaFunctionArn;
3238      /**
3239       * The Amazon S3 bucket event for which to invoke the Lambda function. For more information, see Supported Event Types in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
3240       */
3241      Events: EventList;
3242      Filter?: NotificationConfigurationFilter;
3243    }
3244    export type LambdaFunctionConfigurationList = LambdaFunctionConfiguration[];
3245    export type LastModified = Date;
3246    export interface LifecycleConfiguration {
3247      /**
3248       * Specifies lifecycle configuration rules for an Amazon S3 bucket. 
3249       */
3250      Rules: Rules;
3251    }
3252    export interface LifecycleExpiration {
3253      /**
3254       * Indicates at what date the object is to be moved or deleted. Should be in GMT ISO 8601 Format.
3255       */
3256      Date?: _Date;
3257      /**
3258       * Indicates the lifetime, in days, of the objects that are subject to the rule. The value must be a non-zero positive integer.
3259       */
3260      Days?: Days;
3261      /**
3262       * Indicates whether Amazon S3 will remove a delete marker with no noncurrent versions. If set to true, the delete marker will be expired; if set to false the policy takes no action. This cannot be specified with Days or Date in a Lifecycle Expiration Policy.
3263       */
3264      ExpiredObjectDeleteMarker?: ExpiredObjectDeleteMarker;
3265    }
3266    export interface LifecycleRule {
3267      /**
3268       * Specifies the expiration for the lifecycle of the object in the form of date, days and, whether the object has a delete marker.
3269       */
3270      Expiration?: LifecycleExpiration;
3271      /**
3272       * Unique identifier for the rule. The value cannot be longer than 255 characters.
3273       */
3274      ID?: ID;
3275      /**
3276       * Prefix identifying one or more objects to which the rule applies. This is no longer used; use Filter instead.  Replacement must be made for object keys containing special characters (such as carriage returns) when using XML requests. For more information, see  XML related object key constraints. 
3277       */
3278      Prefix?: Prefix;
3279      /**
3280       * The Filter is used to identify objects that a Lifecycle Rule applies to. A Filter must have exactly one of Prefix, Tag, or And specified. Filter is required if the LifecycleRule does not containt a Prefix element.
3281       */
3282      Filter?: LifecycleRuleFilter;
3283      /**
3284       * If 'Enabled', the rule is currently being applied. If 'Disabled', the rule is not currently being applied.
3285       */
3286      Status: ExpirationStatus;
3287      /**
3288       * Specifies when an Amazon S3 object transitions to a specified storage class.
3289       */
3290      Transitions?: TransitionList;
3291      /**
3292       *  Specifies the transition rule for the lifecycle rule that describes when noncurrent objects transition to a specific storage class. If your bucket is versioning-enabled (or versioning is suspended), you can set this action to request that Amazon S3 transition noncurrent object versions to a specific storage class at a set period in the object's lifetime. 
3293       */
3294      NoncurrentVersionTransitions?: NoncurrentVersionTransitionList;
3295      NoncurrentVersionExpiration?: NoncurrentVersionExpiration;
3296      AbortIncompleteMultipartUpload?: AbortIncompleteMultipartUpload;
3297    }
3298    export interface LifecycleRuleAndOperator {
3299      /**
3300       * Prefix identifying one or more objects to which the rule applies.
3301       */
3302      Prefix?: Prefix;
3303      /**
3304       * All of these tags must exist in the object's tag set in order for the rule to apply.
3305       */
3306      Tags?: TagSet;
3307    }
3308    export interface LifecycleRuleFilter {
3309      /**
3310       * Prefix identifying one or more objects to which the rule applies.  Replacement must be made for object keys containing special characters (such as carriage returns) when using XML requests. For more information, see  XML related object key constraints. 
3311       */
3312      Prefix?: Prefix;
3313      /**
3314       * This tag must exist in the object's tag set in order for the rule to apply.
3315       */
3316      Tag?: Tag;
3317      And?: LifecycleRuleAndOperator;
3318    }
3319    export type LifecycleRules = LifecycleRule[];
3320    export interface ListBucketAnalyticsConfigurationsOutput {
3321      /**
3322       * Indicates whether the returned list of analytics configurations is complete. A value of true indicates that the list is not complete and the NextContinuationToken will be provided for a subsequent request.
3323       */
3324      IsTruncated?: IsTruncated;
3325      /**
3326       * The marker that is used as a starting point for this analytics configuration list response. This value is present if it was sent in the request.
3327       */
3328      ContinuationToken?: Token;
3329      /**
3330       *  NextContinuationToken is sent when isTruncated is true, which indicates that there are more analytics configurations to list. The next request must include this NextContinuationToken. The token is obfuscated and is not a usable value.
3331       */
3332      NextContinuationToken?: NextToken;
3333      /**
3334       * The list of analytics configurations for a bucket.
3335       */
3336      AnalyticsConfigurationList?: AnalyticsConfigurationList;
3337    }
3338    export interface ListBucketAnalyticsConfigurationsRequest {
3339      /**
3340       * The name of the bucket from which analytics configurations are retrieved.
3341       */
3342      Bucket: BucketName;
3343      /**
3344       * The ContinuationToken that represents a placeholder from where this request should begin.
3345       */
3346      ContinuationToken?: Token;
3347      /**
3348       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
3349       */
3350      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
3351    }
3352    export interface ListBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurationsOutput {
3353      /**
3354       * Indicates whether the returned list of analytics configurations is complete. A value of true indicates that the list is not complete and the NextContinuationToken will be provided for a subsequent request.
3355       */
3356      IsTruncated?: IsTruncated;
3357      /**
3358       * The ContinuationToken that represents a placeholder from where this request should begin.
3359       */
3360      ContinuationToken?: Token;
3361      /**
3362       * The marker used to continue this inventory configuration listing. Use the NextContinuationToken from this response to continue the listing in a subsequent request. The continuation token is an opaque value that Amazon S3 understands.
3363       */
3364      NextContinuationToken?: NextToken;
3365      /**
3366       * The list of S3 Intelligent-Tiering configurations for a bucket.
3367       */
3368      IntelligentTieringConfigurationList?: IntelligentTieringConfigurationList;
3369    }
3370    export interface ListBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurationsRequest {
3371      /**
3372       * The name of the Amazon S3 bucket whose configuration you want to modify or retrieve.
3373       */
3374      Bucket: BucketName;
3375      /**
3376       * The ContinuationToken that represents a placeholder from where this request should begin.
3377       */
3378      ContinuationToken?: Token;
3379    }
3380    export interface ListBucketInventoryConfigurationsOutput {
3381      /**
3382       * If sent in the request, the marker that is used as a starting point for this inventory configuration list response.
3383       */
3384      ContinuationToken?: Token;
3385      /**
3386       * The list of inventory configurations for a bucket.
3387       */
3388      InventoryConfigurationList?: InventoryConfigurationList;
3389      /**
3390       * Tells whether the returned list of inventory configurations is complete. A value of true indicates that the list is not complete and the NextContinuationToken is provided for a subsequent request.
3391       */
3392      IsTruncated?: IsTruncated;
3393      /**
3394       * The marker used to continue this inventory configuration listing. Use the NextContinuationToken from this response to continue the listing in a subsequent request. The continuation token is an opaque value that Amazon S3 understands.
3395       */
3396      NextContinuationToken?: NextToken;
3397    }
3398    export interface ListBucketInventoryConfigurationsRequest {
3399      /**
3400       * The name of the bucket containing the inventory configurations to retrieve.
3401       */
3402      Bucket: BucketName;
3403      /**
3404       * The marker used to continue an inventory configuration listing that has been truncated. Use the NextContinuationToken from a previously truncated list response to continue the listing. The continuation token is an opaque value that Amazon S3 understands.
3405       */
3406      ContinuationToken?: Token;
3407      /**
3408       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
3409       */
3410      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
3411    }
3412    export interface ListBucketMetricsConfigurationsOutput {
3413      /**
3414       * Indicates whether the returned list of metrics configurations is complete. A value of true indicates that the list is not complete and the NextContinuationToken will be provided for a subsequent request.
3415       */
3416      IsTruncated?: IsTruncated;
3417      /**
3418       * The marker that is used as a starting point for this metrics configuration list response. This value is present if it was sent in the request.
3419       */
3420      ContinuationToken?: Token;
3421      /**
3422       * The marker used to continue a metrics configuration listing that has been truncated. Use the NextContinuationToken from a previously truncated list response to continue the listing. The continuation token is an opaque value that Amazon S3 understands.
3423       */
3424      NextContinuationToken?: NextToken;
3425      /**
3426       * The list of metrics configurations for a bucket.
3427       */
3428      MetricsConfigurationList?: MetricsConfigurationList;
3429    }
3430    export interface ListBucketMetricsConfigurationsRequest {
3431      /**
3432       * The name of the bucket containing the metrics configurations to retrieve.
3433       */
3434      Bucket: BucketName;
3435      /**
3436       * The marker that is used to continue a metrics configuration listing that has been truncated. Use the NextContinuationToken from a previously truncated list response to continue the listing. The continuation token is an opaque value that Amazon S3 understands.
3437       */
3438      ContinuationToken?: Token;
3439      /**
3440       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
3441       */
3442      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
3443    }
3444    export interface ListBucketsOutput {
3445      /**
3446       * The list of buckets owned by the requestor.
3447       */
3448      Buckets?: Buckets;
3449      /**
3450       * The owner of the buckets listed.
3451       */
3452      Owner?: Owner;
3453    }
3454    export interface ListMultipartUploadsOutput {
3455      /**
3456       * The name of the bucket to which the multipart upload was initiated. Does not return the access point ARN or access point alias if used.
3457       */
3458      Bucket?: BucketName;
3459      /**
3460       * The key at or after which the listing began.
3461       */
3462      KeyMarker?: KeyMarker;
3463      /**
3464       * Upload ID after which listing began.
3465       */
3466      UploadIdMarker?: UploadIdMarker;
3467      /**
3468       * When a list is truncated, this element specifies the value that should be used for the key-marker request parameter in a subsequent request.
3469       */
3470      NextKeyMarker?: NextKeyMarker;
3471      /**
3472       * When a prefix is provided in the request, this field contains the specified prefix. The result contains only keys starting with the specified prefix.
3473       */
3474      Prefix?: Prefix;
3475      /**
3476       * Contains the delimiter you specified in the request. If you don't specify a delimiter in your request, this element is absent from the response.
3477       */
3478      Delimiter?: Delimiter;
3479      /**
3480       * When a list is truncated, this element specifies the value that should be used for the upload-id-marker request parameter in a subsequent request.
3481       */
3482      NextUploadIdMarker?: NextUploadIdMarker;
3483      /**
3484       * Maximum number of multipart uploads that could have been included in the response.
3485       */
3486      MaxUploads?: MaxUploads;
3487      /**
3488       * Indicates whether the returned list of multipart uploads is truncated. A value of true indicates that the list was truncated. The list can be truncated if the number of multipart uploads exceeds the limit allowed or specified by max uploads.
3489       */
3490      IsTruncated?: IsTruncated;
3491      /**
3492       * Container for elements related to a particular multipart upload. A response can contain zero or more Upload elements.
3493       */
3494      Uploads?: MultipartUploadList;
3495      /**
3496       * If you specify a delimiter in the request, then the result returns each distinct key prefix containing the delimiter in a CommonPrefixes element. The distinct key prefixes are returned in the Prefix child element.
3497       */
3498      CommonPrefixes?: CommonPrefixList;
3499      /**
3500       * Encoding type used by Amazon S3 to encode object keys in the response. If you specify encoding-type request parameter, Amazon S3 includes this element in the response, and returns encoded key name values in the following response elements:  Delimiter, KeyMarker, Prefix, NextKeyMarker, Key.
3501       */
3502      EncodingType?: EncodingType;
3503    }
3504    export interface ListMultipartUploadsRequest {
3505      /**
3506       * The name of the bucket to which the multipart upload was initiated.  When using this action with an access point, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. When using this action with Amazon S3 on Outposts, you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action using S3 on Outposts through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the Outposts bucket ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about S3 on Outposts ARNs, see Using S3 on Outposts in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
3507       */
3508      Bucket: BucketName;
3509      /**
3510       * Character you use to group keys. All keys that contain the same string between the prefix, if specified, and the first occurrence of the delimiter after the prefix are grouped under a single result element, CommonPrefixes. If you don't specify the prefix parameter, then the substring starts at the beginning of the key. The keys that are grouped under CommonPrefixes result element are not returned elsewhere in the response.
3511       */
3512      Delimiter?: Delimiter;
3513      EncodingType?: EncodingType;
3514      /**
3515       * Together with upload-id-marker, this parameter specifies the multipart upload after which listing should begin. If upload-id-marker is not specified, only the keys lexicographically greater than the specified key-marker will be included in the list. If upload-id-marker is specified, any multipart uploads for a key equal to the key-marker might also be included, provided those multipart uploads have upload IDs lexicographically greater than the specified upload-id-marker.
3516       */
3517      KeyMarker?: KeyMarker;
3518      /**
3519       * Sets the maximum number of multipart uploads, from 1 to 1,000, to return in the response body. 1,000 is the maximum number of uploads that can be returned in a response.
3520       */
3521      MaxUploads?: MaxUploads;
3522      /**
3523       * Lists in-progress uploads only for those keys that begin with the specified prefix. You can use prefixes to separate a bucket into different grouping of keys. (You can think of using prefix to make groups in the same way you'd use a folder in a file system.)
3524       */
3525      Prefix?: Prefix;
3526      /**
3527       * Together with key-marker, specifies the multipart upload after which listing should begin. If key-marker is not specified, the upload-id-marker parameter is ignored. Otherwise, any multipart uploads for a key equal to the key-marker might be included in the list only if they have an upload ID lexicographically greater than the specified upload-id-marker.
3528       */
3529      UploadIdMarker?: UploadIdMarker;
3530      /**
3531       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
3532       */
3533      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
3534    }
3535    export interface ListObjectVersionsOutput {
3536      /**
3537       * A flag that indicates whether Amazon S3 returned all of the results that satisfied the search criteria. If your results were truncated, you can make a follow-up paginated request using the NextKeyMarker and NextVersionIdMarker response parameters as a starting place in another request to return the rest of the results.
3538       */
3539      IsTruncated?: IsTruncated;
3540      /**
3541       * Marks the last key returned in a truncated response.
3542       */
3543      KeyMarker?: KeyMarker;
3544      /**
3545       * Marks the last version of the key returned in a truncated response.
3546       */
3547      VersionIdMarker?: VersionIdMarker;
3548      /**
3549       * When the number of responses exceeds the value of MaxKeys, NextKeyMarker specifies the first key not returned that satisfies the search criteria. Use this value for the key-marker request parameter in a subsequent request.
3550       */
3551      NextKeyMarker?: NextKeyMarker;
3552      /**
3553       * When the number of responses exceeds the value of MaxKeys, NextVersionIdMarker specifies the first object version not returned that satisfies the search criteria. Use this value for the version-id-marker request parameter in a subsequent request.
3554       */
3555      NextVersionIdMarker?: NextVersionIdMarker;
3556      /**
3557       * Container for version information.
3558       */
3559      Versions?: ObjectVersionList;
3560      /**
3561       * Container for an object that is a delete marker.
3562       */
3563      DeleteMarkers?: DeleteMarkers;
3564      /**
3565       * The bucket name.
3566       */
3567      Name?: BucketName;
3568      /**
3569       * Selects objects that start with the value supplied by this parameter.
3570       */
3571      Prefix?: Prefix;
3572      /**
3573       * The delimiter grouping the included keys. A delimiter is a character that you specify to group keys. All keys that contain the same string between the prefix and the first occurrence of the delimiter are grouped under a single result element in CommonPrefixes. These groups are counted as one result against the max-keys limitation. These keys are not returned elsewhere in the response.
3574       */
3575      Delimiter?: Delimiter;
3576      /**
3577       * Specifies the maximum number of objects to return.
3578       */
3579      MaxKeys?: MaxKeys;
3580      /**
3581       * All of the keys rolled up into a common prefix count as a single return when calculating the number of returns.
3582       */
3583      CommonPrefixes?: CommonPrefixList;
3584      /**
3585       *  Encoding type used by Amazon S3 to encode object key names in the XML response. If you specify encoding-type request parameter, Amazon S3 includes this element in the response, and returns encoded key name values in the following response elements:  KeyMarker, NextKeyMarker, Prefix, Key, and Delimiter.
3586       */
3587      EncodingType?: EncodingType;
3588    }
3589    export interface ListObjectVersionsRequest {
3590      /**
3591       * The bucket name that contains the objects. 
3592       */
3593      Bucket: BucketName;
3594      /**
3595       * A delimiter is a character that you specify to group keys. All keys that contain the same string between the prefix and the first occurrence of the delimiter are grouped under a single result element in CommonPrefixes. These groups are counted as one result against the max-keys limitation. These keys are not returned elsewhere in the response.
3596       */
3597      Delimiter?: Delimiter;
3598      EncodingType?: EncodingType;
3599      /**
3600       * Specifies the key to start with when listing objects in a bucket.
3601       */
3602      KeyMarker?: KeyMarker;
3603      /**
3604       * Sets the maximum number of keys returned in the response. By default the action returns up to 1,000 key names. The response might contain fewer keys but will never contain more. If additional keys satisfy the search criteria, but were not returned because max-keys was exceeded, the response contains &lt;isTruncated&gt;true&lt;/isTruncated&gt;. To return the additional keys, see key-marker and version-id-marker.
3605       */
3606      MaxKeys?: MaxKeys;
3607      /**
3608       * Use this parameter to select only those keys that begin with the specified prefix. You can use prefixes to separate a bucket into different groupings of keys. (You can think of using prefix to make groups in the same way you'd use a folder in a file system.) You can use prefix with delimiter to roll up numerous objects into a single result under CommonPrefixes. 
3609       */
3610      Prefix?: Prefix;
3611      /**
3612       * Specifies the object version you want to start listing from.
3613       */
3614      VersionIdMarker?: VersionIdMarker;
3615      /**
3616       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
3617       */
3618      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
3619    }
3620    export interface ListObjectsOutput {
3621      /**
3622       * A flag that indicates whether Amazon S3 returned all of the results that satisfied the search criteria.
3623       */
3624      IsTruncated?: IsTruncated;
3625      /**
3626       * Indicates where in the bucket listing begins. Marker is included in the response if it was sent with the request.
3627       */
3628      Marker?: Marker;
3629      /**
3630       * When response is truncated (the IsTruncated element value in the response is true), you can use the key name in this field as marker in the subsequent request to get next set of objects. Amazon S3 lists objects in alphabetical order Note: This element is returned only if you have delimiter request parameter specified. If response does not include the NextMarker and it is truncated, you can use the value of the last Key in the response as the marker in the subsequent request to get the next set of object keys.
3631       */
3632      NextMarker?: NextMarker;
3633      /**
3634       * Metadata about each object returned.
3635       */
3636      Contents?: ObjectList;
3637      /**
3638       * The bucket name.
3639       */
3640      Name?: BucketName;
3641      /**
3642       * Keys that begin with the indicated prefix.
3643       */
3644      Prefix?: Prefix;
3645      /**
3646       * Causes keys that contain the same string between the prefix and the first occurrence of the delimiter to be rolled up into a single result element in the CommonPrefixes collection. These rolled-up keys are not returned elsewhere in the response. Each rolled-up result counts as only one return against the MaxKeys value.
3647       */
3648      Delimiter?: Delimiter;
3649      /**
3650       * The maximum number of keys returned in the response body.
3651       */
3652      MaxKeys?: MaxKeys;
3653      /**
3654       * All of the keys (up to 1,000) rolled up in a common prefix count as a single return when calculating the number of returns.  A response can contain CommonPrefixes only if you specify a delimiter. CommonPrefixes contains all (if there are any) keys between Prefix and the next occurrence of the string specified by the delimiter.  CommonPrefixes lists keys that act like subdirectories in the directory specified by Prefix. For example, if the prefix is notes/ and the delimiter is a slash (/) as in notes/summer/july, the common prefix is notes/summer/. All of the keys that roll up into a common prefix count as a single return when calculating the number of returns.
3655       */
3656      CommonPrefixes?: CommonPrefixList;
3657      /**
3658       * Encoding type used by Amazon S3 to encode object keys in the response.
3659       */
3660      EncodingType?: EncodingType;
3661    }
3662    export interface ListObjectsRequest {
3663      /**
3664       * The name of the bucket containing the objects. When using this action with an access point, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. When using this action with Amazon S3 on Outposts, you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action using S3 on Outposts through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the Outposts bucket ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about S3 on Outposts ARNs, see Using S3 on Outposts in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
3665       */
3666      Bucket: BucketName;
3667      /**
3668       * A delimiter is a character you use to group keys.
3669       */
3670      Delimiter?: Delimiter;
3671      EncodingType?: EncodingType;
3672      /**
3673       * Marker is where you want Amazon S3 to start listing from. Amazon S3 starts listing after this specified key. Marker can be any key in the bucket.
3674       */
3675      Marker?: Marker;
3676      /**
3677       * Sets the maximum number of keys returned in the response. By default the action returns up to 1,000 key names. The response might contain fewer keys but will never contain more. 
3678       */
3679      MaxKeys?: MaxKeys;
3680      /**
3681       * Limits the response to keys that begin with the specified prefix.
3682       */
3683      Prefix?: Prefix;
3684      /**
3685       * Confirms that the requester knows that she or he will be charged for the list objects request. Bucket owners need not specify this parameter in their requests.
3686       */
3687      RequestPayer?: RequestPayer;
3688      /**
3689       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
3690       */
3691      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
3692    }
3693    export interface ListObjectsV2Output {
3694      /**
3695       * Set to false if all of the results were returned. Set to true if more keys are available to return. If the number of results exceeds that specified by MaxKeys, all of the results might not be returned.
3696       */
3697      IsTruncated?: IsTruncated;
3698      /**
3699       * Metadata about each object returned.
3700       */
3701      Contents?: ObjectList;
3702      /**
3703       * The bucket name. When using this action with an access point, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. When using this action with Amazon S3 on Outposts, you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action using S3 on Outposts through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the Outposts bucket ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about S3 on Outposts ARNs, see Using S3 on Outposts in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
3704       */
3705      Name?: BucketName;
3706      /**
3707       *  Keys that begin with the indicated prefix.
3708       */
3709      Prefix?: Prefix;
3710      /**
3711       * Causes keys that contain the same string between the prefix and the first occurrence of the delimiter to be rolled up into a single result element in the CommonPrefixes collection. These rolled-up keys are not returned elsewhere in the response. Each rolled-up result counts as only one return against the MaxKeys value.
3712       */
3713      Delimiter?: Delimiter;
3714      /**
3715       * Sets the maximum number of keys returned in the response. By default the action returns up to 1,000 key names. The response might contain fewer keys but will never contain more.
3716       */
3717      MaxKeys?: MaxKeys;
3718      /**
3719       * All of the keys (up to 1,000) rolled up into a common prefix count as a single return when calculating the number of returns. A response can contain CommonPrefixes only if you specify a delimiter.  CommonPrefixes contains all (if there are any) keys between Prefix and the next occurrence of the string specified by a delimiter.  CommonPrefixes lists keys that act like subdirectories in the directory specified by Prefix. For example, if the prefix is notes/ and the delimiter is a slash (/) as in notes/summer/july, the common prefix is notes/summer/. All of the keys that roll up into a common prefix count as a single return when calculating the number of returns. 
3720       */
3721      CommonPrefixes?: CommonPrefixList;
3722      /**
3723       * Encoding type used by Amazon S3 to encode object key names in the XML response. If you specify the encoding-type request parameter, Amazon S3 includes this element in the response, and returns encoded key name values in the following response elements:  Delimiter, Prefix, Key, and StartAfter.
3724       */
3725      EncodingType?: EncodingType;
3726      /**
3727       * KeyCount is the number of keys returned with this request. KeyCount will always be less than or equals to MaxKeys field. Say you ask for 50 keys, your result will include less than equals 50 keys 
3728       */
3729      KeyCount?: KeyCount;
3730      /**
3731       *  If ContinuationToken was sent with the request, it is included in the response.
3732       */
3733      ContinuationToken?: Token;
3734      /**
3735       *  NextContinuationToken is sent when isTruncated is true, which means there are more keys in the bucket that can be listed. The next list requests to Amazon S3 can be continued with this NextContinuationToken. NextContinuationToken is obfuscated and is not a real key
3736       */
3737      NextContinuationToken?: NextToken;
3738      /**
3739       * If StartAfter was sent with the request, it is included in the response.
3740       */
3741      StartAfter?: StartAfter;
3742    }
3743    export interface ListObjectsV2Request {
3744      /**
3745       * Bucket name to list.  When using this action with an access point, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. When using this action with Amazon S3 on Outposts, you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action using S3 on Outposts through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the Outposts bucket ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about S3 on Outposts ARNs, see Using S3 on Outposts in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
3746       */
3747      Bucket: BucketName;
3748      /**
3749       * A delimiter is a character you use to group keys.
3750       */
3751      Delimiter?: Delimiter;
3752      /**
3753       * Encoding type used by Amazon S3 to encode object keys in the response.
3754       */
3755      EncodingType?: EncodingType;
3756      /**
3757       * Sets the maximum number of keys returned in the response. By default the action returns up to 1,000 key names. The response might contain fewer keys but will never contain more.
3758       */
3759      MaxKeys?: MaxKeys;
3760      /**
3761       * Limits the response to keys that begin with the specified prefix.
3762       */
3763      Prefix?: Prefix;
3764      /**
3765       * ContinuationToken indicates Amazon S3 that the list is being continued on this bucket with a token. ContinuationToken is obfuscated and is not a real key.
3766       */
3767      ContinuationToken?: Token;
3768      /**
3769       * The owner field is not present in listV2 by default, if you want to return owner field with each key in the result then set the fetch owner field to true.
3770       */
3771      FetchOwner?: FetchOwner;
3772      /**
3773       * StartAfter is where you want Amazon S3 to start listing from. Amazon S3 starts listing after this specified key. StartAfter can be any key in the bucket.
3774       */
3775      StartAfter?: StartAfter;
3776      /**
3777       * Confirms that the requester knows that she or he will be charged for the list objects request in V2 style. Bucket owners need not specify this parameter in their requests.
3778       */
3779      RequestPayer?: RequestPayer;
3780      /**
3781       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
3782       */
3783      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
3784    }
3785    export interface ListPartsOutput {
3786      /**
3787       * If the bucket has a lifecycle rule configured with an action to abort incomplete multipart uploads and the prefix in the lifecycle rule matches the object name in the request, then the response includes this header indicating when the initiated multipart upload will become eligible for abort operation. For more information, see Aborting Incomplete Multipart Uploads Using a Bucket Lifecycle Policy. The response will also include the x-amz-abort-rule-id header that will provide the ID of the lifecycle configuration rule that defines this action.
3788       */
3789      AbortDate?: AbortDate;
3790      /**
3791       * This header is returned along with the x-amz-abort-date header. It identifies applicable lifecycle configuration rule that defines the action to abort incomplete multipart uploads.
3792       */
3793      AbortRuleId?: AbortRuleId;
3794      /**
3795       * The name of the bucket to which the multipart upload was initiated. Does not return the access point ARN or access point alias if used.
3796       */
3797      Bucket?: BucketName;
3798      /**
3799       * Object key for which the multipart upload was initiated.
3800       */
3801      Key?: ObjectKey;
3802      /**
3803       * Upload ID identifying the multipart upload whose parts are being listed.
3804       */
3805      UploadId?: MultipartUploadId;
3806      /**
3807       * When a list is truncated, this element specifies the last part in the list, as well as the value to use for the part-number-marker request parameter in a subsequent request.
3808       */
3809      PartNumberMarker?: PartNumberMarker;
3810      /**
3811       * When a list is truncated, this element specifies the last part in the list, as well as the value to use for the part-number-marker request parameter in a subsequent request.
3812       */
3813      NextPartNumberMarker?: NextPartNumberMarker;
3814      /**
3815       * Maximum number of parts that were allowed in the response.
3816       */
3817      MaxParts?: MaxParts;
3818      /**
3819       *  Indicates whether the returned list of parts is truncated. A true value indicates that the list was truncated. A list can be truncated if the number of parts exceeds the limit returned in the MaxParts element.
3820       */
3821      IsTruncated?: IsTruncated;
3822      /**
3823       *  Container for elements related to a particular part. A response can contain zero or more Part elements.
3824       */
3825      Parts?: Parts;
3826      /**
3827       * Container element that identifies who initiated the multipart upload. If the initiator is an Amazon Web Services account, this element provides the same information as the Owner element. If the initiator is an IAM User, this element provides the user ARN and display name.
3828       */
3829      Initiator?: Initiator;
3830      /**
3831       *  Container element that identifies the object owner, after the object is created. If multipart upload is initiated by an IAM user, this element provides the parent account ID and display name.
3832       */
3833      Owner?: Owner;
3834      /**
3835       * Class of storage (STANDARD or REDUCED_REDUNDANCY) used to store the uploaded object.
3836       */
3837      StorageClass?: StorageClass;
3838      RequestCharged?: RequestCharged;
3839    }
3840    export interface ListPartsRequest {
3841      /**
3842       * The name of the bucket to which the parts are being uploaded.  When using this action with an access point, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. When using this action with Amazon S3 on Outposts, you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action using S3 on Outposts through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the Outposts bucket ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about S3 on Outposts ARNs, see Using S3 on Outposts in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
3843       */
3844      Bucket: BucketName;
3845      /**
3846       * Object key for which the multipart upload was initiated.
3847       */
3848      Key: ObjectKey;
3849      /**
3850       * Sets the maximum number of parts to return.
3851       */
3852      MaxParts?: MaxParts;
3853      /**
3854       * Specifies the part after which listing should begin. Only parts with higher part numbers will be listed.
3855       */
3856      PartNumberMarker?: PartNumberMarker;
3857      /**
3858       * Upload ID identifying the multipart upload whose parts are being listed.
3859       */
3860      UploadId: MultipartUploadId;
3861      RequestPayer?: RequestPayer;
3862      /**
3863       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
3864       */
3865      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
3866    }
3867    export type Location = string;
3868    export type LocationPrefix = string;
3869    export interface LoggingEnabled {
3870      /**
3871       * Specifies the bucket where you want Amazon S3 to store server access logs. You can have your logs delivered to any bucket that you own, including the same bucket that is being logged. You can also configure multiple buckets to deliver their logs to the same target bucket. In this case, you should choose a different TargetPrefix for each source bucket so that the delivered log files can be distinguished by key.
3872       */
3873      TargetBucket: TargetBucket;
3874      /**
3875       * Container for granting information.
3876       */
3877      TargetGrants?: TargetGrants;
3878      /**
3879       * A prefix for all log object keys. If you store log files from multiple Amazon S3 buckets in a single bucket, you can use a prefix to distinguish which log files came from which bucket.
3880       */
3881      TargetPrefix: TargetPrefix;
3882    }
3883    export type MFA = string;
3884    export type MFADelete = "Enabled"|"Disabled"|string;
3885    export type MFADeleteStatus = "Enabled"|"Disabled"|string;
3886    export type Marker = string;
3887    export type MaxAgeSeconds = number;
3888    export type MaxKeys = number;
3889    export type MaxParts = number;
3890    export type MaxUploads = number;
3891    export type Message = string;
3892    export type Metadata = {[key: string]: MetadataValue};
3893    export type MetadataDirective = "COPY"|"REPLACE"|string;
3894    export interface MetadataEntry {
3895      /**
3896       * Name of the Object.
3897       */
3898      Name?: MetadataKey;
3899      /**
3900       * Value of the Object.
3901       */
3902      Value?: MetadataValue;
3903    }
3904    export type MetadataKey = string;
3905    export type MetadataValue = string;
3906    export interface Metrics {
3907      /**
3908       *  Specifies whether the replication metrics are enabled. 
3909       */
3910      Status: MetricsStatus;
3911      /**
3912       *  A container specifying the time threshold for emitting the s3:Replication:OperationMissedThreshold event. 
3913       */
3914      EventThreshold?: ReplicationTimeValue;
3915    }
3916    export interface MetricsAndOperator {
3917      /**
3918       * The prefix used when evaluating an AND predicate.
3919       */
3920      Prefix?: Prefix;
3921      /**
3922       * The list of tags used when evaluating an AND predicate.
3923       */
3924      Tags?: TagSet;
3925    }
3926    export interface MetricsConfiguration {
3927      /**
3928       * The ID used to identify the metrics configuration.
3929       */
3930      Id: MetricsId;
3931      /**
3932       * Specifies a metrics configuration filter. The metrics configuration will only include objects that meet the filter's criteria. A filter must be a prefix, a tag, or a conjunction (MetricsAndOperator).
3933       */
3934      Filter?: MetricsFilter;
3935    }
3936    export type MetricsConfigurationList = MetricsConfiguration[];
3937    export interface MetricsFilter {
3938      /**
3939       * The prefix used when evaluating a metrics filter.
3940       */
3941      Prefix?: Prefix;
3942      /**
3943       * The tag used when evaluating a metrics filter.
3944       */
3945      Tag?: Tag;
3946      /**
3947       * A conjunction (logical AND) of predicates, which is used in evaluating a metrics filter. The operator must have at least two predicates, and an object must match all of the predicates in order for the filter to apply.
3948       */
3949      And?: MetricsAndOperator;
3950    }
3951    export type MetricsId = string;
3952    export type MetricsStatus = "Enabled"|"Disabled"|string;
3953    export type Minutes = number;
3954    export type MissingMeta = number;
3955    export interface MultipartUpload {
3956      /**
3957       * Upload ID that identifies the multipart upload.
3958       */
3959      UploadId?: MultipartUploadId;
3960      /**
3961       * Key of the object for which the multipart upload was initiated.
3962       */
3963      Key?: ObjectKey;
3964      /**
3965       * Date and time at which the multipart upload was initiated.
3966       */
3967      Initiated?: Initiated;
3968      /**
3969       * The class of storage used to store the object.
3970       */
3971      StorageClass?: StorageClass;
3972      /**
3973       * Specifies the owner of the object that is part of the multipart upload. 
3974       */
3975      Owner?: Owner;
3976      /**
3977       * Identifies who initiated the multipart upload.
3978       */
3979      Initiator?: Initiator;
3980    }
3981    export type MultipartUploadId = string;
3982    export type MultipartUploadList = MultipartUpload[];
3983    export type NextKeyMarker = string;
3984    export type NextMarker = string;
3985    export type NextPartNumberMarker = number;
3986    export type NextToken = string;
3987    export type NextUploadIdMarker = string;
3988    export type NextVersionIdMarker = string;
3989    export interface NoncurrentVersionExpiration {
3990      /**
3991       * Specifies the number of days an object is noncurrent before Amazon S3 can perform the associated action. For information about the noncurrent days calculations, see How Amazon S3 Calculates When an Object Became Noncurrent in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
3992       */
3993      NoncurrentDays?: Days;
3994    }
3995    export interface NoncurrentVersionTransition {
3996      /**
3997       * Specifies the number of days an object is noncurrent before Amazon S3 can perform the associated action. For information about the noncurrent days calculations, see How Amazon S3 Calculates How Long an Object Has Been Noncurrent in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
3998       */
3999      NoncurrentDays?: Days;
4000      /**
4001       * The class of storage used to store the object.
4002       */
4003      StorageClass?: TransitionStorageClass;
4004    }
4005    export type NoncurrentVersionTransitionList = NoncurrentVersionTransition[];
4006    export interface NotificationConfiguration {
4007      /**
4008       * The topic to which notifications are sent and the events for which notifications are generated.
4009       */
4010      TopicConfigurations?: TopicConfigurationList;
4011      /**
4012       * The Amazon Simple Queue Service queues to publish messages to and the events for which to publish messages.
4013       */
4014      QueueConfigurations?: QueueConfigurationList;
4015      /**
4016       * Describes the Lambda functions to invoke and the events for which to invoke them.
4017       */
4018      LambdaFunctionConfigurations?: LambdaFunctionConfigurationList;
4019    }
4020    export interface NotificationConfigurationDeprecated {
4021      /**
4022       * This data type is deprecated. A container for specifying the configuration for publication of messages to an Amazon Simple Notification Service (Amazon SNS) topic when Amazon S3 detects specified events. 
4023       */
4024      TopicConfiguration?: TopicConfigurationDeprecated;
4025      /**
4026       * This data type is deprecated. This data type specifies the configuration for publishing messages to an Amazon Simple Queue Service (Amazon SQS) queue when Amazon S3 detects specified events. 
4027       */
4028      QueueConfiguration?: QueueConfigurationDeprecated;
4029      /**
4030       * Container for specifying the Lambda notification configuration.
4031       */
4032      CloudFunctionConfiguration?: CloudFunctionConfiguration;
4033    }
4034    export interface NotificationConfigurationFilter {
4035      Key?: S3KeyFilter;
4036    }
4037    export type NotificationId = string;
4038    export interface Object {
4039      /**
4040       * The name that you assign to an object. You use the object key to retrieve the object.
4041       */
4042      Key?: ObjectKey;
4043      /**
4044       * Creation date of the object.
4045       */
4046      LastModified?: LastModified;
4047      /**
4048       * The entity tag is a hash of the object. The ETag reflects changes only to the contents of an object, not its metadata. The ETag may or may not be an MD5 digest of the object data. Whether or not it is depends on how the object was created and how it is encrypted as described below:   Objects created by the PUT Object, POST Object, or Copy operation, or through the Amazon Web Services Management Console, and are encrypted by SSE-S3 or plaintext, have ETags that are an MD5 digest of their object data.   Objects created by the PUT Object, POST Object, or Copy operation, or through the Amazon Web Services Management Console, and are encrypted by SSE-C or SSE-KMS, have ETags that are not an MD5 digest of their object data.   If an object is created by either the Multipart Upload or Part Copy operation, the ETag is not an MD5 digest, regardless of the method of encryption.  
4049       */
4050      ETag?: ETag;
4051      /**
4052       * Size in bytes of the object
4053       */
4054      Size?: Size;
4055      /**
4056       * The class of storage used to store the object.
4057       */
4058      StorageClass?: ObjectStorageClass;
4059      /**
4060       * The owner of the object
4061       */
4062      Owner?: Owner;
4063    }
4064    export type ObjectCannedACL = "private"|"public-read"|"public-read-write"|"authenticated-read"|"aws-exec-read"|"bucket-owner-read"|"bucket-owner-full-control"|string;
4065    export interface ObjectIdentifier {
4066      /**
4067       * Key name of the object.  Replacement must be made for object keys containing special characters (such as carriage returns) when using XML requests. For more information, see  XML related object key constraints. 
4068       */
4069      Key: ObjectKey;
4070      /**
4071       * VersionId for the specific version of the object to delete.
4072       */
4073      VersionId?: ObjectVersionId;
4074    }
4075    export type ObjectIdentifierList = ObjectIdentifier[];
4076    export type ObjectKey = string;
4077    export type ObjectList = Object[];
4078    export interface ObjectLockConfiguration {
4079      /**
4080       * Indicates whether this bucket has an Object Lock configuration enabled. Enable ObjectLockEnabled when you apply ObjectLockConfiguration to a bucket. 
4081       */
4082      ObjectLockEnabled?: ObjectLockEnabled;
4083      /**
4084       * Specifies the Object Lock rule for the specified object. Enable the this rule when you apply ObjectLockConfiguration to a bucket. Bucket settings require both a mode and a period. The period can be either Days or Years but you must select one. You cannot specify Days and Years at the same time.
4085       */
4086      Rule?: ObjectLockRule;
4087    }
4088    export type ObjectLockEnabled = "Enabled"|string;
4089    export type ObjectLockEnabledForBucket = boolean;
4090    export interface ObjectLockLegalHold {
4091      /**
4092       * Indicates whether the specified object has a Legal Hold in place.
4093       */
4094      Status?: ObjectLockLegalHoldStatus;
4095    }
4096    export type ObjectLockLegalHoldStatus = "ON"|"OFF"|string;
4097    export type ObjectLockMode = "GOVERNANCE"|"COMPLIANCE"|string;
4098    export type ObjectLockRetainUntilDate = Date;
4099    export interface ObjectLockRetention {
4100      /**
4101       * Indicates the Retention mode for the specified object.
4102       */
4103      Mode?: ObjectLockRetentionMode;
4104      /**
4105       * The date on which this Object Lock Retention will expire.
4106       */
4107      RetainUntilDate?: _Date;
4108    }
4109    export type ObjectLockRetentionMode = "GOVERNANCE"|"COMPLIANCE"|string;
4110    export interface ObjectLockRule {
4111      /**
4112       * The default Object Lock retention mode and period that you want to apply to new objects placed in the specified bucket. Bucket settings require both a mode and a period. The period can be either Days or Years but you must select one. You cannot specify Days and Years at the same time.
4113       */
4114      DefaultRetention?: DefaultRetention;
4115    }
4116    export type ObjectLockToken = string;
4117    export type ObjectOwnership = "BucketOwnerPreferred"|"ObjectWriter"|string;
4118    export type ObjectStorageClass = "STANDARD"|"REDUCED_REDUNDANCY"|"GLACIER"|"STANDARD_IA"|"ONEZONE_IA"|"INTELLIGENT_TIERING"|"DEEP_ARCHIVE"|"OUTPOSTS"|string;
4119    export interface ObjectVersion {
4120      /**
4121       * The entity tag is an MD5 hash of that version of the object.
4122       */
4123      ETag?: ETag;
4124      /**
4125       * Size in bytes of the object.
4126       */
4127      Size?: Size;
4128      /**
4129       * The class of storage used to store the object.
4130       */
4131      StorageClass?: ObjectVersionStorageClass;
4132      /**
4133       * The object key.
4134       */
4135      Key?: ObjectKey;
4136      /**
4137       * Version ID of an object.
4138       */
4139      VersionId?: ObjectVersionId;
4140      /**
4141       * Specifies whether the object is (true) or is not (false) the latest version of an object.
4142       */
4143      IsLatest?: IsLatest;
4144      /**
4145       * Date and time the object was last modified.
4146       */
4147      LastModified?: LastModified;
4148      /**
4149       * Specifies the owner of the object.
4150       */
4151      Owner?: Owner;
4152    }
4153    export type ObjectVersionId = string;
4154    export type ObjectVersionList = ObjectVersion[];
4155    export type ObjectVersionStorageClass = "STANDARD"|string;
4156    export interface OutputLocation {
4157      /**
4158       * Describes an S3 location that will receive the results of the restore request.
4159       */
4160      S3?: S3Location;
4161    }
4162    export interface OutputSerialization {
4163      /**
4164       * Describes the serialization of CSV-encoded Select results.
4165       */
4166      CSV?: CSVOutput;
4167      /**
4168       * Specifies JSON as request's output serialization format.
4169       */
4170      JSON?: JSONOutput;
4171    }
4172    export interface Owner {
4173      /**
4174       * Container for the display name of the owner.
4175       */
4176      DisplayName?: DisplayName;
4177      /**
4178       * Container for the ID of the owner.
4179       */
4180      ID?: ID;
4181    }
4182    export type OwnerOverride = "Destination"|string;
4183    export interface OwnershipControls {
4184      /**
4185       * The container element for an ownership control rule.
4186       */
4187      Rules: OwnershipControlsRules;
4188    }
4189    export interface OwnershipControlsRule {
4190      ObjectOwnership: ObjectOwnership;
4191    }
4192    export type OwnershipControlsRules = OwnershipControlsRule[];
4193    export interface ParquetInput {
4194    }
4195    export interface Part {
4196      /**
4197       * Part number identifying the part. This is a positive integer between 1 and 10,000.
4198       */
4199      PartNumber?: PartNumber;
4200      /**
4201       * Date and time at which the part was uploaded.
4202       */
4203      LastModified?: LastModified;
4204      /**
4205       * Entity tag returned when the part was uploaded.
4206       */
4207      ETag?: ETag;
4208      /**
4209       * Size in bytes of the uploaded part data.
4210       */
4211      Size?: Size;
4212    }
4213    export type PartNumber = number;
4214    export type PartNumberMarker = number;
4215    export type Parts = Part[];
4216    export type PartsCount = number;
4217    export type Payer = "Requester"|"BucketOwner"|string;
4218    export type Permission = "FULL_CONTROL"|"WRITE"|"WRITE_ACP"|"READ"|"READ_ACP"|string;
4219    export type Policy = string;
4220    export interface PolicyStatus {
4221      /**
4222       * The policy status for this bucket. TRUE indicates that this bucket is public. FALSE indicates that the bucket is not public.
4223       */
4224      IsPublic?: IsPublic;
4225    }
4226    export type Prefix = string;
4227    export type Priority = number;
4228    export interface Progress {
4229      /**
4230       * The current number of object bytes scanned.
4231       */
4232      BytesScanned?: BytesScanned;
4233      /**
4234       * The current number of uncompressed object bytes processed.
4235       */
4236      BytesProcessed?: BytesProcessed;
4237      /**
4238       * The current number of bytes of records payload data returned.
4239       */
4240      BytesReturned?: BytesReturned;
4241    }
4242    export interface ProgressEvent {
4243      /**
4244       * The Progress event details.
4245       */
4246      Details?: Progress;
4247    }
4248    export type Protocol = "http"|"https"|string;
4249    export interface PublicAccessBlockConfiguration {
4250      /**
4251       * Specifies whether Amazon S3 should block public access control lists (ACLs) for this bucket and objects in this bucket. Setting this element to TRUE causes the following behavior:   PUT Bucket acl and PUT Object acl calls fail if the specified ACL is public.   PUT Object calls fail if the request includes a public ACL.   PUT Bucket calls fail if the request includes a public ACL.   Enabling this setting doesn't affect existing policies or ACLs.
4252       */
4253      BlockPublicAcls?: Setting;
4254      /**
4255       * Specifies whether Amazon S3 should ignore public ACLs for this bucket and objects in this bucket. Setting this element to TRUE causes Amazon S3 to ignore all public ACLs on this bucket and objects in this bucket. Enabling this setting doesn't affect the persistence of any existing ACLs and doesn't prevent new public ACLs from being set.
4256       */
4257      IgnorePublicAcls?: Setting;
4258      /**
4259       * Specifies whether Amazon S3 should block public bucket policies for this bucket. Setting this element to TRUE causes Amazon S3 to reject calls to PUT Bucket policy if the specified bucket policy allows public access.  Enabling this setting doesn't affect existing bucket policies.
4260       */
4261      BlockPublicPolicy?: Setting;
4262      /**
4263       * Specifies whether Amazon S3 should restrict public bucket policies for this bucket. Setting this element to TRUE restricts access to this bucket to only Amazon Web Service principals and authorized users within this account if the bucket has a public policy. Enabling this setting doesn't affect previously stored bucket policies, except that public and cross-account access within any public bucket policy, including non-public delegation to specific accounts, is blocked.
4264       */
4265      RestrictPublicBuckets?: Setting;
4266    }
4267    export interface PutBucketAccelerateConfigurationRequest {
4268      /**
4269       * The name of the bucket for which the accelerate configuration is set.
4270       */
4271      Bucket: BucketName;
4272      /**
4273       * Container for setting the transfer acceleration state.
4274       */
4275      AccelerateConfiguration: AccelerateConfiguration;
4276      /**
4277       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
4278       */
4279      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
4280    }
4281    export interface PutBucketAclRequest {
4282      /**
4283       * The canned ACL to apply to the bucket.
4284       */
4285      ACL?: BucketCannedACL;
4286      /**
4287       * Contains the elements that set the ACL permissions for an object per grantee.
4288       */
4289      AccessControlPolicy?: AccessControlPolicy;
4290      /**
4291       * The bucket to which to apply the ACL.
4292       */
4293      Bucket: BucketName;
4294      /**
4295       * The base64-encoded 128-bit MD5 digest of the data. This header must be used as a message integrity check to verify that the request body was not corrupted in transit. For more information, go to RFC 1864.  For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically.
4296       */
4297      ContentMD5?: ContentMD5;
4298      /**
4299       * Allows grantee the read, write, read ACP, and write ACP permissions on the bucket.
4300       */
4301      GrantFullControl?: GrantFullControl;
4302      /**
4303       * Allows grantee to list the objects in the bucket.
4304       */
4305      GrantRead?: GrantRead;
4306      /**
4307       * Allows grantee to read the bucket ACL.
4308       */
4309      GrantReadACP?: GrantReadACP;
4310      /**
4311       * Allows grantee to create new objects in the bucket. For the bucket and object owners of existing objects, also allows deletions and overwrites of those objects.
4312       */
4313      GrantWrite?: GrantWrite;
4314      /**
4315       * Allows grantee to write the ACL for the applicable bucket.
4316       */
4317      GrantWriteACP?: GrantWriteACP;
4318      /**
4319       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
4320       */
4321      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
4322    }
4323    export interface PutBucketAnalyticsConfigurationRequest {
4324      /**
4325       * The name of the bucket to which an analytics configuration is stored.
4326       */
4327      Bucket: BucketName;
4328      /**
4329       * The ID that identifies the analytics configuration.
4330       */
4331      Id: AnalyticsId;
4332      /**
4333       * The configuration and any analyses for the analytics filter.
4334       */
4335      AnalyticsConfiguration: AnalyticsConfiguration;
4336      /**
4337       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
4338       */
4339      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
4340    }
4341    export interface PutBucketCorsRequest {
4342      /**
4343       * Specifies the bucket impacted by the corsconfiguration.
4344       */
4345      Bucket: BucketName;
4346      /**
4347       * Describes the cross-origin access configuration for objects in an Amazon S3 bucket. For more information, see Enabling Cross-Origin Resource Sharing in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
4348       */
4349      CORSConfiguration: CORSConfiguration;
4350      /**
4351       * The base64-encoded 128-bit MD5 digest of the data. This header must be used as a message integrity check to verify that the request body was not corrupted in transit. For more information, go to RFC 1864.  For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically.
4352       */
4353      ContentMD5?: ContentMD5;
4354      /**
4355       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
4356       */
4357      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
4358    }
4359    export interface PutBucketEncryptionRequest {
4360      /**
4361       * Specifies default encryption for a bucket using server-side encryption with Amazon S3-managed keys (SSE-S3) or customer master keys stored in Amazon Web Services KMS (SSE-KMS). For information about the Amazon S3 default encryption feature, see Amazon S3 Default Bucket Encryption in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
4362       */
4363      Bucket: BucketName;
4364      /**
4365       * The base64-encoded 128-bit MD5 digest of the server-side encryption configuration. For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically.
4366       */
4367      ContentMD5?: ContentMD5;
4368      ServerSideEncryptionConfiguration: ServerSideEncryptionConfiguration;
4369      /**
4370       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
4371       */
4372      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
4373    }
4374    export interface PutBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurationRequest {
4375      /**
4376       * The name of the Amazon S3 bucket whose configuration you want to modify or retrieve.
4377       */
4378      Bucket: BucketName;
4379      /**
4380       * The ID used to identify the S3 Intelligent-Tiering configuration.
4381       */
4382      Id: IntelligentTieringId;
4383      /**
4384       * Container for S3 Intelligent-Tiering configuration.
4385       */
4386      IntelligentTieringConfiguration: IntelligentTieringConfiguration;
4387    }
4388    export interface PutBucketInventoryConfigurationRequest {
4389      /**
4390       * The name of the bucket where the inventory configuration will be stored.
4391       */
4392      Bucket: BucketName;
4393      /**
4394       * The ID used to identify the inventory configuration.
4395       */
4396      Id: InventoryId;
4397      /**
4398       * Specifies the inventory configuration.
4399       */
4400      InventoryConfiguration: InventoryConfiguration;
4401      /**
4402       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
4403       */
4404      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
4405    }
4406    export interface PutBucketLifecycleConfigurationRequest {
4407      /**
4408       * The name of the bucket for which to set the configuration.
4409       */
4410      Bucket: BucketName;
4411      /**
4412       * Container for lifecycle rules. You can add as many as 1,000 rules.
4413       */
4414      LifecycleConfiguration?: BucketLifecycleConfiguration;
4415      /**
4416       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
4417       */
4418      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
4419    }
4420    export interface PutBucketLifecycleRequest {
4421      /**
4422       * 
4423       */
4424      Bucket: BucketName;
4425      /**
4426       *  For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically.
4427       */
4428      ContentMD5?: ContentMD5;
4429      /**
4430       * 
4431       */
4432      LifecycleConfiguration?: LifecycleConfiguration;
4433      /**
4434       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
4435       */
4436      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
4437    }
4438    export interface PutBucketLoggingRequest {
4439      /**
4440       * The name of the bucket for which to set the logging parameters.
4441       */
4442      Bucket: BucketName;
4443      /**
4444       * Container for logging status information.
4445       */
4446      BucketLoggingStatus: BucketLoggingStatus;
4447      /**
4448       * The MD5 hash of the PutBucketLogging request body. For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically.
4449       */
4450      ContentMD5?: ContentMD5;
4451      /**
4452       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
4453       */
4454      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
4455    }
4456    export interface PutBucketMetricsConfigurationRequest {
4457      /**
4458       * The name of the bucket for which the metrics configuration is set.
4459       */
4460      Bucket: BucketName;
4461      /**
4462       * The ID used to identify the metrics configuration.
4463       */
4464      Id: MetricsId;
4465      /**
4466       * Specifies the metrics configuration.
4467       */
4468      MetricsConfiguration: MetricsConfiguration;
4469      /**
4470       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
4471       */
4472      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
4473    }
4474    export interface PutBucketNotificationConfigurationRequest {
4475      /**
4476       * The name of the bucket.
4477       */
4478      Bucket: BucketName;
4479      NotificationConfiguration: NotificationConfiguration;
4480      /**
4481       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
4482       */
4483      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
4484    }
4485    export interface PutBucketNotificationRequest {
4486      /**
4487       * The name of the bucket.
4488       */
4489      Bucket: BucketName;
4490      /**
4491       * The MD5 hash of the PutPublicAccessBlock request body. For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically.
4492       */
4493      ContentMD5?: ContentMD5;
4494      /**
4495       * The container for the configuration.
4496       */
4497      NotificationConfiguration: NotificationConfigurationDeprecated;
4498      /**
4499       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
4500       */
4501      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
4502    }
4503    export interface PutBucketOwnershipControlsRequest {
4504      /**
4505       * The name of the Amazon S3 bucket whose OwnershipControls you want to set.
4506       */
4507      Bucket: BucketName;
4508      /**
4509       * The MD5 hash of the OwnershipControls request body.  For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically.
4510       */
4511      ContentMD5?: ContentMD5;
4512      /**
4513       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
4514       */
4515      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
4516      /**
4517       * The OwnershipControls (BucketOwnerPreferred or ObjectWriter) that you want to apply to this Amazon S3 bucket.
4518       */
4519      OwnershipControls: OwnershipControls;
4520    }
4521    export interface PutBucketPolicyRequest {
4522      /**
4523       * The name of the bucket.
4524       */
4525      Bucket: BucketName;
4526      /**
4527       * The MD5 hash of the request body. For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically.
4528       */
4529      ContentMD5?: ContentMD5;
4530      /**
4531       * Set this parameter to true to confirm that you want to remove your permissions to change this bucket policy in the future.
4532       */
4533      ConfirmRemoveSelfBucketAccess?: ConfirmRemoveSelfBucketAccess;
4534      /**
4535       * The bucket policy as a JSON document.
4536       */
4537      Policy: Policy;
4538      /**
4539       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
4540       */
4541      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
4542    }
4543    export interface PutBucketReplicationRequest {
4544      /**
4545       * The name of the bucket
4546       */
4547      Bucket: BucketName;
4548      /**
4549       * The base64-encoded 128-bit MD5 digest of the data. You must use this header as a message integrity check to verify that the request body was not corrupted in transit. For more information, see RFC 1864. For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically.
4550       */
4551      ContentMD5?: ContentMD5;
4552      ReplicationConfiguration: ReplicationConfiguration;
4553      /**
4554       * A token to allow Object Lock to be enabled for an existing bucket.
4555       */
4556      Token?: ObjectLockToken;
4557      /**
4558       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
4559       */
4560      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
4561    }
4562    export interface PutBucketRequestPaymentRequest {
4563      /**
4564       * The bucket name.
4565       */
4566      Bucket: BucketName;
4567      /**
4568       * The base64-encoded 128-bit MD5 digest of the data. You must use this header as a message integrity check to verify that the request body was not corrupted in transit. For more information, see RFC 1864. For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically.
4569       */
4570      ContentMD5?: ContentMD5;
4571      /**
4572       * Container for Payer.
4573       */
4574      RequestPaymentConfiguration: RequestPaymentConfiguration;
4575      /**
4576       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
4577       */
4578      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
4579    }
4580    export interface PutBucketTaggingRequest {
4581      /**
4582       * The bucket name.
4583       */
4584      Bucket: BucketName;
4585      /**
4586       * The base64-encoded 128-bit MD5 digest of the data. You must use this header as a message integrity check to verify that the request body was not corrupted in transit. For more information, see RFC 1864. For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically.
4587       */
4588      ContentMD5?: ContentMD5;
4589      /**
4590       * Container for the TagSet and Tag elements.
4591       */
4592      Tagging: Tagging;
4593      /**
4594       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
4595       */
4596      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
4597    }
4598    export interface PutBucketVersioningRequest {
4599      /**
4600       * The bucket name.
4601       */
4602      Bucket: BucketName;
4603      /**
4604       * &gt;The base64-encoded 128-bit MD5 digest of the data. You must use this header as a message integrity check to verify that the request body was not corrupted in transit. For more information, see RFC 1864. For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically.
4605       */
4606      ContentMD5?: ContentMD5;
4607      /**
4608       * The concatenation of the authentication device's serial number, a space, and the value that is displayed on your authentication device.
4609       */
4610      MFA?: MFA;
4611      /**
4612       * Container for setting the versioning state.
4613       */
4614      VersioningConfiguration: VersioningConfiguration;
4615      /**
4616       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
4617       */
4618      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
4619    }
4620    export interface PutBucketWebsiteRequest {
4621      /**
4622       * The bucket name.
4623       */
4624      Bucket: BucketName;
4625      /**
4626       * The base64-encoded 128-bit MD5 digest of the data. You must use this header as a message integrity check to verify that the request body was not corrupted in transit. For more information, see RFC 1864. For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically.
4627       */
4628      ContentMD5?: ContentMD5;
4629      /**
4630       * Container for the request.
4631       */
4632      WebsiteConfiguration: WebsiteConfiguration;
4633      /**
4634       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
4635       */
4636      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
4637    }
4638    export interface PutObjectAclOutput {
4639      RequestCharged?: RequestCharged;
4640    }
4641    export interface PutObjectAclRequest {
4642      /**
4643       * The canned ACL to apply to the object. For more information, see Canned ACL.
4644       */
4645      ACL?: ObjectCannedACL;
4646      /**
4647       * Contains the elements that set the ACL permissions for an object per grantee.
4648       */
4649      AccessControlPolicy?: AccessControlPolicy;
4650      /**
4651       * The bucket name that contains the object to which you want to attach the ACL.  When using this action with an access point, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
4652       */
4653      Bucket: BucketName;
4654      /**
4655       * The base64-encoded 128-bit MD5 digest of the data. This header must be used as a message integrity check to verify that the request body was not corrupted in transit. For more information, go to RFC 1864.&gt;  For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically.
4656       */
4657      ContentMD5?: ContentMD5;
4658      /**
4659       * Allows grantee the read, write, read ACP, and write ACP permissions on the bucket. This action is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts.
4660       */
4661      GrantFullControl?: GrantFullControl;
4662      /**
4663       * Allows grantee to list the objects in the bucket. This action is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts.
4664       */
4665      GrantRead?: GrantRead;
4666      /**
4667       * Allows grantee to read the bucket ACL. This action is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts.
4668       */
4669      GrantReadACP?: GrantReadACP;
4670      /**
4671       * Allows grantee to create new objects in the bucket. For the bucket and object owners of existing objects, also allows deletions and overwrites of those objects.
4672       */
4673      GrantWrite?: GrantWrite;
4674      /**
4675       * Allows grantee to write the ACL for the applicable bucket. This action is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts.
4676       */
4677      GrantWriteACP?: GrantWriteACP;
4678      /**
4679       * Key for which the PUT action was initiated. When using this action with an access point, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. When using this action with Amazon S3 on Outposts, you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action using S3 on Outposts through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the Outposts bucket ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about S3 on Outposts ARNs, see Using S3 on Outposts in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
4680       */
4681      Key: ObjectKey;
4682      RequestPayer?: RequestPayer;
4683      /**
4684       * VersionId used to reference a specific version of the object.
4685       */
4686      VersionId?: ObjectVersionId;
4687      /**
4688       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
4689       */
4690      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
4691    }
4692    export interface PutObjectLegalHoldOutput {
4693      RequestCharged?: RequestCharged;
4694    }
4695    export interface PutObjectLegalHoldRequest {
4696      /**
4697       * The bucket name containing the object that you want to place a Legal Hold on.  When using this action with an access point, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
4698       */
4699      Bucket: BucketName;
4700      /**
4701       * The key name for the object that you want to place a Legal Hold on.
4702       */
4703      Key: ObjectKey;
4704      /**
4705       * Container element for the Legal Hold configuration you want to apply to the specified object.
4706       */
4707      LegalHold?: ObjectLockLegalHold;
4708      RequestPayer?: RequestPayer;
4709      /**
4710       * The version ID of the object that you want to place a Legal Hold on.
4711       */
4712      VersionId?: ObjectVersionId;
4713      /**
4714       * The MD5 hash for the request body. For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically.
4715       */
4716      ContentMD5?: ContentMD5;
4717      /**
4718       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
4719       */
4720      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
4721    }
4722    export interface PutObjectLockConfigurationOutput {
4723      RequestCharged?: RequestCharged;
4724    }
4725    export interface PutObjectLockConfigurationRequest {
4726      /**
4727       * The bucket whose Object Lock configuration you want to create or replace.
4728       */
4729      Bucket: BucketName;
4730      /**
4731       * The Object Lock configuration that you want to apply to the specified bucket.
4732       */
4733      ObjectLockConfiguration?: ObjectLockConfiguration;
4734      RequestPayer?: RequestPayer;
4735      /**
4736       * A token to allow Object Lock to be enabled for an existing bucket.
4737       */
4738      Token?: ObjectLockToken;
4739      /**
4740       * The MD5 hash for the request body. For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically.
4741       */
4742      ContentMD5?: ContentMD5;
4743      /**
4744       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
4745       */
4746      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
4747    }
4748    export interface PutObjectOutput {
4749      /**
4750       *  If the expiration is configured for the object (see PutBucketLifecycleConfiguration), the response includes this header. It includes the expiry-date and rule-id key-value pairs that provide information about object expiration. The value of the rule-id is URL encoded.
4751       */
4752      Expiration?: Expiration;
4753      /**
4754       * Entity tag for the uploaded object.
4755       */
4756      ETag?: ETag;
4757      /**
4758       * If you specified server-side encryption either with an Amazon Web Services KMS customer master key (CMK) or Amazon S3-managed encryption key in your PUT request, the response includes this header. It confirms the encryption algorithm that Amazon S3 used to encrypt the object.
4759       */
4760      ServerSideEncryption?: ServerSideEncryption;
4761      /**
4762       * Version of the object.
4763       */
4764      VersionId?: ObjectVersionId;
4765      /**
4766       * If server-side encryption with a customer-provided encryption key was requested, the response will include this header confirming the encryption algorithm used.
4767       */
4768      SSECustomerAlgorithm?: SSECustomerAlgorithm;
4769      /**
4770       * If server-side encryption with a customer-provided encryption key was requested, the response will include this header to provide round-trip message integrity verification of the customer-provided encryption key.
4771       */
4772      SSECustomerKeyMD5?: SSECustomerKeyMD5;
4773      /**
4774       * If x-amz-server-side-encryption is present and has the value of aws:kms, this header specifies the ID of the Amazon Web Services Key Management Service (Amazon Web Services KMS) symmetric customer managed customer master key (CMK) that was used for the object. 
4775       */
4776      SSEKMSKeyId?: SSEKMSKeyId;
4777      /**
4778       * If present, specifies the Amazon Web Services KMS Encryption Context to use for object encryption. The value of this header is a base64-encoded UTF-8 string holding JSON with the encryption context key-value pairs.
4779       */
4780      SSEKMSEncryptionContext?: SSEKMSEncryptionContext;
4781      /**
4782       * Indicates whether the uploaded object uses an S3 Bucket Key for server-side encryption with Amazon Web Services KMS (SSE-KMS).
4783       */
4784      BucketKeyEnabled?: BucketKeyEnabled;
4785      RequestCharged?: RequestCharged;
4786    }
4787    export interface PutObjectRequest {
4788      /**
4789       * The canned ACL to apply to the object. For more information, see Canned ACL. This action is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts.
4790       */
4791      ACL?: ObjectCannedACL;
4792      /**
4793       * Object data.
4794       */
4795      Body?: Body;
4796      /**
4797       * The bucket name to which the PUT action was initiated.  When using this action with an access point, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. When using this action with Amazon S3 on Outposts, you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action using S3 on Outposts through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the Outposts bucket ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about S3 on Outposts ARNs, see Using S3 on Outposts in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
4798       */
4799      Bucket: BucketName;
4800      /**
4801       *  Can be used to specify caching behavior along the request/reply chain. For more information, see http://www.w3.org/Protocols/rfc2616/rfc2616-sec14.html#sec14.9.
4802       */
4803      CacheControl?: CacheControl;
4804      /**
4805       * Specifies presentational information for the object. For more information, see http://www.w3.org/Protocols/rfc2616/rfc2616-sec19.html#sec19.5.1.
4806       */
4807      ContentDisposition?: ContentDisposition;
4808      /**
4809       * Specifies what content encodings have been applied to the object and thus what decoding mechanisms must be applied to obtain the media-type referenced by the Content-Type header field. For more information, see http://www.w3.org/Protocols/rfc2616/rfc2616-sec14.html#sec14.11.
4810       */
4811      ContentEncoding?: ContentEncoding;
4812      /**
4813       * The language the content is in.
4814       */
4815      ContentLanguage?: ContentLanguage;
4816      /**
4817       * Size of the body in bytes. This parameter is useful when the size of the body cannot be determined automatically. For more information, see http://www.w3.org/Protocols/rfc2616/rfc2616-sec14.html#sec14.13.
4818       */
4819      ContentLength?: ContentLength;
4820      /**
4821       * The base64-encoded 128-bit MD5 digest of the message (without the headers) according to RFC 1864. This header can be used as a message integrity check to verify that the data is the same data that was originally sent. Although it is optional, we recommend using the Content-MD5 mechanism as an end-to-end integrity check. For more information about REST request authentication, see REST Authentication.
4822       */
4823      ContentMD5?: ContentMD5;
4824      /**
4825       * A standard MIME type describing the format of the contents. For more information, see http://www.w3.org/Protocols/rfc2616/rfc2616-sec14.html#sec14.17.
4826       */
4827      ContentType?: ContentType;
4828      /**
4829       * The date and time at which the object is no longer cacheable. For more information, see http://www.w3.org/Protocols/rfc2616/rfc2616-sec14.html#sec14.21.
4830       */
4831      Expires?: Expires;
4832      /**
4833       * Gives the grantee READ, READ_ACP, and WRITE_ACP permissions on the object. This action is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts.
4834       */
4835      GrantFullControl?: GrantFullControl;
4836      /**
4837       * Allows grantee to read the object data and its metadata. This action is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts.
4838       */
4839      GrantRead?: GrantRead;
4840      /**
4841       * Allows grantee to read the object ACL. This action is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts.
4842       */
4843      GrantReadACP?: GrantReadACP;
4844      /**
4845       * Allows grantee to write the ACL for the applicable object. This action is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts.
4846       */
4847      GrantWriteACP?: GrantWriteACP;
4848      /**
4849       * Object key for which the PUT action was initiated.
4850       */
4851      Key: ObjectKey;
4852      /**
4853       * A map of metadata to store with the object in S3.
4854       */
4855      Metadata?: Metadata;
4856      /**
4857       * The server-side encryption algorithm used when storing this object in Amazon S3 (for example, AES256, aws:kms).
4858       */
4859      ServerSideEncryption?: ServerSideEncryption;
4860      /**
4861       * By default, Amazon S3 uses the STANDARD Storage Class to store newly created objects. The STANDARD storage class provides high durability and high availability. Depending on performance needs, you can specify a different Storage Class. Amazon S3 on Outposts only uses the OUTPOSTS Storage Class. For more information, see Storage Classes in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
4862       */
4863      StorageClass?: StorageClass;
4864      /**
4865       * If the bucket is configured as a website, redirects requests for this object to another object in the same bucket or to an external URL. Amazon S3 stores the value of this header in the object metadata. For information about object metadata, see Object Key and Metadata. In the following example, the request header sets the redirect to an object (anotherPage.html) in the same bucket:  x-amz-website-redirect-location: /anotherPage.html  In the following example, the request header sets the object redirect to another website:  x-amz-website-redirect-location: http://www.example.com/  For more information about website hosting in Amazon S3, see Hosting Websites on Amazon S3 and How to Configure Website Page Redirects. 
4866       */
4867      WebsiteRedirectLocation?: WebsiteRedirectLocation;
4868      /**
4869       * Specifies the algorithm to use to when encrypting the object (for example, AES256).
4870       */
4871      SSECustomerAlgorithm?: SSECustomerAlgorithm;
4872      /**
4873       * Specifies the customer-provided encryption key for Amazon S3 to use in encrypting data. This value is used to store the object and then it is discarded; Amazon S3 does not store the encryption key. The key must be appropriate for use with the algorithm specified in the x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-algorithm header.
4874       */
4875      SSECustomerKey?: SSECustomerKey;
4876      /**
4877       * Specifies the 128-bit MD5 digest of the encryption key according to RFC 1321. Amazon S3 uses this header for a message integrity check to ensure that the encryption key was transmitted without error.
4878       */
4879      SSECustomerKeyMD5?: SSECustomerKeyMD5;
4880      /**
4881       * If x-amz-server-side-encryption is present and has the value of aws:kms, this header specifies the ID of the Amazon Web Services Key Management Service (Amazon Web Services KMS) symmetrical customer managed customer master key (CMK) that was used for the object. If you specify x-amz-server-side-encryption:aws:kms, but do not provide x-amz-server-side-encryption-aws-kms-key-id, Amazon S3 uses the Amazon Web Services managed CMK in Amazon Web Services to protect the data. If the KMS key does not exist in the same account issuing the command, you must use the full ARN and not just the ID. 
4882       */
4883      SSEKMSKeyId?: SSEKMSKeyId;
4884      /**
4885       * Specifies the Amazon Web Services KMS Encryption Context to use for object encryption. The value of this header is a base64-encoded UTF-8 string holding JSON with the encryption context key-value pairs.
4886       */
4887      SSEKMSEncryptionContext?: SSEKMSEncryptionContext;
4888      /**
4889       * Specifies whether Amazon S3 should use an S3 Bucket Key for object encryption with server-side encryption using AWS KMS (SSE-KMS). Setting this header to true causes Amazon S3 to use an S3 Bucket Key for object encryption with SSE-KMS. Specifying this header with a PUT action doesn’t affect bucket-level settings for S3 Bucket Key.
4890       */
4891      BucketKeyEnabled?: BucketKeyEnabled;
4892      RequestPayer?: RequestPayer;
4893      /**
4894       * The tag-set for the object. The tag-set must be encoded as URL Query parameters. (For example, "Key1=Value1")
4895       */
4896      Tagging?: TaggingHeader;
4897      /**
4898       * The Object Lock mode that you want to apply to this object.
4899       */
4900      ObjectLockMode?: ObjectLockMode;
4901      /**
4902       * The date and time when you want this object's Object Lock to expire. Must be formatted as a timestamp parameter.
4903       */
4904      ObjectLockRetainUntilDate?: ObjectLockRetainUntilDate;
4905      /**
4906       * Specifies whether a legal hold will be applied to this object. For more information about S3 Object Lock, see Object Lock.
4907       */
4908      ObjectLockLegalHoldStatus?: ObjectLockLegalHoldStatus;
4909      /**
4910       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
4911       */
4912      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
4913    }
4914    export interface PutObjectRetentionOutput {
4915      RequestCharged?: RequestCharged;
4916    }
4917    export interface PutObjectRetentionRequest {
4918      /**
4919       * The bucket name that contains the object you want to apply this Object Retention configuration to.  When using this action with an access point, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
4920       */
4921      Bucket: BucketName;
4922      /**
4923       * The key name for the object that you want to apply this Object Retention configuration to.
4924       */
4925      Key: ObjectKey;
4926      /**
4927       * The container element for the Object Retention configuration.
4928       */
4929      Retention?: ObjectLockRetention;
4930      RequestPayer?: RequestPayer;
4931      /**
4932       * The version ID for the object that you want to apply this Object Retention configuration to.
4933       */
4934      VersionId?: ObjectVersionId;
4935      /**
4936       * Indicates whether this action should bypass Governance-mode restrictions.
4937       */
4938      BypassGovernanceRetention?: BypassGovernanceRetention;
4939      /**
4940       * The MD5 hash for the request body. For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically.
4941       */
4942      ContentMD5?: ContentMD5;
4943      /**
4944       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
4945       */
4946      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
4947    }
4948    export interface PutObjectTaggingOutput {
4949      /**
4950       * The versionId of the object the tag-set was added to.
4951       */
4952      VersionId?: ObjectVersionId;
4953    }
4954    export interface PutObjectTaggingRequest {
4955      /**
4956       * The bucket name containing the object.  When using this action with an access point, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. When using this action with Amazon S3 on Outposts, you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action using S3 on Outposts through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the Outposts bucket ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about S3 on Outposts ARNs, see Using S3 on Outposts in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
4957       */
4958      Bucket: BucketName;
4959      /**
4960       * Name of the object key.
4961       */
4962      Key: ObjectKey;
4963      /**
4964       * The versionId of the object that the tag-set will be added to.
4965       */
4966      VersionId?: ObjectVersionId;
4967      /**
4968       * The MD5 hash for the request body. For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically.
4969       */
4970      ContentMD5?: ContentMD5;
4971      /**
4972       * Container for the TagSet and Tag elements
4973       */
4974      Tagging: Tagging;
4975      /**
4976       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
4977       */
4978      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
4979      RequestPayer?: RequestPayer;
4980    }
4981    export interface PutPublicAccessBlockRequest {
4982      /**
4983       * The name of the Amazon S3 bucket whose PublicAccessBlock configuration you want to set.
4984       */
4985      Bucket: BucketName;
4986      /**
4987       * The MD5 hash of the PutPublicAccessBlock request body.  For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically.
4988       */
4989      ContentMD5?: ContentMD5;
4990      /**
4991       * The PublicAccessBlock configuration that you want to apply to this Amazon S3 bucket. You can enable the configuration options in any combination. For more information about when Amazon S3 considers a bucket or object public, see The Meaning of "Public" in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
4992       */
4993      PublicAccessBlockConfiguration: PublicAccessBlockConfiguration;
4994      /**
4995       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
4996       */
4997      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
4998    }
4999    export type QueueArn = string;
5000    export interface QueueConfiguration {
5001      Id?: NotificationId;
5002      /**
5003       * The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Amazon SQS queue to which Amazon S3 publishes a message when it detects events of the specified type.
5004       */
5005      QueueArn: QueueArn;
5006      /**
5007       * A collection of bucket events for which to send notifications
5008       */
5009      Events: EventList;
5010      Filter?: NotificationConfigurationFilter;
5011    }
5012    export interface QueueConfigurationDeprecated {
5013      Id?: NotificationId;
5014      Event?: Event;
5015      /**
5016       * A collection of bucket events for which to send notifications.
5017       */
5018      Events?: EventList;
5019      /**
5020       * The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Amazon SQS queue to which Amazon S3 publishes a message when it detects events of the specified type. 
5021       */
5022      Queue?: QueueArn;
5023    }
5024    export type QueueConfigurationList = QueueConfiguration[];
5025    export type Quiet = boolean;
5026    export type QuoteCharacter = string;
5027    export type QuoteEscapeCharacter = string;
5028    export type QuoteFields = "ALWAYS"|"ASNEEDED"|string;
5029    export type Range = string;
5030    export type RecordDelimiter = string;
5031    export interface RecordsEvent {
5032      /**
5033       * The byte array of partial, one or more result records.
5034       */
5035      Payload?: Buffer;
5036    }
5037    export interface Redirect {
5038      /**
5039       * The host name to use in the redirect request.
5040       */
5041      HostName?: HostName;
5042      /**
5043       * The HTTP redirect code to use on the response. Not required if one of the siblings is present.
5044       */
5045      HttpRedirectCode?: HttpRedirectCode;
5046      /**
5047       * Protocol to use when redirecting requests. The default is the protocol that is used in the original request.
5048       */
5049      Protocol?: Protocol;
5050      /**
5051       * The object key prefix to use in the redirect request. For example, to redirect requests for all pages with prefix docs/ (objects in the docs/ folder) to documents/, you can set a condition block with KeyPrefixEquals set to docs/ and in the Redirect set ReplaceKeyPrefixWith to /documents. Not required if one of the siblings is present. Can be present only if ReplaceKeyWith is not provided.  Replacement must be made for object keys containing special characters (such as carriage returns) when using XML requests. For more information, see  XML related object key constraints. 
5052       */
5053      ReplaceKeyPrefixWith?: ReplaceKeyPrefixWith;
5054      /**
5055       * The specific object key to use in the redirect request. For example, redirect request to error.html. Not required if one of the siblings is present. Can be present only if ReplaceKeyPrefixWith is not provided.  Replacement must be made for object keys containing special characters (such as carriage returns) when using XML requests. For more information, see  XML related object key constraints. 
5056       */
5057      ReplaceKeyWith?: ReplaceKeyWith;
5058    }
5059    export interface RedirectAllRequestsTo {
5060      /**
5061       * Name of the host where requests are redirected.
5062       */
5063      HostName: HostName;
5064      /**
5065       * Protocol to use when redirecting requests. The default is the protocol that is used in the original request.
5066       */
5067      Protocol?: Protocol;
5068    }
5069    export type ReplaceKeyPrefixWith = string;
5070    export type ReplaceKeyWith = string;
5071    export type ReplicaKmsKeyID = string;
5072    export interface ReplicaModifications {
5073      /**
5074       * Specifies whether Amazon S3 replicates modifications on replicas.
5075       */
5076      Status: ReplicaModificationsStatus;
5077    }
5078    export type ReplicaModificationsStatus = "Enabled"|"Disabled"|string;
5079    export interface ReplicationConfiguration {
5080      /**
5081       * The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Identity and Access Management (IAM) role that Amazon S3 assumes when replicating objects. For more information, see How to Set Up Replication in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
5082       */
5083      Role: Role;
5084      /**
5085       * A container for one or more replication rules. A replication configuration must have at least one rule and can contain a maximum of 1,000 rules. 
5086       */
5087      Rules: ReplicationRules;
5088    }
5089    export interface ReplicationRule {
5090      /**
5091       * A unique identifier for the rule. The maximum value is 255 characters.
5092       */
5093      ID?: ID;
5094      /**
5095       * The priority indicates which rule has precedence whenever two or more replication rules conflict. Amazon S3 will attempt to replicate objects according to all replication rules. However, if there are two or more rules with the same destination bucket, then objects will be replicated according to the rule with the highest priority. The higher the number, the higher the priority.  For more information, see Replication in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
5096       */
5097      Priority?: Priority;
5098      /**
5099       * An object key name prefix that identifies the object or objects to which the rule applies. The maximum prefix length is 1,024 characters. To include all objects in a bucket, specify an empty string.   Replacement must be made for object keys containing special characters (such as carriage returns) when using XML requests. For more information, see  XML related object key constraints. 
5100       */
5101      Prefix?: Prefix;
5102      Filter?: ReplicationRuleFilter;
5103      /**
5104       * Specifies whether the rule is enabled.
5105       */
5106      Status: ReplicationRuleStatus;
5107      /**
5108       * A container that describes additional filters for identifying the source objects that you want to replicate. You can choose to enable or disable the replication of these objects. Currently, Amazon S3 supports only the filter that you can specify for objects created with server-side encryption using a customer master key (CMK) stored in Amazon Web Services Key Management Service (SSE-KMS).
5109       */
5110      SourceSelectionCriteria?: SourceSelectionCriteria;
5111      /**
5112       * 
5113       */
5114      ExistingObjectReplication?: ExistingObjectReplication;
5115      /**
5116       * A container for information about the replication destination and its configurations including enabling the S3 Replication Time Control (S3 RTC).
5117       */
5118      Destination: Destination;
5119      DeleteMarkerReplication?: DeleteMarkerReplication;
5120    }
5121    export interface ReplicationRuleAndOperator {
5122      /**
5123       * An object key name prefix that identifies the subset of objects to which the rule applies.
5124       */
5125      Prefix?: Prefix;
5126      /**
5127       * An array of tags containing key and value pairs.
5128       */
5129      Tags?: TagSet;
5130    }
5131    export interface ReplicationRuleFilter {
5132      /**
5133       * An object key name prefix that identifies the subset of objects to which the rule applies.  Replacement must be made for object keys containing special characters (such as carriage returns) when using XML requests. For more information, see  XML related object key constraints. 
5134       */
5135      Prefix?: Prefix;
5136      /**
5137       * A container for specifying a tag key and value.  The rule applies only to objects that have the tag in their tag set.
5138       */
5139      Tag?: Tag;
5140      /**
5141       * A container for specifying rule filters. The filters determine the subset of objects to which the rule applies. This element is required only if you specify more than one filter. For example:    If you specify both a Prefix and a Tag filter, wrap these filters in an And tag.   If you specify a filter based on multiple tags, wrap the Tag elements in an And tag.  
5142       */
5143      And?: ReplicationRuleAndOperator;
5144    }
5145    export type ReplicationRuleStatus = "Enabled"|"Disabled"|string;
5146    export type ReplicationRules = ReplicationRule[];
5147    export type ReplicationStatus = "COMPLETE"|"PENDING"|"FAILED"|"REPLICA"|string;
5148    export interface ReplicationTime {
5149      /**
5150       *  Specifies whether the replication time is enabled. 
5151       */
5152      Status: ReplicationTimeStatus;
5153      /**
5154       *  A container specifying the time by which replication should be complete for all objects and operations on objects. 
5155       */
5156      Time: ReplicationTimeValue;
5157    }
5158    export type ReplicationTimeStatus = "Enabled"|"Disabled"|string;
5159    export interface ReplicationTimeValue {
5160      /**
5161       *  Contains an integer specifying time in minutes.   Valid value: 15
5162       */
5163      Minutes?: Minutes;
5164    }
5165    export type RequestCharged = "requester"|string;
5166    export type RequestPayer = "requester"|string;
5167    export interface RequestPaymentConfiguration {
5168      /**
5169       * Specifies who pays for the download and request fees.
5170       */
5171      Payer: Payer;
5172    }
5173    export interface RequestProgress {
5174      /**
5175       * Specifies whether periodic QueryProgress frames should be sent. Valid values: TRUE, FALSE. Default value: FALSE.
5176       */
5177      Enabled?: EnableRequestProgress;
5178    }
5179    export type RequestRoute = string;
5180    export type RequestToken = string;
5181    export type ResponseCacheControl = string;
5182    export type ResponseContentDisposition = string;
5183    export type ResponseContentEncoding = string;
5184    export type ResponseContentLanguage = string;
5185    export type ResponseContentType = string;
5186    export type ResponseExpires = Date;
5187    export type Restore = string;
5188    export interface RestoreObjectOutput {
5189      RequestCharged?: RequestCharged;
5190      /**
5191       * Indicates the path in the provided S3 output location where Select results will be restored to.
5192       */
5193      RestoreOutputPath?: RestoreOutputPath;
5194    }
5195    export interface RestoreObjectRequest {
5196      /**
5197       * The bucket name containing the object to restore.  When using this action with an access point, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. When using this action with Amazon S3 on Outposts, you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action using S3 on Outposts through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the Outposts bucket ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about S3 on Outposts ARNs, see Using S3 on Outposts in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
5198       */
5199      Bucket: BucketName;
5200      /**
5201       * Object key for which the action was initiated.
5202       */
5203      Key: ObjectKey;
5204      /**
5205       * VersionId used to reference a specific version of the object.
5206       */
5207      VersionId?: ObjectVersionId;
5208      RestoreRequest?: RestoreRequest;
5209      RequestPayer?: RequestPayer;
5210      /**
5211       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
5212       */
5213      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
5214    }
5215    export type RestoreOutputPath = string;
5216    export interface RestoreRequest {
5217      /**
5218       * Lifetime of the active copy in days. Do not use with restores that specify OutputLocation. The Days element is required for regular restores, and must not be provided for select requests.
5219       */
5220      Days?: Days;
5221      /**
5222       * S3 Glacier related parameters pertaining to this job. Do not use with restores that specify OutputLocation.
5223       */
5224      GlacierJobParameters?: GlacierJobParameters;
5225      /**
5226       * Type of restore request.
5227       */
5228      Type?: RestoreRequestType;
5229      /**
5230       * Retrieval tier at which the restore will be processed.
5231       */
5232      Tier?: Tier;
5233      /**
5234       * The optional description for the job.
5235       */
5236      Description?: Description;
5237      /**
5238       * Describes the parameters for Select job types.
5239       */
5240      SelectParameters?: SelectParameters;
5241      /**
5242       * Describes the location where the restore job's output is stored.
5243       */
5244      OutputLocation?: OutputLocation;
5245    }
5246    export type RestoreRequestType = "SELECT"|string;
5247    export type Role = string;
5248    export interface RoutingRule {
5249      /**
5250       * A container for describing a condition that must be met for the specified redirect to apply. For example, 1. If request is for pages in the /docs folder, redirect to the /documents folder. 2. If request results in HTTP error 4xx, redirect request to another host where you might process the error.
5251       */
5252      Condition?: Condition;
5253      /**
5254       * Container for redirect information. You can redirect requests to another host, to another page, or with another protocol. In the event of an error, you can specify a different error code to return.
5255       */
5256      Redirect: Redirect;
5257    }
5258    export type RoutingRules = RoutingRule[];
5259    export interface Rule {
5260      /**
5261       * Specifies the expiration for the lifecycle of the object.
5262       */
5263      Expiration?: LifecycleExpiration;
5264      /**
5265       * Unique identifier for the rule. The value can't be longer than 255 characters.
5266       */
5267      ID?: ID;
5268      /**
5269       * Object key prefix that identifies one or more objects to which this rule applies.  Replacement must be made for object keys containing special characters (such as carriage returns) when using XML requests. For more information, see  XML related object key constraints. 
5270       */
5271      Prefix: Prefix;
5272      /**
5273       * If Enabled, the rule is currently being applied. If Disabled, the rule is not currently being applied.
5274       */
5275      Status: ExpirationStatus;
5276      /**
5277       * Specifies when an object transitions to a specified storage class. For more information about Amazon S3 lifecycle configuration rules, see Transitioning Objects Using Amazon S3 Lifecycle in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
5278       */
5279      Transition?: Transition;
5280      NoncurrentVersionTransition?: NoncurrentVersionTransition;
5281      NoncurrentVersionExpiration?: NoncurrentVersionExpiration;
5282      AbortIncompleteMultipartUpload?: AbortIncompleteMultipartUpload;
5283    }
5284    export type Rules = Rule[];
5285    export interface S3KeyFilter {
5286      FilterRules?: FilterRuleList;
5287    }
5288    export interface S3Location {
5289      /**
5290       * The name of the bucket where the restore results will be placed.
5291       */
5292      BucketName: BucketName;
5293      /**
5294       * The prefix that is prepended to the restore results for this request.
5295       */
5296      Prefix: LocationPrefix;
5297      Encryption?: Encryption;
5298      /**
5299       * The canned ACL to apply to the restore results.
5300       */
5301      CannedACL?: ObjectCannedACL;
5302      /**
5303       * A list of grants that control access to the staged results.
5304       */
5305      AccessControlList?: Grants;
5306      /**
5307       * The tag-set that is applied to the restore results.
5308       */
5309      Tagging?: Tagging;
5310      /**
5311       * A list of metadata to store with the restore results in S3.
5312       */
5313      UserMetadata?: UserMetadata;
5314      /**
5315       * The class of storage used to store the restore results.
5316       */
5317      StorageClass?: StorageClass;
5318    }
5319    export type SSECustomerAlgorithm = string;
5320    export type SSECustomerKey = Buffer|Uint8Array|Blob|string;
5321    export type SSECustomerKeyMD5 = string;
5322    export interface SSEKMS {
5323      /**
5324       * Specifies the ID of the Amazon Web Services Key Management Service (Amazon Web Services KMS) symmetric customer managed customer master key (CMK) to use for encrypting inventory reports.
5325       */
5326      KeyId: SSEKMSKeyId;
5327    }
5328    export type SSEKMSEncryptionContext = string;
5329    export type SSEKMSKeyId = string;
5330    export interface SSES3 {
5331    }
5332    export interface ScanRange {
5333      /**
5334       * Specifies the start of the byte range. This parameter is optional. Valid values: non-negative integers. The default value is 0. If only start is supplied, it means scan from that point to the end of the file.For example; &lt;scanrange&gt;&lt;start&gt;50&lt;/start&gt;&lt;/scanrange&gt; means scan from byte 50 until the end of the file.
5335       */
5336      Start?: Start;
5337      /**
5338       * Specifies the end of the byte range. This parameter is optional. Valid values: non-negative integers. The default value is one less than the size of the object being queried. If only the End parameter is supplied, it is interpreted to mean scan the last N bytes of the file. For example, &lt;scanrange&gt;&lt;end&gt;50&lt;/end&gt;&lt;/scanrange&gt; means scan the last 50 bytes.
5339       */
5340      End?: End;
5341    }
5342    export type SelectObjectContentEventStream = EventStream<{Records?:RecordsEvent,Stats?:StatsEvent,Progress?:ProgressEvent,Cont?:ContinuationEvent,End?:EndEvent}>;
5343    export interface SelectObjectContentOutput {
5344      /**
5345       * The array of results.
5346       */
5347      Payload?: SelectObjectContentEventStream;
5348    }
5349    export interface SelectObjectContentRequest {
5350      /**
5351       * The S3 bucket.
5352       */
5353      Bucket: BucketName;
5354      /**
5355       * The object key.
5356       */
5357      Key: ObjectKey;
5358      /**
5359       * The SSE Algorithm used to encrypt the object. For more information, see Server-Side Encryption (Using Customer-Provided Encryption Keys. 
5360       */
5361      SSECustomerAlgorithm?: SSECustomerAlgorithm;
5362      /**
5363       * The SSE Customer Key. For more information, see Server-Side Encryption (Using Customer-Provided Encryption Keys. 
5364       */
5365      SSECustomerKey?: SSECustomerKey;
5366      /**
5367       * The SSE Customer Key MD5. For more information, see Server-Side Encryption (Using Customer-Provided Encryption Keys. 
5368       */
5369      SSECustomerKeyMD5?: SSECustomerKeyMD5;
5370      /**
5371       * The expression that is used to query the object.
5372       */
5373      Expression: Expression;
5374      /**
5375       * The type of the provided expression (for example, SQL).
5376       */
5377      ExpressionType: ExpressionType;
5378      /**
5379       * Specifies if periodic request progress information should be enabled.
5380       */
5381      RequestProgress?: RequestProgress;
5382      /**
5383       * Describes the format of the data in the object that is being queried.
5384       */
5385      InputSerialization: InputSerialization;
5386      /**
5387       * Describes the format of the data that you want Amazon S3 to return in response.
5388       */
5389      OutputSerialization: OutputSerialization;
5390      /**
5391       * Specifies the byte range of the object to get the records from. A record is processed when its first byte is contained by the range. This parameter is optional, but when specified, it must not be empty. See RFC 2616, Section 14.35.1 about how to specify the start and end of the range.  ScanRangemay be used in the following ways:    &lt;scanrange&gt;&lt;start&gt;50&lt;/start&gt;&lt;end&gt;100&lt;/end&gt;&lt;/scanrange&gt; - process only the records starting between the bytes 50 and 100 (inclusive, counting from zero)    &lt;scanrange&gt;&lt;start&gt;50&lt;/start&gt;&lt;/scanrange&gt; - process only the records starting after the byte 50    &lt;scanrange&gt;&lt;end&gt;50&lt;/end&gt;&lt;/scanrange&gt; - process only the records within the last 50 bytes of the file.  
5392       */
5393      ScanRange?: ScanRange;
5394      /**
5395       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
5396       */
5397      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
5398    }
5399    export interface SelectParameters {
5400      /**
5401       * Describes the serialization format of the object.
5402       */
5403      InputSerialization: InputSerialization;
5404      /**
5405       * The type of the provided expression (for example, SQL).
5406       */
5407      ExpressionType: ExpressionType;
5408      /**
5409       * The expression that is used to query the object.
5410       */
5411      Expression: Expression;
5412      /**
5413       * Describes how the results of the Select job are serialized.
5414       */
5415      OutputSerialization: OutputSerialization;
5416    }
5417    export type ServerSideEncryption = "AES256"|"aws:kms"|string;
5418    export interface ServerSideEncryptionByDefault {
5419      /**
5420       * Server-side encryption algorithm to use for the default encryption.
5421       */
5422      SSEAlgorithm: ServerSideEncryption;
5423      /**
5424       * Amazon Web Services Key Management Service (KMS) customer Amazon Web Services KMS key ID to use for the default encryption. This parameter is allowed if and only if SSEAlgorithm is set to aws:kms. You can specify the key ID or the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the KMS key. However, if you are using encryption with cross-account operations, you must use a fully qualified KMS key ARN. For more information, see Using encryption for cross-account operations.   For example:    Key ID: 1234abcd-12ab-34cd-56ef-1234567890ab    Key ARN: arn:aws:kms:us-east-2:111122223333:key/1234abcd-12ab-34cd-56ef-1234567890ab     Amazon S3 only supports symmetric KMS keys and not asymmetric KMS keys. For more information, see Using symmetric and asymmetric keys in the Amazon Web Services Key Management Service Developer Guide. 
5425       */
5426      KMSMasterKeyID?: SSEKMSKeyId;
5427    }
5428    export interface ServerSideEncryptionConfiguration {
5429      /**
5430       * Container for information about a particular server-side encryption configuration rule.
5431       */
5432      Rules: ServerSideEncryptionRules;
5433    }
5434    export interface ServerSideEncryptionRule {
5435      /**
5436       * Specifies the default server-side encryption to apply to new objects in the bucket. If a PUT Object request doesn't specify any server-side encryption, this default encryption will be applied.
5437       */
5438      ApplyServerSideEncryptionByDefault?: ServerSideEncryptionByDefault;
5439      /**
5440       * Specifies whether Amazon S3 should use an S3 Bucket Key with server-side encryption using KMS (SSE-KMS) for new objects in the bucket. Existing objects are not affected. Setting the BucketKeyEnabled element to true causes Amazon S3 to use an S3 Bucket Key. By default, S3 Bucket Key is not enabled. For more information, see Amazon S3 Bucket Keys in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
5441       */
5442      BucketKeyEnabled?: BucketKeyEnabled;
5443    }
5444    export type ServerSideEncryptionRules = ServerSideEncryptionRule[];
5445    export type Setting = boolean;
5446    export type Size = number;
5447    export interface SourceSelectionCriteria {
5448      /**
5449       *  A container for filter information for the selection of Amazon S3 objects encrypted with Amazon Web Services KMS. If you include SourceSelectionCriteria in the replication configuration, this element is required. 
5450       */
5451      SseKmsEncryptedObjects?: SseKmsEncryptedObjects;
5452      /**
5453       * A filter that you can specify for selections for modifications on replicas. Amazon S3 doesn't replicate replica modifications by default. In the latest version of replication configuration (when Filter is specified), you can specify this element and set the status to Enabled to replicate modifications on replicas.    If you don't specify the Filter element, Amazon S3 assumes that the replication configuration is the earlier version, V1. In the earlier version, this element is not allowed 
5454       */
5455      ReplicaModifications?: ReplicaModifications;
5456    }
5457    export interface SseKmsEncryptedObjects {
5458      /**
5459       * Specifies whether Amazon S3 replicates objects created with server-side encryption using an Amazon Web Services KMS key stored in Amazon Web Services Key Management Service.
5460       */
5461      Status: SseKmsEncryptedObjectsStatus;
5462    }
5463    export type SseKmsEncryptedObjectsStatus = "Enabled"|"Disabled"|string;
5464    export type Start = number;
5465    export type StartAfter = string;
5466    export interface Stats {
5467      /**
5468       * The total number of object bytes scanned.
5469       */
5470      BytesScanned?: BytesScanned;
5471      /**
5472       * The total number of uncompressed object bytes processed.
5473       */
5474      BytesProcessed?: BytesProcessed;
5475      /**
5476       * The total number of bytes of records payload data returned.
5477       */
5478      BytesReturned?: BytesReturned;
5479    }
5480    export interface StatsEvent {
5481      /**
5482       * The Stats event details.
5483       */
5484      Details?: Stats;
5485    }
5486    export type StorageClass = "STANDARD"|"REDUCED_REDUNDANCY"|"STANDARD_IA"|"ONEZONE_IA"|"INTELLIGENT_TIERING"|"GLACIER"|"DEEP_ARCHIVE"|"OUTPOSTS"|string;
5487    export interface StorageClassAnalysis {
5488      /**
5489       * Specifies how data related to the storage class analysis for an Amazon S3 bucket should be exported.
5490       */
5491      DataExport?: StorageClassAnalysisDataExport;
5492    }
5493    export interface StorageClassAnalysisDataExport {
5494      /**
5495       * The version of the output schema to use when exporting data. Must be V_1.
5496       */
5497      OutputSchemaVersion: StorageClassAnalysisSchemaVersion;
5498      /**
5499       * The place to store the data for an analysis.
5500       */
5501      Destination: AnalyticsExportDestination;
5502    }
5503    export type StorageClassAnalysisSchemaVersion = "V_1"|string;
5504    export type Suffix = string;
5505    export interface Tag {
5506      /**
5507       * Name of the object key.
5508       */
5509      Key: ObjectKey;
5510      /**
5511       * Value of the tag.
5512       */
5513      Value: Value;
5514    }
5515    export type TagCount = number;
5516    export type TagSet = Tag[];
5517    export interface Tagging {
5518      /**
5519       * A collection for a set of tags
5520       */
5521      TagSet: TagSet;
5522    }
5523    export type TaggingDirective = "COPY"|"REPLACE"|string;
5524    export type TaggingHeader = string;
5525    export type TargetBucket = string;
5526    export interface TargetGrant {
5527      /**
5528       * Container for the person being granted permissions.
5529       */
5530      Grantee?: Grantee;
5531      /**
5532       * Logging permissions assigned to the grantee for the bucket.
5533       */
5534      Permission?: BucketLogsPermission;
5535    }
5536    export type TargetGrants = TargetGrant[];
5537    export type TargetPrefix = string;
5538    export type Tier = "Standard"|"Bulk"|"Expedited"|string;
5539    export interface Tiering {
5540      /**
5541       * The number of consecutive days of no access after which an object will be eligible to be transitioned to the corresponding tier. The minimum number of days specified for Archive Access tier must be at least 90 days and Deep Archive Access tier must be at least 180 days. The maximum can be up to 2 years (730 days).
5542       */
5543      Days: IntelligentTieringDays;
5544      /**
5545       * S3 Intelligent-Tiering access tier. See Storage class for automatically optimizing frequently and infrequently accessed objects for a list of access tiers in the S3 Intelligent-Tiering storage class.
5546       */
5547      AccessTier: IntelligentTieringAccessTier;
5548    }
5549    export type TieringList = Tiering[];
5550    export type Token = string;
5551    export type TopicArn = string;
5552    export interface TopicConfiguration {
5553      Id?: NotificationId;
5554      /**
5555       * The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Amazon SNS topic to which Amazon S3 publishes a message when it detects events of the specified type.
5556       */
5557      TopicArn: TopicArn;
5558      /**
5559       * The Amazon S3 bucket event about which to send notifications. For more information, see Supported Event Types in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
5560       */
5561      Events: EventList;
5562      Filter?: NotificationConfigurationFilter;
5563    }
5564    export interface TopicConfigurationDeprecated {
5565      Id?: NotificationId;
5566      /**
5567       * A collection of events related to objects
5568       */
5569      Events?: EventList;
5570      /**
5571       * Bucket event for which to send notifications.
5572       */
5573      Event?: Event;
5574      /**
5575       * Amazon SNS topic to which Amazon S3 will publish a message to report the specified events for the bucket.
5576       */
5577      Topic?: TopicArn;
5578    }
5579    export type TopicConfigurationList = TopicConfiguration[];
5580    export interface Transition {
5581      /**
5582       * Indicates when objects are transitioned to the specified storage class. The date value must be in ISO 8601 format. The time is always midnight UTC.
5583       */
5584      Date?: _Date;
5585      /**
5586       * Indicates the number of days after creation when objects are transitioned to the specified storage class. The value must be a positive integer.
5587       */
5588      Days?: Days;
5589      /**
5590       * The storage class to which you want the object to transition.
5591       */
5592      StorageClass?: TransitionStorageClass;
5593    }
5594    export type TransitionList = Transition[];
5595    export type TransitionStorageClass = "GLACIER"|"STANDARD_IA"|"ONEZONE_IA"|"INTELLIGENT_TIERING"|"DEEP_ARCHIVE"|string;
5596    export type Type = "CanonicalUser"|"AmazonCustomerByEmail"|"Group"|string;
5597    export type URI = string;
5598    export type UploadIdMarker = string;
5599    export interface UploadPartCopyOutput {
5600      /**
5601       * The version of the source object that was copied, if you have enabled versioning on the source bucket.
5602       */
5603      CopySourceVersionId?: CopySourceVersionId;
5604      /**
5605       * Container for all response elements.
5606       */
5607      CopyPartResult?: CopyPartResult;
5608      /**
5609       * The server-side encryption algorithm used when storing this object in Amazon S3 (for example, AES256, aws:kms).
5610       */
5611      ServerSideEncryption?: ServerSideEncryption;
5612      /**
5613       * If server-side encryption with a customer-provided encryption key was requested, the response will include this header confirming the encryption algorithm used.
5614       */
5615      SSECustomerAlgorithm?: SSECustomerAlgorithm;
5616      /**
5617       * If server-side encryption with a customer-provided encryption key was requested, the response will include this header to provide round-trip message integrity verification of the customer-provided encryption key.
5618       */
5619      SSECustomerKeyMD5?: SSECustomerKeyMD5;
5620      /**
5621       * If present, specifies the ID of the Amazon Web Services Key Management Service (Amazon Web Services KMS) symmetric customer managed customer master key (CMK) that was used for the object.
5622       */
5623      SSEKMSKeyId?: SSEKMSKeyId;
5624      /**
5625       * Indicates whether the multipart upload uses an S3 Bucket Key for server-side encryption with Amazon Web Services KMS (SSE-KMS).
5626       */
5627      BucketKeyEnabled?: BucketKeyEnabled;
5628      RequestCharged?: RequestCharged;
5629    }
5630    export interface UploadPartCopyRequest {
5631      /**
5632       * The bucket name. When using this action with an access point, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. When using this action with Amazon S3 on Outposts, you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action using S3 on Outposts through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the Outposts bucket ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about S3 on Outposts ARNs, see Using S3 on Outposts in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
5633       */
5634      Bucket: BucketName;
5635      /**
5636       * Specifies the source object for the copy operation. You specify the value in one of two formats, depending on whether you want to access the source object through an access point:   For objects not accessed through an access point, specify the name of the source bucket and key of the source object, separated by a slash (/). For example, to copy the object reports/january.pdf from the bucket awsexamplebucket, use awsexamplebucket/reports/january.pdf. The value must be URL encoded.   For objects accessed through access points, specify the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the object as accessed through the access point, in the format arn:aws:s3:&lt;Region&gt;:&lt;account-id&gt;:accesspoint/&lt;access-point-name&gt;/object/&lt;key&gt;. For example, to copy the object reports/january.pdf through access point my-access-point owned by account 123456789012 in Region us-west-2, use the URL encoding of arn:aws:s3:us-west-2:123456789012:accesspoint/my-access-point/object/reports/january.pdf. The value must be URL encoded.  Amazon S3 supports copy operations using access points only when the source and destination buckets are in the same Amazon Web Services Region.  Alternatively, for objects accessed through Amazon S3 on Outposts, specify the ARN of the object as accessed in the format arn:aws:s3-outposts:&lt;Region&gt;:&lt;account-id&gt;:outpost/&lt;outpost-id&gt;/object/&lt;key&gt;. For example, to copy the object reports/january.pdf through outpost my-outpost owned by account 123456789012 in Region us-west-2, use the URL encoding of arn:aws:s3-outposts:us-west-2:123456789012:outpost/my-outpost/object/reports/january.pdf. The value must be URL encoded.    To copy a specific version of an object, append ?versionId=&lt;version-id&gt; to the value (for example, awsexamplebucket/reports/january.pdf?versionId=QUpfdndhfd8438MNFDN93jdnJFkdmqnh893). If you don't specify a version ID, Amazon S3 copies the latest version of the source object.
5637       */
5638      CopySource: CopySource;
5639      /**
5640       * Copies the object if its entity tag (ETag) matches the specified tag.
5641       */
5642      CopySourceIfMatch?: CopySourceIfMatch;
5643      /**
5644       * Copies the object if it has been modified since the specified time.
5645       */
5646      CopySourceIfModifiedSince?: CopySourceIfModifiedSince;
5647      /**
5648       * Copies the object if its entity tag (ETag) is different than the specified ETag.
5649       */
5650      CopySourceIfNoneMatch?: CopySourceIfNoneMatch;
5651      /**
5652       * Copies the object if it hasn't been modified since the specified time.
5653       */
5654      CopySourceIfUnmodifiedSince?: CopySourceIfUnmodifiedSince;
5655      /**
5656       * The range of bytes to copy from the source object. The range value must use the form bytes=first-last, where the first and last are the zero-based byte offsets to copy. For example, bytes=0-9 indicates that you want to copy the first 10 bytes of the source. You can copy a range only if the source object is greater than 5 MB.
5657       */
5658      CopySourceRange?: CopySourceRange;
5659      /**
5660       * Object key for which the multipart upload was initiated.
5661       */
5662      Key: ObjectKey;
5663      /**
5664       * Part number of part being copied. This is a positive integer between 1 and 10,000.
5665       */
5666      PartNumber: PartNumber;
5667      /**
5668       * Upload ID identifying the multipart upload whose part is being copied.
5669       */
5670      UploadId: MultipartUploadId;
5671      /**
5672       * Specifies the algorithm to use to when encrypting the object (for example, AES256).
5673       */
5674      SSECustomerAlgorithm?: SSECustomerAlgorithm;
5675      /**
5676       * Specifies the customer-provided encryption key for Amazon S3 to use in encrypting data. This value is used to store the object and then it is discarded; Amazon S3 does not store the encryption key. The key must be appropriate for use with the algorithm specified in the x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-algorithm header. This must be the same encryption key specified in the initiate multipart upload request.
5677       */
5678      SSECustomerKey?: SSECustomerKey;
5679      /**
5680       * Specifies the 128-bit MD5 digest of the encryption key according to RFC 1321. Amazon S3 uses this header for a message integrity check to ensure that the encryption key was transmitted without error.
5681       */
5682      SSECustomerKeyMD5?: SSECustomerKeyMD5;
5683      /**
5684       * Specifies the algorithm to use when decrypting the source object (for example, AES256).
5685       */
5686      CopySourceSSECustomerAlgorithm?: CopySourceSSECustomerAlgorithm;
5687      /**
5688       * Specifies the customer-provided encryption key for Amazon S3 to use to decrypt the source object. The encryption key provided in this header must be one that was used when the source object was created.
5689       */
5690      CopySourceSSECustomerKey?: CopySourceSSECustomerKey;
5691      /**
5692       * Specifies the 128-bit MD5 digest of the encryption key according to RFC 1321. Amazon S3 uses this header for a message integrity check to ensure that the encryption key was transmitted without error.
5693       */
5694      CopySourceSSECustomerKeyMD5?: CopySourceSSECustomerKeyMD5;
5695      RequestPayer?: RequestPayer;
5696      /**
5697       * The account ID of the expected destination bucket owner. If the destination bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
5698       */
5699      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
5700      /**
5701       * The account ID of the expected source bucket owner. If the source bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
5702       */
5703      ExpectedSourceBucketOwner?: AccountId;
5704    }
5705    export interface UploadPartOutput {
5706      /**
5707       * The server-side encryption algorithm used when storing this object in Amazon S3 (for example, AES256, aws:kms).
5708       */
5709      ServerSideEncryption?: ServerSideEncryption;
5710      /**
5711       * Entity tag for the uploaded object.
5712       */
5713      ETag?: ETag;
5714      /**
5715       * If server-side encryption with a customer-provided encryption key was requested, the response will include this header confirming the encryption algorithm used.
5716       */
5717      SSECustomerAlgorithm?: SSECustomerAlgorithm;
5718      /**
5719       * If server-side encryption with a customer-provided encryption key was requested, the response will include this header to provide round-trip message integrity verification of the customer-provided encryption key.
5720       */
5721      SSECustomerKeyMD5?: SSECustomerKeyMD5;
5722      /**
5723       * If present, specifies the ID of the Amazon Web Services Key Management Service (Amazon Web Services KMS) symmetric customer managed customer master key (CMK) was used for the object.
5724       */
5725      SSEKMSKeyId?: SSEKMSKeyId;
5726      /**
5727       * Indicates whether the multipart upload uses an S3 Bucket Key for server-side encryption with Amazon Web Services KMS (SSE-KMS).
5728       */
5729      BucketKeyEnabled?: BucketKeyEnabled;
5730      RequestCharged?: RequestCharged;
5731    }
5732    export interface UploadPartRequest {
5733      /**
5734       * Object data.
5735       */
5736      Body?: Body;
5737      /**
5738       * The name of the bucket to which the multipart upload was initiated. When using this action with an access point, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. When using this action with Amazon S3 on Outposts, you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action using S3 on Outposts through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the Outposts bucket ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about S3 on Outposts ARNs, see Using S3 on Outposts in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
5739       */
5740      Bucket: BucketName;
5741      /**
5742       * Size of the body in bytes. This parameter is useful when the size of the body cannot be determined automatically.
5743       */
5744      ContentLength?: ContentLength;
5745      /**
5746       * The base64-encoded 128-bit MD5 digest of the part data. This parameter is auto-populated when using the command from the CLI. This parameter is required if object lock parameters are specified.
5747       */
5748      ContentMD5?: ContentMD5;
5749      /**
5750       * Object key for which the multipart upload was initiated.
5751       */
5752      Key: ObjectKey;
5753      /**
5754       * Part number of part being uploaded. This is a positive integer between 1 and 10,000.
5755       */
5756      PartNumber: PartNumber;
5757      /**
5758       * Upload ID identifying the multipart upload whose part is being uploaded.
5759       */
5760      UploadId: MultipartUploadId;
5761      /**
5762       * Specifies the algorithm to use to when encrypting the object (for example, AES256).
5763       */
5764      SSECustomerAlgorithm?: SSECustomerAlgorithm;
5765      /**
5766       * Specifies the customer-provided encryption key for Amazon S3 to use in encrypting data. This value is used to store the object and then it is discarded; Amazon S3 does not store the encryption key. The key must be appropriate for use with the algorithm specified in the x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-algorithm header. This must be the same encryption key specified in the initiate multipart upload request.
5767       */
5768      SSECustomerKey?: SSECustomerKey;
5769      /**
5770       * Specifies the 128-bit MD5 digest of the encryption key according to RFC 1321. Amazon S3 uses this header for a message integrity check to ensure that the encryption key was transmitted without error.
5771       */
5772      SSECustomerKeyMD5?: SSECustomerKeyMD5;
5773      RequestPayer?: RequestPayer;
5774      /**
5775       * The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP 403 (Access Denied) error.
5776       */
5777      ExpectedBucketOwner?: AccountId;
5778    }
5779    export type UserMetadata = MetadataEntry[];
5780    export type Value = string;
5781    export type VersionIdMarker = string;
5782    export interface VersioningConfiguration {
5783      /**
5784       * Specifies whether MFA delete is enabled in the bucket versioning configuration. This element is only returned if the bucket has been configured with MFA delete. If the bucket has never been so configured, this element is not returned.
5785       */
5786      MFADelete?: MFADelete;
5787      /**
5788       * The versioning state of the bucket.
5789       */
5790      Status?: BucketVersioningStatus;
5791    }
5792    export interface WebsiteConfiguration {
5793      /**
5794       * The name of the error document for the website.
5795       */
5796      ErrorDocument?: ErrorDocument;
5797      /**
5798       * The name of the index document for the website.
5799       */
5800      IndexDocument?: IndexDocument;
5801      /**
5802       * The redirect behavior for every request to this bucket's website endpoint.  If you specify this property, you can't specify any other property. 
5803       */
5804      RedirectAllRequestsTo?: RedirectAllRequestsTo;
5805      /**
5806       * Rules that define when a redirect is applied and the redirect behavior.
5807       */
5808      RoutingRules?: RoutingRules;
5809    }
5810    export type WebsiteRedirectLocation = string;
5811    export interface WriteGetObjectResponseRequest {
5812      /**
5813       * Route prefix to the HTTP URL generated.
5814       */
5815      RequestRoute: RequestRoute;
5816      /**
5817       * A single use encrypted token that maps WriteGetObjectResponse to the end user GetObject request.
5818       */
5819      RequestToken: RequestToken;
5820      /**
5821       * The object data.
5822       */
5823      Body?: Body;
5824      /**
5825       * The integer status code for an HTTP response of a corresponding GetObject request.  Status Codes     200 - OK     206 - Partial Content     304 - Not Modified     400 - Bad Request     401 - Unauthorized     403 - Forbidden     404 - Not Found     405 - Method Not Allowed     409 - Conflict     411 - Length Required     412 - Precondition Failed     416 - Range Not Satisfiable     500 - Internal Server Error     503 - Service Unavailable   
5826       */
5827      StatusCode?: GetObjectResponseStatusCode;
5828      /**
5829       * A string that uniquely identifies an error condition. Returned in the &lt;Code&gt; tag of the error XML response for a corresponding GetObject call. Cannot be used with a successful StatusCode header or when the transformed object is provided in the body. All error codes from S3 are sentence-cased. Regex value is "^[A-Z][a-zA-Z]+$".
5830       */
5831      ErrorCode?: ErrorCode;
5832      /**
5833       * Contains a generic description of the error condition. Returned in the &lt;Message&gt; tag of the error XML response for a corresponding GetObject call. Cannot be used with a successful StatusCode header or when the transformed object is provided in body.
5834       */
5835      ErrorMessage?: ErrorMessage;
5836      /**
5837       * Indicates that a range of bytes was specified.
5838       */
5839      AcceptRanges?: AcceptRanges;
5840      /**
5841       * Specifies caching behavior along the request/reply chain.
5842       */
5843      CacheControl?: CacheControl;
5844      /**
5845       * Specifies presentational information for the object.
5846       */
5847      ContentDisposition?: ContentDisposition;
5848      /**
5849       * Specifies what content encodings have been applied to the object and thus what decoding mechanisms must be applied to obtain the media-type referenced by the Content-Type header field.
5850       */
5851      ContentEncoding?: ContentEncoding;
5852      /**
5853       * The language the content is in.
5854       */
5855      ContentLanguage?: ContentLanguage;
5856      /**
5857       * The size of the content body in bytes.
5858       */
5859      ContentLength?: ContentLength;
5860      /**
5861       * The portion of the object returned in the response.
5862       */
5863      ContentRange?: ContentRange;
5864      /**
5865       * A standard MIME type describing the format of the object data.
5866       */
5867      ContentType?: ContentType;
5868      /**
5869       * Specifies whether an object stored in Amazon S3 is (true) or is not (false) a delete marker. 
5870       */
5871      DeleteMarker?: DeleteMarker;
5872      /**
5873       * An opaque identifier assigned by a web server to a specific version of a resource found at a URL. 
5874       */
5875      ETag?: ETag;
5876      /**
5877       * The date and time at which the object is no longer cacheable.
5878       */
5879      Expires?: Expires;
5880      /**
5881       * If object stored in Amazon S3 expiration is configured (see PUT Bucket lifecycle) it includes expiry-date and rule-id key-value pairs providing object expiration information. The value of the rule-id is URL encoded. 
5882       */
5883      Expiration?: Expiration;
5884      /**
5885       * The date and time that the object was last modified.
5886       */
5887      LastModified?: LastModified;
5888      /**
5889       * Set to the number of metadata entries not returned in x-amz-meta headers. This can happen if you create metadata using an API like SOAP that supports more flexible metadata than the REST API. For example, using SOAP, you can create metadata whose values are not legal HTTP headers.
5890       */
5891      MissingMeta?: MissingMeta;
5892      /**
5893       * A map of metadata to store with the object in S3.
5894       */
5895      Metadata?: Metadata;
5896      /**
5897       * Indicates whether an object stored in Amazon S3 has Object Lock enabled. For more information about S3 Object Lock, see Object Lock.
5898       */
5899      ObjectLockMode?: ObjectLockMode;
5900      /**
5901       * Indicates whether an object stored in Amazon S3 has an active legal hold.
5902       */
5903      ObjectLockLegalHoldStatus?: ObjectLockLegalHoldStatus;
5904      /**
5905       * The date and time when Object Lock is configured to expire.
5906       */
5907      ObjectLockRetainUntilDate?: ObjectLockRetainUntilDate;
5908      /**
5909       * The count of parts this object has.
5910       */
5911      PartsCount?: PartsCount;
5912      /**
5913       * Indicates if request involves bucket that is either a source or destination in a Replication rule. For more information about S3 Replication, see Replication.
5914       */
5915      ReplicationStatus?: ReplicationStatus;
5916      RequestCharged?: RequestCharged;
5917      /**
5918       * Provides information about object restoration operation and expiration time of the restored object copy.
5919       */
5920      Restore?: Restore;
5921      /**
5922       *  The server-side encryption algorithm used when storing requested object in Amazon S3 (for example, AES256, aws:kms).
5923       */
5924      ServerSideEncryption?: ServerSideEncryption;
5925      /**
5926       * Encryption algorithm used if server-side encryption with a customer-provided encryption key was specified for object stored in Amazon S3.
5927       */
5928      SSECustomerAlgorithm?: SSECustomerAlgorithm;
5929      /**
5930       *  If present, specifies the ID of the Amazon Web Services Key Management Service (Amazon Web Services KMS) symmetric customer managed customer master key (CMK) that was used for stored in Amazon S3 object. 
5931       */
5932      SSEKMSKeyId?: SSEKMSKeyId;
5933      /**
5934       *  128-bit MD5 digest of customer-provided encryption key used in Amazon S3 to encrypt data stored in S3. For more information, see Protecting data using server-side encryption with customer-provided encryption keys (SSE-C).
5935       */
5936      SSECustomerKeyMD5?: SSECustomerKeyMD5;
5937      /**
5938       *  The class of storage used to store object in Amazon S3.
5939       */
5940      StorageClass?: StorageClass;
5941      /**
5942       * The number of tags, if any, on the object.
5943       */
5944      TagCount?: TagCount;
5945      /**
5946       * An ID used to reference a specific version of the object.
5947       */
5948      VersionId?: ObjectVersionId;
5949      /**
5950       *  Indicates whether the object stored in Amazon S3 uses an S3 bucket key for server-side encryption with Amazon Web Services KMS (SSE-KMS).
5951       */
5952      BucketKeyEnabled?: BucketKeyEnabled;
5953    }
5954    export type Years = number;
5955    /**
5956     * A string in YYYY-MM-DD format that represents the latest possible API version that can be used in this service. Specify 'latest' to use the latest possible version.
5957     */
5958    export type apiVersion = "2006-03-01"|"latest"|string;
5959    export interface ClientApiVersions {
5960      /**
5961       * A string in YYYY-MM-DD format that represents the latest possible API version that can be used in this service. Specify 'latest' to use the latest possible version.
5962       */
5963      apiVersion?: apiVersion;
5964    }
5965    export type ClientConfiguration = ServiceConfigurationOptions & UseDualstackConfigOptions & ClientApiVersions;
5966    /**
5967     * Contains interfaces for use with the S3 client.
5968     */
5969    export import Types = S3;
5970  }
5971  export = S3;